Canon | EOS R | User guide | Canon EOS R User guide

Canon EOS R User guide
zz This manual is for the EOS R with
firmware version 1.3.0 or later installed.
ENGLISH
Advanced User Guide
Introduction
Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following
To avoid shooting problems and accidents, first read the “Safety
Instructions” (p.25–27) and “Handling Precautions” (p.28–30).
Also, read this manual carefully to ensure that you use the camera
correctly.
Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further
Familiarize Yourself with the Camera
While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they
come out. You can then better understand the camera. Be sure to
store this manual safely, too, so that you can refer to it again when
necessary.
Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the
images cannot be recorded or imported to a computer, Canon cannot
be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded
images of people and certain subjects for anything but private
enjoyment. Also be aware that certain public performances, exhibitions,
etc. may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment.
Connecting Other Devices
Use the included interface cable or a genuine Canon cable when connecting
the camera to a computer or other device. When connecting an interface
cable, also use the included cable protector (p.37).
2
Item Check List
Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your
camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.
Camera
(with eyecup and body cap)
Strap
Battery Pack
LP-E6N
(with protective cover)
Interface Cable
Battery Charger
LC-E6E*
Cable Protector
* Battery Charger LC-E6E comes with a power cord.
ooThe camera does not come with a memory card (p.10) or HDMI cable.
ooFor details on the Advanced User Guide and Instruction Manuals, see the next
page.
ooIf you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.
ooBe careful not to lose any of the above items.
When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon
website (p.4).
The Lens Instruction Manuals (PDF files) are for lenses sold individually.
Note that when purchasing the Lens Kit, some of the accessories included
with the lens may not match those listed in the Lens Instruction Manual.
3
Instruction Manuals
The Instruction Manual included with the camera
provides basic instructions for the camera and Wi-Fi
functions.
The Advanced User Guide (this PDF file), which provides
complete instructions, can be downloaded from the Canon
website to a computer or other device.
Downloading the Advanced User Guide/Instruction Manuals
The Advanced User Guide and instruction manuals for lenses and
software (PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon website to a
computer or other device.
zzDownload site
Advanced User Guide
Lens Instruction Manual
Software Instruction Manual
ggwww.canon.com/icpd
ooTo view the PDF files, an Adobe PDF viewing software such as
Adobe Acrobat Reader DC (most recent version recommended) is
required.
ooAdobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded for free from the Internet.
ooDouble-click the downloaded PDF file to open it.
ooTo learn how to use PDF viewing software, refer to the software’s Help
section or the like.
4
Instruction Manuals
Downloading the Advanced User Guide/Instruction
Manuals Using QR Code
The Advanced User Guide and instruction manuals for lenses and
software (PDF files) can be downloaded to a smartphone or tablet
using the QR code.
ggwww.canon.com/icpd
ooA software application is required to read the QR code.
ooSelect your country or region of residence, then download the Advanced
User Guide/Instruction Manuals.
ooSelect [Manual/software URL] under the [56] tab to display the QR
code on the camera screen.
5
Quick Start Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
Insert the battery (p.43).
zz Upon purchase, charge the
battery to start using (p.40).
Insert the card (p.44).
zz With the card’s label facing
toward the back of the
camera, insert it into the
card slot.
Attach the lens (p.50).
zz Align the red mount index on the
lens with the red mount index on
the camera to attach the lens.
zz Make sure the lens’s focus mode
switch is set to <2> (p.50).
Set the power switch to <1>
(p.48).
Flip out the screen (p.47).
zz When the date/time/zone setting
screen is displayed, see page
380.
Quick Start Guide
6
7
8
9
Set the shooting mode to [A]
(p.123).
zz Press the <W> button and
turn the <6> dial to select [A],
then press <0>.
zz All the necessary camera settings
will be set automatically.
Focus on the subject (p.56).
zz <p> (an AF point) appears over
any face detected.
zz Press the shutter button halfway,
and the camera will focus on the
subject.
Take the picture (p.56).
zz Press the shutter button
completely to take the picture.
Review the picture.
zz The image just captured will be
displayed for approx. 2 sec. on
the screen.
zz To display the image again, press
the <x> button (p.304).
zz To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.304).
zz To delete images, see “Erasing Images” (p.335).
7
About This Manual
Chapter Organization
Chapters 2–7 correspond to the functions in camera menus.
Icons in this Manual
: Indicates the Mode button.
<W>
: Indicates the Main dial.
<6>
: Indicates the Quick control dial.
<5>
<W><X><Y><Z> : Indicates the corresponding direction on the <V>
<m>
<T>
<0>
*
cross keys.
: Indicates the <B> Multi-function bar.
: Indicates the lens control ring.
: Indicates the Setting button.
: Indicates the duration (in seconds) of the operation
for the button you pressed, as timed after you
release the button.
• In addition to the above, the icons and symbols used on the camera’s buttons
and displayed on the screen are also used in this manual when discussing
relevant operations and functionality.
: A M icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function
is available only in [t], [d], [s], [f], [a], or [BULB]
mode.
(p.***) :Reference page numbers for more information.
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
: Tips or advice for better shooting.
: Troubleshooting advice.
M
8
About This Manual
Basic Assumptions for Operational Instructions, Sample Photos
zz Before following any instructions, make sure the power switch is
set to <1> and no controls are locked with the Multi-function lock
(p.48, 60).
zz It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are
set to their defaults.
zz The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the
RF24-105mm F4 L IS USM lens as an example.
zz The sample photos used in this manual are for instructional purposes
only.
zz In references to using EF or EF-S lenses, it is assumed that a mount
adapter is used.
9
Compatible Cards
The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of
capacity. If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized)
by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera
(p.373).
zzSD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
* UHS-II and UHS-I cards supported.
Cards that Can Record Movies
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with good enough
performances (fast enough writing and reading speeds) to handle the
movie recording quality. For details, see page 611.
In this manual, “card” refers to SD memory cards, SDHC memory
cards, and SDXC memory cards.
* The camera does not come with a card for recording photos/
movies. Please purchase it separately.
10
Chapters
Introduction
2
1
Preparation and Basic Operations
39
2
Shooting
69
3
AF
255
4
Playback
301
5
Set-up
361
6
Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions
423
7
Custom Functions / My Menu
539
8
Reference
571
11
Contents
Introduction
2
Item Check List.......................................................................... 3
Instruction Manuals.................................................................... 4
Quick Start Guide....................................................................... 6
About This Manual..................................................................... 8
Compatible Cards.................................................................... 10
Chapters................................................................................... 11
Index to Features..................................................................... 21
Safety Instructions.................................................................... 25
Handling Precautions............................................................... 28
Part Names.............................................................................. 31
1
Preparation and Basic Operations
39
Charging the Battery................................................................ 40
Inserting/Removing the Battery................................................ 43
Inserting and Removing the Card............................................ 44
Using the Screen...................................................................... 47
Turning on the Power............................................................... 48
Attaching and Detaching a Lens.............................................. 50
Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses............................... 52
Using the Viewfinder................................................................ 54
Basic Operations...................................................................... 55
Menu Operations and Settings................................................. 63
12
Contents
d Touch-Screen Operation...................................................... 67
Q Quick Control...................................................................... 68
2
Shooting
2-1 Shooting Still Photos
69
70
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting.............................................. 71
Index to Features: Still Photo Shooting.................................... 74
Setting Image Quality............................................................... 75
Setting Up Dual Pixel RAW Shooting....................................... 78
Setting Cropping/Aspect Ratio................................................. 80
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos............................. 83
Selecting a Picture Style.......................................................... 88
Customizing a Picture Style..................................................... 92
Registering a Picture Style....................................................... 95
B: Setting the White Balance............................................... 97
u White Balance Correction................................................. 102
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast........................... 104
Setting Noise Reduction......................................................... 105
Highlight Tone Priority............................................................ 109
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to
Optical Characteristics........................................................... 110
Reducing Flicker.................................................................... 115
Setting the Color Space......................................................... 117
13
Contents
Card Reminder....................................................................... 118
Setting the Image Review Time............................................. 118
Setting the Metering Timer..................................................... 119
Exposure Simulation.............................................................. 120
Appending Dust Delete Data.................................................. 121
AFully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)............ 123
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)................. 126
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter....................................... 130
d: Program AE...................................................................... 132
s: Shutter-Priority AE.......................................................... 134
f: Aperture-Priority AE....................................................... 136
a: Manual Exposure............................................................. 138
t: Flexible-Priority AE.......................................................... 140
i Selecting the Drive Mode................................................. 144
j Using the Self-Timer ......................................................... 147
Selecting the Display Speed for High-Speed Continuous
Shooting................................................................................. 149
Silent Live View Shooting....................................................... 150
Silent Shooting....................................................................... 151
q Selecting the Metering Mode............................................ 152
O Setting the Desired Exposure Compensation................... 154
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)..................................... 155
A Locking the Exposure for Shooting (AE Lock).................. 157
14
Contents
BULB: Long (Bulb) Exposures............................................... 158
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting........................ 161
P Multiple Exposures........................................................... 166
Remote Control Shooting....................................................... 174
Using a Remote Switch.......................................................... 176
D Flash Photography............................................................. 177
Setting the Flash Function..................................................... 179
2-2 Shooting Movies
188
Tab Menus: Movie Shooting................................................... 189
Index to Features: Movie Shooting........................................ 191
Setting the Movie Recording Quality...................................... 192
Setting the Sound Recording................................................. 202
Setting the Time Code............................................................ 205
k Shooting Movies............................................................... 209
Movie Cropping...................................................................... 219
Movie Digital IS...................................................................... 220
Shooting HDR Movies............................................................ 222
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies.......................................... 224
Shooting Movies Set to Canon Log........................................ 236
Menu Function Settings ....................................................... 244
3
AF
255
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos).................................................. 256
15
Contents
Tab Menus: AF (Movies)........................................................ 259
Selecting the AF Operation.................................................... 262
Selecting the AF Method........................................................ 265
Setting the AF Point Size....................................................... 276
Focusing on People’s Eyes.................................................... 277
Setting Continuous AF........................................................... 278
Setting Touch & Drag AF........................................................ 279
MF: Focusing Manually.......................................................... 281
Setting Movie Servo AF.......................................................... 286
Customizing AF Functions..................................................... 288
4
Playback
301
Tab Menus: Playback............................................................. 302
Index to Features: Playback and Related Operations............ 303
x Image Playback............................................................... 304
Customizing Playback Information Display............................ 307
H Index Display (Multiple-Image Display)............................ 310
e Jump Display (Jumping Through Images)......................... 311
t Filtering Images for Playback........................................... 313
u Magnifying Images............................................................ 315
b Rotating Images................................................................ 317
K Protecting Images............................................................. 318
p Setting Ratings................................................................. 321
16
Contents
k Enjoying Movies............................................................... 324
k Playing Back Movies........................................................ 325
XEditing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes........................... 327
I Grabbing a Frame from 4K Movies or
4K Time-Lapse Movies........................................................... 329
Slide Show (Auto Playback)................................................... 331
Viewing Images on a Television............................................. 333
L Erasing Images................................................................. 335
R Processing RAW Images with the Camera.................... 339
S Resizing JPEG Images..................................................... 345
N Cropping JPEG Images.................................................... 346
d Transferring Images to a Computer/FTP Server.............. 348
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF).................................. 353
p Specifying Images for a Photobook................................... 357
5
Set-up
361
Tab Menus: Set-up................................................................. 362
Creating and Selecting a Folder............................................. 365
File Numbering Methods........................................................ 367
Renaming Files...................................................................... 370
Setting the Auto Rotation of Vertical Images.......................... 372
Formatting the Card............................................................... 373
Setting Eco Mode................................................................... 376
17
Contents
Setting Power-Saving Features............................................. 377
Adjusting the Screen Brightness............................................ 378
Adjusting the Screen Color Tone............................................ 379
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone.................................. 380
Setting the Interface Language.............................................. 383
Setting the Video System....................................................... 384
Setting the Touch Control Response...................................... 385
Disabling Beeps for Camera Operations................................ 386
Checking the Battery Information........................................... 387
f Sensor Cleaning............................................................. 391
Setting the HDMI Output Resolution...................................... 395
RAW Playback on an HDR TV............................................... 396
Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting.............. 397
Setting a Priority for Shooting Display Performance.............. 402
Setting the Viewfinder Display Format................................... 402
Setting the Display Mode....................................................... 403
Customizing Shutter Button Functionality.............................. 404
1 Help.................................................................................. 405
Setting Wireless Features...................................................... 407
Geotagging Images................................................................ 411
R Setting the Multi-Function Lock.................................... 416
w: Registering Custom Shooting Modes.............................. 417
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings........................ 419
18
Contents
Setting Copyright Information................................................. 420
Checking Other Information................................................... 422
6
Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions
423
What You Can Do via Wi-Fi
(Wireless Communication) Functions.................................... 424
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi.................................. 427
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi...................................... 461
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi........................................... 469
Sending Images to a Web Service......................................... 481
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points....................................... 496
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi.......................................................... 509
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings............................ 513
Clearing Wireless Communication Settings to Default........... 515
View Info Screen.................................................................... 516
Responding to Error Messages.............................................. 517
Wireless Communication Function Notes.............................. 528
Security.................................................................................. 530
Checking Network Settings.................................................... 531
[Wireless communication settings] Screen....................... 532
[Wi-Fi settings] Screen......................................................... 533
Virtual Keyboard Operation.................................................... 534
Setting the IP Address Manually............................................ 535
19
Contents
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Status Display............................................... 537
7
Custom Functions / My Menu
539
Tab Menus: Customization..................................................... 540
Custom Function Settings...................................................... 542
Customizing Operations......................................................... 555
Tab Menus: My Menu............................................................. 565
Registering My Menu............................................................. 566
8
Reference
571
Software Overview................................................................. 572
Importing Images to a Computer............................................ 574
Charging a Battery in the Camera.......................................... 576
Using a Battery Grip............................................................... 578
Troubleshooting Guide........................................................... 588
Error Codes............................................................................ 607
Performance Data.................................................................. 608
Information Display................................................................ 617
Index...................................................................................... 633
20
Index to Features
Power
Viewfinder
zz Charging the battery
B p.40
zz Dioptric adjustment
B p.54
zz Battery level
B p.49
zz Checking battery
information
zz Information display in
viewfinder
B p.397
B p.387
zz Household power
outlet
zz Viewfinder vertical
display
B p.399
B p.582
zz Eco mode
B p.376
zz Viewfinder display
format
B p.402
zz Power saving
B p.377
Cards
Screen
zz Vari-angle
B p.47
B p.67
zz Formatting
B p.373
zz Touch control
zz Releasing shutter
without card
zz Color tone
B p.379
B p.118
zz Brightness
B p.378
zz Display settings
B p.403
zz Electronic level
B p.397
zz Help
B p.405
zz Cards compatible
with movie recording
B p.611
Lens
zz Attaching
B p.50, 52
zz Detaching
B p.51, 53
zz Releasing shutter
without lens
B p.551
Basic Settings
zz Language
B p.383
zz Date/Time/Zone
B p.380
zz Beeper
B p.386
zz Copyright information B p.420
zz Clear all camera
settings
B p.419
AF
zz AF operation
B p.262
zz AF method
B p.265
zz AF point selection
B p.271
zz AF frame size
B p.276
zz Eye Detection AF
B p.277
zz Continuous AF
B p.278
zz Touch & drag AF
B p.279
zz MF peaking settings
B p.283
zz Focus guide
B p.284
zz Customizing AF
functions
B p.288
zz Manual focusing
B p.281
zz Electronic manual
focus
B p.293
21
Index to Features
Metering
zz Metering mode
Shooting
B p.152
Drive
zz Drive mode
B p.144
zz Self-timer
B p.147
zz Silent LV shooting
B p.150
zz Silent shooting
B p.151
zz Maximum burst
B p.77
Image Recording Settings
zz Creating/Selecting
a folder
zz File numbering
B p.161
zz Multiple exposures
B p.166
zz Bulb timer
B p.159
zz Depth-of-field preview B p.137
zz Remote switch
B p.176
zz Remote control
B p.174
• Pairing
B p.408
zz Quick Control
B p.68
B p.130
B p.365
zz Magnified view
B p.273
B p.367
zz Grid display
B p.399
zz Shooting information
display
B p.397
zz Display settings
B p.403
zz Multi-function lock
B p.60
zz Error codes
B p.607
Image Quality
B p.75
zz Dual Pixel RAW
B p.78
zz Cropping/aspect ratio
B p.80
zz ISO speed (still photos) B p.83
zz Picture Style
B p.88
zz White balance
B p.97
zz Auto Lighting Optimizer B p.104
B p.105
zz Noise reduction for long
exposures
B p.107
zz Highlight tone priority
B p.109
zz Lens aberration
correction
B p.110
zz Reducing flicker
B p.115
zz Color space
B p.117
22
B p.70
zz HDR mode
zz Touch Shutter
zz Image quality
zz Noise reduction for
high ISO speeds
zz Shooting mode
Exposure
zz Exposure
compensation
B p.154
zz Exposure compensation
with M+ISO Auto
B p.139
zz AEB
B p.155
zz AE lock
B p.157
zz Safety shift
B p.545
zz Exposure simulation
B p.120
Index to Features
zz Attenuator
B p.203
zz External flash
B p.177
zz Time code
B p.205
zz Flash exposure
compensation
zz Auto slow shutter
B p.248
B p.177
zz Av 1/8-stop increments B p.249
zz FE lock
B p.177
Flash
zz Flash function settings B p.182
zz Flash Custom Function
settings
B p.187
Movie Shooting
zz Autoexposure shooting B p.209
zz HDMI output
B p.251
zz Remote control
shooting
B p.245
Playback
zz Image review time
B p.118
zz Single-image display
B p.304
B p.305
zz Shutter priority AE
shooting
B p.210
zz Shooting information
display
zz Aperture priority AE
shooting
zz Grid display
B p.305
B p.211
zz Touch playback
B p.306
zz Manual exposure
shooting
B p.213
zz Playback information
display
B p.307
zz ISO speed (movie)
B p.246
zz Index display
B p.310
zz Movie Servo AF
B p.286
zz Movie Servo AF
tracking sensitivity
zz Image browsing
(Jump display)
B p.311
B p.291
zz Setting image search
conditions
B p.313
zz Magnified view
B p.315
zz Image rotation
B p.317
zz Movie Servo AF speed B p.292
zz Movie recording quality B p.192
zz 24.00p
B p.198
zz High Frame Rate
B p.199
zz Protect
B p.318
zz Movie cropping
shooting
zz Rating
B p.321
B p.219
zz Movie playback
B p.325
zz HDR movie
B p.222
zz Time-lapse movie
B p.224
zz Editing a movie’s first
and last scenes
B p.327
zz Canon Log
B p.236
zz Frame Grab (4K)
B p.329
zz Sound recording
B p.202
zz Slide show
B p.331
zz Viewing images on
a television
B p.333
zz Erasing
B p.335
zz Microphone
B p.203
zz Wind filter
B p.202
23
Index to Features
Image Editing
Wireless Features
zz RAW image processing B p.339
zz Resizing JPEGs
B p.345
zz Cropping JPEGs
B p.346
Image Transfer/Print Order
zz Image transfer to a
computer/FTP server
B p.348
zz Print order (DPOF)
B p.353
zz Photobook Set-up
B p.357
Customization
zz Custom Functions
(C.Fn)
B p.542
B p.566
zz Custom shooting mode B p.417
Sensor Cleaning and Dust Reduction
zz Sensor cleaning
B p.391
zz Appending Dust Delete
Data
B p.121
zz Manual sensor
cleaning
B p.393
Software
zz Downloading and
Installing
B p.572
zz Software Instruction
Manuals
B p.573
24
B p.427
zz Auto send images to
smartphones
B p.446
zz Remote control
(EOS Utility)
B p.461
zz Auto send images to
computers
B p.466
zz Print from Wi-Fi
printers
B p.469
zz Upload to Web services B p.481
zz Customizing operations B p.555
zz My Menu
zz Connect to
smartphones
zz Clear wireless settings B p.515
Safety Instructions
Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product
safely.
Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of
the product or others.
WARNING:
Denotes the risk of serious injury or death.
oo Keep the product out of the reach of young children.
A strap wrapped around a person’s neck may result in strangulation.
The parts or provided items of cameras or accessories are dangerous if swallowed. If
swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.
The battery is dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical
assistance.
oo Use only power sources specified in this instruction manual for use with the product.
oo Do not disassemble or modify the product.
oo Do not expose the product to strong shocks or vibration.
oo Do not touch any exposed internal parts.
oo Stop using the product in any case of unusual circumstances such as the presence
of smoke or a strange smell.
oo Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine or paint thinner to clean the
product.
oo Do not get the product wet. Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into the product.
oo Do not use the product where flammable gases may be present.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
oo Do not leave a lens or a camera with a lens attached, exposed without the lens cap
attached.
The lens may concentrate the light and cause fire.
oo Do not touch the product connected to a power outlet during lightning storms.
This may cause electric shock.
oo Observe the following instructions when using commercially available batteries or
provided battery packs.
• Use batteries/battery packs only with their specified product.
• Do not heat batteries/battery packs or expose them to fire.
• Do not charge batteries/battery packs using non-authorized battery chargers.
• Do not expose the terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with metallic pins
or other metal objects.
• Do not use leaking batteries/battery packs.
• When disposing of batteries/battery packs, insulate the terminals with tape or other
means.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
If a battery/battery pack leaks and the material contacts your skin or clothing, flush the
exposed area thoroughly with running water. In case of eye contact, flush thoroughly
with copious amounts of clean running water and seek immediate medical assistance.
25
Safety Instructions
oo Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger or AC adapter.
• Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power outlet using a dry cloth.
• Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands.
• Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the power outlet.
• Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come into contact
with metallic pins or other metal objects.
oo Do not touch the battery charger or AC adapter connected to a power outlet during
lightning storms.
oo Do not place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not damage, break or modify the power cord.
oo Do not wrap the product in cloth or other materials when in use or shortly after use
when the product is still warm in temperature.
oo Do not unplug the product by pulling the power cord.
oo Do not leave the product connected to a power source for long periods of time.
oo Do not charge batteries/battery packs at temperatures outside the range of 5–40 °C
(41–104 °F).
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
oo Do not allow the product to maintain contact with the same area of skin for extended
periods of time during use.
This may result in low-temperature contact burns, including skin redness and blistering,
even if the product does not feel hot. The use of a tripod or similar equipment is
recommended when using the product in hot places and for people with circulation
problems or less sensitive skin.
oo Follow any indications to turn off the product in places where its use is forbidden.
Not doing so may cause other equipment to malfunction due to the effect of
electromagnetic waves and even result in accidents.
oo To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, explosions, and electrical shock,
follow the safeguards below:
• Do not insert the battery’s plus and minus ends incorrectly.
oo Do not leave any cords near a heat source.
It can deform the cord or melt the insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.
oo Do not fire the flash at anyone driving a car or other vehicle.
It may cause an accident.
oo Do not use or store the equipment in dusty or humid places. Likewise, keep the
battery away from metallic items and store it with its protective cover attached to
prevent short-circuit.
This is to prevent fire, excessive heat, electrical shock, and burns.
oo To prevent a fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:
• Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.
• Do not use a cord whose wire is broken or insulation is damaged.
oo Do not connect the battery directly to an electrical outlet or a car’s cigarette lighter outlet.
The battery may leak, generate excessive heat or explode, causing fire, burns, or injuries.
oo A thorough explanation of how to use the product by an adult is required when the
product is used by children. Supervise children while they are using the product.
Incorrect usage may result in electrical shock or injury.
26
Safety Instructions
CAUTION:
Denotes the risk of injury.
oo Do not fire the flash near the eyes.
It may hurt the eyes.
oo Strap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any product
attached on a hook or other object may damage the product. Also, do not shake the
product or expose the product to strong impacts.
oo Do not apply strong pressure on the lens or allow an object to hit it.
This may cause injury or damage to the product.
oo Flash emits high temperatures when fired. Keep fingers, any other part of your body,
and objects away from the flash unit while taking pictures.
This may cause burns or malfunction of the flash.
oo Do not leave the product in places exposed to extremely high or low temperatures.
The product may become extremely hot/cold and cause burns or injury when touched.
oo Only mount the product on a tripod that is sufficiently sturdy.
oo Do not carry the product when it is mounted on a tripod.
This may cause injury or may result in an accident.
oo Do not look at the screen or through the viewfinder for prolonged periods of time.
This may induce symptoms similar to motion sickness. In such a case, stop using the
product immediately and rest for a while before resuming use.
oo Do not touch any parts inside the product.
This may cause injury.
27
Handling Precautions
Camera Care
zz This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to
physical shock.
zz The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater.
zz To maximize the camera’s dust- and drip- resistance, keep the
terminal cover, battery compartment cover, card slot cover, and all
other covers firmly closed.
zz This camera is designed to be dust- and drip- resistant, in order to
help prevent sand, dust, dirt, or water that falls on it unexpectedly
from getting inside, but it is impossible to prevent dirt, dust, water,
or salt from getting inside at all. As far as possible, do not allow dirt,
dust, water, or salt to get on the camera.
zz If water gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry and clean cloth. If
dirt, dust, or salt gets on the camera, wipe it off with a clean, wellwrung wet cloth.
zz Using the camera in a location with large amounts of dirt or dust may
cause a malfunction.
zz Cleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust,
water, or salt to remain on the camera may cause a malfunction.
zz If you accidentally drop the camera into water or are concerned that
moisture (water), dirt, dust, or salt may have gotten inside it, promptly
consult the nearest Canon Service Center.
zz Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field
such as a magnet or electric motor. Also, avoid using or leaving the
camera near anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large
antenna. Strong magnetic fields can cause camera malfunction or
destroy image data.
zz Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct
sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
zz The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
28
Handling Precautions
zz Do not block shutter curtain operation with your finger or other
objects. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
zz Use only a commercially available blower to blow away dust when it
adheres to the lens, viewfinder, etc. Do not use cleaners that contain
organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt,
take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center.
zz Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This
is to prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can
cause camera malfunction.
zz If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it
adjust to the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
zz If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is
to avoid damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the
lens, card and battery from the camera, and wait until condensation
has evaporated before using the camera.
zz If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the
battery and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location.
Even while the camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few
times once in a while to check that the camera is still working.
zz Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in
rust and corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
zz If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its
functions before using it. If you have not used the camera for some
time or if there is an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming
up, have the camera checked by your nearest Canon Service Center
or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly.
zz The camera may become hot after repeated continuous shooting
or still photo/movie shooting over an extended period. This is not a
malfunction.
zz If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area,
ghosting may occur.
29
Handling Precautions
Screen, Viewfinder, and LCD Panel
zz Although the screen and viewfinder are manufactured with very
high precision technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, 0.01%
or fewer of the pixels may be dead, and there may also be spots of
black, red, or other colors. This is not a malfunction. They do not
affect the images recorded.
zz If the screen is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may
occur where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this
is only temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused
for a few days.
zz The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or
may look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room
temperature.
Shutter
zz Shutter blades may become scuffed from shutter operations, but this
does not indicate damage.
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
zz Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive
force, physical shock, or vibration.
zz Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or
anything metallic.
zz Do not affix any stickers, etc. on the card.
zz Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong
magnetic field, such as a television, speakers, or magnets. Also
avoid places prone to having static electricity.
zz Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
zz Store the card in a case.
zz Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
(1)
Lens
zz After detaching the lens from the camera, put down
the lens with the rear end up and attach the rear
lens cap to avoid scratching the lens surface and
electrical contacts (1).
30
Part Names
(1)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(2)
(15)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(16)
(17)
(6)
(7)
(18)
(19)
(8)
(20)
(21)
(9)
(22)
(10)
(11)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
<W> button
Movie shooting button
<6> Main dial
<B> Multi-function button
Shutter button
<U> LCD panel info switching/
Illumination button
(7) AF-assist beam/Self-timer/
Remote control lamp
(8) Grip (Battery compartment)
(9) DC coupler cord hole
(10) Contacts
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
Lens mount
Flash sync contacts
Hot shoe
RF lens mount index
Speaker
<V> Focal plane mark
Strap mount
Microphone
Shutter curtain/Image sensor
Lens release button
Lens lock pin
Body cap
31
Part Names
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(5)
(10)
(15)
(11)
(16)
(17)
(12)
(18)
(19)
(13)
(14)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
32
Eyecup
Viewfinder eyepiece
Dioptric adjustment knob
Power switch
Terminal cover
LCD panel
<R> Multi-function lock button
<5> Quick control dial
<p> AF start button
Viewfinder sensor
(11) <B> Info button
(12) Access lamp
(13) <Q/0> Quick Control/Setting
button
(14) <M> Menu button
(15) <F> Remote control terminal
(16) <g> Digital terminal
(17) <Y> External microphone IN
terminal
(18) <D> HDMI mini OUT
terminal
(19) <n> Headphone terminal
Part Names
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
Contact cover
Accessory positioning hole
Screen
Tripod socket
<W><X><Y><Z>: <V> cross
keys
Serial number
<x> Playback button
<B> Multi-function bar
<A> AE lock/FE lock button
(13)
(10) <S/u> AF point/Index/Magnify/
Reduce button
(11) Strap mount
(12) Card slot cover
(13) Card slot
(14) Battery compartment cover lock
(15) Battery compartment cover
(16) <L> Erase button
(17) Accessory positioning hole
33
Part Names
LCD Panel
Sample display
Information displayed varies depending
on camera status. For icon details, see
page 617.
Viewfinder Information Display
Sample display
34
Information displayed varies depending
on camera status.
Part Names
Battery Charger LC-E6E
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.40).
(3)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Charge lamp
Battery pack slot
Power cord
Power cord socket
(2)
(4)
35
Part Names
Attaching the Strap
Pass the end of the strap through the
camera’s strap mount eyelet from the
bottom. Then pass it through the strap’s
buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull
the strap to take up any slack and make
sure the strap will not loosen from the
buckle.
36
Part Names
Using the Cable Protector
When connecting the camera to a computer, use the included interface
cable or a genuine Canon cable.
When connecting the interface cable, also use the included cable
protector. Using the cable protector helps prevent accidental
disconnection and terminal damage.
Using the Included Interface Cable and a Canon HDMI Cable
(Sold Separately)
1
2
(1)
(2)
3
4
(3)
5
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Cable protector
Clamp
Included interface cable
HDMI cable (sold
separately)
(4)
37
Part Names
Using an Optional Canon Interface Cable
When using a genuine Canon interface
cable (sold separately), run the cable
through the clamp (5) as shown before
attaching the clamp to the cable
protector.
(5)
ooThe digital terminal may be damaged if the interface cable is connected
without the cable protector.
ooMake sure the interface cable is securely connected to the digital
terminal.
HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended when connecting
the camera to a television. Also use the cable protector when connecting an
HDMI cable.
38
1
Preparation and
Basic Operations
This chapter describes preparatory steps before you start
shooting and the basic camera operations.
39
Charging the Battery
the protective cover
1 Detach
provided with the battery.
insert the battery in the
2 Fully
charger.
zz Do the opposite to remove the battery.
the battery.
3 Recharge
zz Connect the power cord to the
charger and insert the plug into a
power outlet.
ggRecharging starts automatically and
the charge lamp blinks in orange.
40
Charging the Battery
Charge Level
0–49%
50–74%
Charge Lamp
Color
Orange
75% or higher
Fully charged
Green
Display
Blinks once per second
Blinks twice per second
Blinks three times per
second
Turned on
zz It takes approx. 2 hr. and 30 min. to fully recharge a completely
exhausted battery at room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time
required to recharge the battery will vary greatly depending on the
ambient temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.
zz For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5–10°C /
41–50°F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hr.).
41
Charging the Battery
zz Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.
zz Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be
used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its
capacity.
zz After recharging the battery, remove it and disconnect the charger
from the power outlet.
zz You can attach the protective cover in a
different orientation to indicate whether the
battery is recharged or not.
If the battery is recharged, attach the protective
cover so that the battery-shaped hole < > is
aligned over the blue sticker on the battery. If the battery is exhausted,
attach the protective cover in the opposite orientation.
zz When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount
of power current will keep being released, resulting in excess discharge
and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover
attached. Storing the battery when it is fully charged may lower the
battery performance.
zz The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz
power source. If necessary, attach a commercially available plug adapter
for the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage
transformer to the battery charger. Doing so may damage the battery
charger.
zz If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after having been
fully charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.
Check the battery’s recharge performance (p.387) and purchase a new
battery.
ooAfter disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for
approx. 10 sec.
ooIf the battery’s remaining capacity (p.387) is 94% or higher, the battery
will not be recharged.
ooThe provided charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack
LP-E6N/LP-E6.
42
Inserting/Removing the Battery
Load a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N (or LP-E6) into the camera.
Insertion
the battery compartment
1 Slide
cover lock and open the cover.
the battery.
2 Insert
zz Insert the end with the electrical
contacts.
zz Insert the battery until it locks in place.
the cover.
3 Close
zz Press the cover until it snaps shut.
You cannot use batteries other than the Battery Pack LP-E6N or LP-E6.
Removal
Open the cover and remove the
battery.
zz Press the battery lock lever as shown
by the arrow and remove the battery.
zz To prevent short circuiting, be sure to
attach the provided protective cover
(p.40) to the battery.
43
Inserting and Removing the Card
The captured images are recorded onto the card.
Make sure the card’s write-protect switch (1) is set upward to enable
writing and erasing.
Insertion
1 Slide the cover to open it.
(1)
the card.
2 Insert
zz As shown by the illustration, face
the card’s label side toward you
and insert it until it clicks in place.
the cover.
3 Close
zz Close the cover and slide it in the
direction shown by the arrow until it
snaps shut.
44
Inserting and Removing the Card
Removal
the cover.
1 Open
zz Set the power switch to <2>.
(1)
zz Check that the access lamp (1) is
off, then open the cover.
zz If [Saving...] is displayed on the
screen, close the cover.
the card.
2 Remove
zz Gently push in the card, then let it go
to eject.
zz Pull the card straight out, then close
the cover.
Formatting the Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another
camera or computer, format the card with this camera (p.373).
ooThe number of possible shots varies depending on the remaining
capacity of the card, the settings of image quality, ISO speed, etc.
ooSetting [z1: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent
you from forgetting to insert a card (p.118).
45
Inserting and Removing the Card
ooWhen the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images
are being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is
being transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time.
Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or
blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.
• Removing the card.
• Removing the battery.
• Shaking or striking the camera.
• Unplugging and connecting a power cord (when household power
outlet accessories (sold separately) are used).
ooIf the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not
start from 0001 (p.367).
ooIf a card-related error message is displayed on the screen, remove and
reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer images on the card to a computer, transfer all the
images and then format the card with the camera (p.373). The card
may then return to normal.
ooDo not touch the card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects.
Do not expose the contacts to dust or water. If smudges adhere to the
contacts, contact failure may result.
ooMultimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used. (Card error will be displayed.)
ooUse of UHS-II microSDHC/SDXC cards with a microSD to SD adapter is
not recommended. When using UHS-II cards, use SDHC/SDXC cards.
46
Using the Screen
You can change the direction and angle of the screen.
1 Flip out the screen.
the screen.
2 Rotate
zz When the screen is swung out, you
180°
90°
175°
can rotate it up, down, or over 180° to
face the subject.
zz The indicated angle is only
approximate.
it toward you.
3 Face
zz Normally, use the camera with the
screen facing you.
ooBe careful not to forcefully rotate the screen, putting much power on the
rotating axis (hinge).
ooWhen a cable is connected to a camera terminal, the rotation angle
range of the flipped-out screen will be limited.
ooWhen not using the camera, close the screen facing inward. You can
protect the screen.
ooA mirror image (right/left reversed) of subjects is displayed when the
screen faces subjects in front of the camera.
47
Turning on the Power
zz <1>
Turns the camera on, accompanied
by the sound of the shutter curtain
opening. Also accompanied by the
sound of the aperture opening, when
an RF lens is attached.
zz <2>
Stops camera operation, accompanied
by the sound of the shutter curtain
closing. Set the power switch to this
position when not using the camera.
Also accompanied by the sound of the
aperture closing, when an RF lens is
attached.
Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting screen
appears, see page 380 to set the date/time/zone.
Changing the Interface Language
To change the interface language, see page 383.
Automatic Sensor Cleaning
zz Whenever you set the power switch to <2>, sensor cleaning
will be performed automatically. (A small sound may be audible.)
During the sensor cleaning, the screen will display <f>. To enable
automatic sensor cleaning when the power switch is set to <1> as
well, you can set this in [53: Sensor cleaning] (p.392).
zz If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and
not a malfunction.
If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to
the card, [Saving...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the
recording finishes.
48
Turning on the Power
z Battery Level Indicator
When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be
indicated in one of six levels. A blinking battery icon <b> indicates
that the battery will soon be exhausted.
Display
Level (%)
100–70
69–50
49–20
19–10
9–1
0
Display
Level (%)
ooDoing any of the following will exhaust the battery faster:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
• Using the Wi-Fi function or Bluetooth function.
ooThe number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual
shooting conditions.
ooThe lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Certain lenses
may exhaust the battery faster than others.
ooIn low ambient temperatures, shooting may not be possible even with a
sufficient battery level.
See [53: Battery info.] to check the battery status (p.387).
49
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Attaching a Lens
the caps.
1 Remove
zz Remove the rear lens cap and the
body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.
the lens.
2 Attach
zz Align the red mount index on the
lens with the red mount index on the
camera and turn the lens as shown
by the arrow until it clicks in place.
the lens’s focus mode switch to
3 Set
<AF>.
zz <AF> stands for autofocus.
zz <MF> stands for manual focus.
Autofocus will not operate.
zz For RF lenses without a focus mode
switch, set to [AF] or [MF] in the
camera menu, in [21: Focus
mode].
4 Remove the front lens cap.
50
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Detaching the Lens
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown by
the arrow.
zz Turn the lens until it stops, then
detach it.
zz Attach the rear lens cap to the
detached lens.
ooDo not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause
loss of vision.
ooWhen attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.
ooIf the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do
not touch the rotating part.
For instructions on how to use the lens, refer to the Lens Instruction Manual
(p.4).
Tips for Avoiding Smudges and Dust
ooWhen changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
ooWhen storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the
body cap to the camera.
ooRemove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
51
Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses
All EF and EF-S lenses can be used by attaching the optional Mount
Adapter EF-EOS R. The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.
Attaching a Lens
the caps.
1 Remove
zz Remove the rear lens cap and the
body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.
(1)
(2)
the lens to the adapter.
2 Attach
zz Align the red or white mount index on
the lens with the corresponding mount
index on the adapter and turn the lens
as shown by the arrow until it clicks
into place.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(3)
Red index
White index
the adapter to the camera.
3 Attach
zz Align the red mount indexes (3) on
the adapter and camera and turn the
lens as shown by the arrow until it
clicks into place.
52
Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses
the lens’s focus mode switch to
4 Set
<AF>.
zz <AF> stands for autofocus.
zz <MF> stands for manual focus.
Autofocus will not operate.
5 Remove the front lens cap.
Detaching the Lens
1
While pressing the lens release button,
turn the adapter as shown by the arrow.
zz Turn the adapter until it stops, then
detach it.
the lens from the adapter.
2 Detach
zz Hold down the lens release lever
on the adapter and turn the lens
counterclockwise.
zz Turn the lens until it stops, then
detach it.
zz Attach the rear lens cap to the
detached lens.
For lens precautions, see page 51.
53
Using the Viewfinder
Look through the viewfinder to activate it. You can also restrict display
to either the screen or viewfinder (p.403).
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity
Turn the dioptric adjustment knob.
zz Turn the knob left or right to make the
viewfinder display look sharp.
ooThe viewfinder display and camera screen cannot be activated at the
same time.
ooAt some aspect ratios, black bars are displayed on the top and bottom or
left and right edges of the screen. These areas are not recorded.
54
Basic Operations
Holding the Camera
zzViewing the Screen as You Shoot
As you shoot, you can tilt the screen to adjust it. For details, see
page 47.
Normal angle
Low angle
High angle
zzShooting Through the Viewfinder
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera
shake.
Horizontal shooting
Vertical shooting
1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.
2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.
3. Rest your right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the
other.
6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.
55
Basic Operations
Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button
halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing Halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture) is displayed on the screen, in
the viewfinder, or on the LCD panel for
approx. 8 sec. or as set for the metering
timer.*
* By default, the metering timer is set to 8 sec.
Pressing Completely
This action shoots.
zzPreventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is
called camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent
camera shake, note the following:
●●Hold the camera steady.
●●Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press
the shutter button completely.
ooIf you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first,
or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely
immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.
ooEven during menu display or image playback, you can go back to
shooting-ready state by pressing the shutter button halfway.
56
Basic Operations
<W> Mode Button
You can set the shooting mode.
Press the <W> button, turn the
<6> dial, then select the shooting
mode.
To switch between shooting still photos
and movies, press the <W> button
and then the <B> button.
<p> AF Start Button
Has the same effect as pressing the
shutter button halfway in [t], [d],
[s], [f], [a], or [BULB] shooting
mode.
<B> Multi-Function Button
By pressing the <B> button and
turning the <5> dial, you can set the
ISO speed, drive mode, AF operation,
white balance, and flash exposure
compensation.
57
Basic Operations
<6> Main Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<6> dial.
Press a button such as <W> or
<B>, then turn the <6> dial.
If you press the shutter button halfway,
the camera will go back to shootingready state.
(2) Turn only the <6> dial.
While looking at the screen, viewfinder,
or LCD panel, turn the <6> dial.
Use this dial to set the shutter speed,
aperture, etc.
Step (1) can be performed even when controls are locked with the Multifunction lock (p.60).
58
Basic Operations
<5> Quick Control Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<5> dial.
Press a button such as <W> or
<B>, then turn the <5> dial.
If you press the shutter button halfway,
the camera will go back to shootingready state.
(2) Turn only the <5> dial.
While looking at the screen, viewfinder,
or LCD panel, turn the <5> dial.
Use this dial to set the exposure
compensation amount, the aperture
setting for manual exposures, etc.
Step (1) can be performed even when controls are locked with the Multifunction lock (p.60).
59
Basic Operations
<R> Multi-Function Lock Button
By setting [56: Multi function lock]
and pressing the <R> button, you
can prevent settings from being changed
by accidentally operating the Main dial,
Quick control dial, M-Fn bar, or control
ring or tapping the touch-screen panel.
Press the <R> button again to unlock
the controls. For [56: Multi function
lock] details, see page 416.
<U> LCD Panel Info Switching/Illumination Button
zz Each press of the <U> button
changes the information on the LCD
panel.
zz Illuminate the LCD panel by holding
down the <U> button (9).
During a bulb exposure, pressing the shutter button completely will turn off
the LCD panel illumination.
<T> Control Ring
By default, the aperture value can be set
by turning the control ring of RF lenses
or mount adapters while pressing the
shutter button halfway in [t], [f],
[a], or [BULB] mode. Otherwise, you
can assign a different function to the
control ring by customizing operations in
[84: Customize dials] (p.555).
60
Basic Operations
<m> M-Fn (Multi-Function) BarM
You can assign commonly used
functions to swiping the <m> bar and
tapping each end. By default, no function
is assigned.
After purchase or when no function is
assigned, you can access a shortcut
screen for the [84: Customize M-Fn
bar] setting menu by tapping the left end
on <m>. Select [Yes] to access the
setting screen (p.561).
Basic Operations
Swipe
Slide your finger left or right immediately
after touching <m>.
Tap (left end)
Touch the left end of <m>, then lift
your finger immediately.
Tap (right end)
Touch the right end of <m>, then lift
your finger immediately.
Operations are canceled unless you move your finger immediately after
touching <m>.
61
Basic Operations
INFO Button
Each press of the <B> button
changes the information shown.
The following sample screens are for still
photos.
62
Menu Operations and Settings
(1)
(2)
(3)
(6) (7)
(5)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
<M> button
<B> button
Screen
<V> cross keys
(5)
(6)
(7)
<0> button
Quick control dial
Main dial
[A] Mode Menu Screen
* In [A] mode, some tabs and menu items do not appear.
63
Menu Operations and Settings
Screen in [t], [d], [s], [f], [a], and [BULB] Modes
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1)
(2)
(10)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Main tabs
Secondary tabs
Menu items
z: Shooting
2: Autofocus
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
3 : Playback
5 : Set-up
8 : Custom Functions
9 : My Menu
Menu settings
Menu Setting Procedure
the menu screen.
1 Display
zz Press the <M> button.
a tab.
2 Select
zz Press the <B> button to switch
between main tabs.
zz Turn the <6> dial to select a
secondary tab.
zz For example, the [z4] tab in this
manual refers to the screen displayed
when the z (Shooting) tab’s fourth
box [ ] from the left is selected.
64
Menu Operations and Settings
an item.
3 Select
zz Turn the <5> dial to select an item,
then press <0>.
an option.
4 Select
zz Turn the <5> dial to select an
option.
zz The current setting is indicated in
blue.
the option.
5 Confirm
zz Press <0> to set it.
the setting.
6 Exit
zz Press the <M> button to finish
and prepare for shooting.
ooThe description of menu functions hereafter assumes that you have
pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.
ooYou can also tap on the menu screen or press the <V> cross keys to
operate the menu.
ooTo cancel the operation, press the <M> button.
65
Menu Operations and Settings
Dimmed Menu Items
Example: Highlight tone priority
Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The
menu item is dimmed if another function
setting is overriding it.
You can see the overriding function by
selecting the dimmed menu item and
pressing <0>.
If you cancel the overriding function’s
setting, the dimmed menu item will
become settable.
You may not be able to see the overriding function for certain dimmed menu
items.
With [56: Clear all camera settings], you can reset the menu functions to
the default settings (p.419).
66
d Touch-Screen Operation
You can operate the camera by tapping or dragging on the screen
(touch-screen panel) with your finger.
Tap
Sample screen (Quick Control)
zz Use your finger to tap on (touch briefly
and then remove your finger from) the
screen.
zz For example, when you tap on [Q],
the Quick Control screen appears. By
tapping on [2], you can return to the
preceding screen.
Drag
Sample screen (Menu screen)
zz Slide your finger while touching the
screen.
ooIf [53: Beep] is set to [Touch ], the beep will not sound for touch
operations (p.386).
ooTouch control responsiveness can be adjusted (p.385).
67
Q Quick Control
You can directly select and set the settings displayed on the screen.
This is called Quick Control.
1 Press the <Q> button (7).
a setting item.
2 Select
zz Press the <W> <X> keys to select an
item.
zz When the screen at left is displayed,
press the <W> <X> <Y> <Z> keys
for selection.
an option.
3 Select
zz Turn the <6> or <5> dial, or
press the <Y> <Z> keys to change
the setting. There are also functions
that are set by pressing a button
following these operations.
zz Press <0> to finalize the setting
and return to the previous screen.
You can also tap on the screen for Quick Control settings (p.67).
68
2
Shooting
This chapter describes shooting and introduces menu settings
on the shooting ([z]) tab.
zz A M icon to the right of a page title indicates that the
function is available only in [t], [d], [s], [f], [a], or
[BULB] mode.
69
2
-1 Shooting Still Photos
[Shooting Mode] Settings for Still Photos
To prepare for still photo shooting, press
the <W> button, then press the
<B> button to access the [Shooting
mode] screen at left.
[A] : Scene Intelligent Auto (p.123)
[t] : Flexible-priority AE (p.140)
[d] : Program AE (p.132)
[s] : Shutter-priority AE (p.134)
[f] : Aperture-priority AE (p.136)
[a] : Manual exposure (p.138)
[BULB]
: Bulb (p.158)
[w/x/y] : Custom shooting mode
(p.417)
70
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
zzShooting 1
p.75
p.78
p.80
p.118
p.118
zzShooting 2
p.110
p.179
zzShooting 3
p.155
p.85
p.104
p.109
p.119
p.120
71
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
zzShooting 4
p.97
p.100
p.102
p.117
p.88, 92, 95
zzShooting 5
p.107
p.105
p.121
p.130
p.166
p.161
zzShooting 6
p.159
p.115
p.151
p.150
p.149
72
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
In [A] mode, the following screen is displayed.
zzShooting 1
p.75
p.78
p.118
p.118
p.130
p.192
73
Index to Features: Still Photo Shooting
Shooting Modes
zz [A] mode
B p.123
zz [t] mode
B p.140
zz [d] mode
B p.132
zz [s] mode
B p.134
zz [f] mode
B p.136
zz [a] mode
B p.138
zz [BULB] mode
B p.158
Menus/Shooting Features
zz Exposure simulation
B p.120
zz Dust Delete Data
B p.121
zz Touch Shutter
B p.130
zz Drive mode
B p.144
zz Self-timer
B p.147
zz Silent LV shooting
B p.150
zz Silent shutter
B p.151
zz Metering mode
B p.152
zz Exposure
compensation
B p.154
zz Image quality
B p.75
zz AEB
B p.155
zz Dual Pixel RAW
B p.78
zz AE lock
B p.157
zz Cropping/aspect ratio
B p.80
zz Bulb timer
B p.159
zz ISO speed (still photos) B p.83
zz HDR mode
B p.161
zz Picture Style
B p.88
zz Multiple exposures
B p.166
zz White balance
B p.97
zz Remote control
B p.174
zz Custom White Balance B p.100
zz Remote switch
B p.176
zz White balance shift/
bracketing
zz External flash
B p.177
B p.102
zz Auto Lighting Optimizer B p.104
zz Noise reduction for
high ISO speeds
B p.105
zz Noise reduction for long
exposures
B p.107
zz Highlight tone priority
B p.109
zz Lens aberration
correction
B p.110
zz Reducing flicker
B p.115
zz Color space
B p.117
zz Releasing shutter
without card
B p.118
zz Image review time
B p.118
zz Metering timer
B p.119
74
zz Flash function settings B p.179
zz Flash Custom Function
settings
B p.187
Setting Image Quality
You can select the pixel count and the image quality. JPEG image
quality options include 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a, 8a, and b. RAW
image quality options include 1 and F.
1 Select [z1: Image quality].
the image quality.
2 Set
zz To select the RAW quality, turn the
<6> dial, and to select the JPEG
quality, press the <Y> <Z> keys.
zz Press <0> to set it.
Number of shots available as indicated by [****] on the image quality setting
screen always applies to a setting of [Full-frame], regardless of the actual
aspect ratio setting (p.80).
ooIf [–] is set for both the RAW image and JPEG image, 73 will be set.
ooIf you select both RAW and JPEG, each time you shoot, the image will
be recorded simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the
image qualities that were set. The two images will be recorded with the
same file numbers (file extension: .JPG for JPEG and .CR3 for RAW).
oob is in 7 (Fine) quality.
ooMeaning of image quality icons: 1 RAW, F Compact RAW, JPEG,
7 Fine, 8 Normal, 3 Large, 4 Medium, 6 Small.
75
Setting Image Quality
RAW Images
A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to
digital data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the
quality as follows: 1 or F. F produces RAW images with
smaller file sizes than 1.
RAW images can be processed using [31: RAW image processing]
(p.339) and saved as JPEG images. (Just as for 1, all JPEG size
options are available for F.) As the RAW image itself does not
change, you can process the RAW image to create any number of
JPEG images with various processing conditions.
You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process
RAW images. You can make various adjustments to images depending
upon how they will be used and can generate JPEG or other types of
images reflecting the effects of those adjustments.
RAW Image Processing Software
ooTo display RAW images on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional
(hereafter DPP, EOS software) is recommended.
ooPrevious versions of DPP Ver.4.x cannot process RAW images taken
with this camera. If a previous version of DPP Ver.4.x is installed on your
computer, obtain and install the latest version of DPP from the Canon
website to update it (p.572). (The previous version will be overwritten.)
Note that DPP Ver.3.x or earlier cannot process RAW images taken with
this camera.
ooCommercially available software may not be able to display RAW
images taken with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the
software manufacturer.
76
Setting Image Quality
Guidelines for Choosing Image Quality
For guidelines on file sizes, number of possible shots, and maximum
burst shots, see page 609.
Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting
The approximate maximum burst
is displayed at the upper left of the
shooting screen and lower right of the
viewfinder.
If the maximum burst for continuous
shooting is 99 or higher, “99” will be
displayed.
If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot
99 or more shots continuously. The value starts decreasing once it reaches
98 or less. [BUSY] on the screen and LCD panel indicates that the
internal buffer memory is full and shooting will stop temporarily. If you stop
continuous shooting, the maximum burst will increase. After all the captured
images are written to the card, you can resume continuous shooting and
shoot up to the maximum burst listed in the table on page 609.
77
Setting Up Dual Pixel RAW Shooting
Shooting 1 or F images with this feature enabled produces
special, Dual Pixel RAW images containing dual pixel information from
the image sensor. This is called Dual Pixel RAW shooting.
When processing these images in Digital Photo Professional software
for EOS cameras, you can take advantage of the Dual Pixel data
to fine-tune sharpness (using depth information), shift the camera
viewpoint slightly, and reduce ghosting.
Results will vary depending on shooting conditions, so before
using this feature, refer to the Digital Photo Professional
Instruction Manual for details on Dual Pixel RAW characteristics
and image processing.
1 Select [z1: Dual Pixel RAW].
[Enable].
2 Select
zz Press the <B> button and read
the Help screen (p.405) before
proceeding.
the image quality to 1 or
3 Set
F.
zz Set the image quality to 1,
1+JPEG, F, or F+JPEG.
78
Setting Up Dual Pixel RAW Shooting
the picture.
4 Take
ggA RAW image containing Dual Pixel
data (Dual Pixel RAW image) is
captured.
ooStartup takes longer when the power switch is set to <1> or the
camera resumes operation from auto power off.
ooContinuous shooting speed is slower when you shoot with Dual Pixel
RAW (p.144). Maximum burst also decreases.
oo<o> drive mode is not available. Setting the mode to <o> has the
effect of setting it to <i>.
ooNoise may be more noticeable in RAW or RAW+JPEG images.
ooOne-touch image quality setting is not available.
Amount and Effect of Dual Pixel RAW Correction
ooLarger lens apertures increase the amount and effect of correction.
ooThe amount and effect of correction may not be sufficient with some
lenses and in some shooting scenes.
ooThe amount and effect of correction varies depending on the camera
orientation (vertical or horizontal).
ooThe amount and effect of correction may not be sufficient under some
shooting conditions.
79
Setting Cropping/Aspect RatioN
Normally with RF or EF lenses, images are captured at the sensor
size of approx. 36.0 x 24.0 mm in full-frame shooting, but in cropped
shooting, you can isolate and magnify the center of the image approx.
1.6x (APS-C size) as if using a telephoto lens, or you can set an aspect
ratio to suit your shooting application before shooting.
For EF-S lenses, a 3:2 aspect ratio in the center is captured, magnified
approx. 1.6x (APS-C size).
[z1: zCropping/aspect
1 Select
ratio].
an item.
2 Select
zz Select [Full-frame], [1.6x (crop)],
[1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect
ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)].
zz With EF-S lenses, [1.6x (crop)] is set
automatically, and no other option is
available.
zz To proceed without changing shooting
area display, press <0> and go to
step 4.
how the shooting area is
3 Select
displayed.
zz On the screen in step 2, press the
<B> button.
zz Select the display method, then press
<0>.
oo74/84/7a/8a image quality options are not available when [1.6x
(crop)] is set, or with EF-S lenses.
ooCropped shooting with the image quality set to 74/84/7a/8a
produces 73/83/b/b images, respectively.
ooShooting with an EF-S lens when [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect
ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)] is set automatically clears the setting
and shoots with [1.6x (crop)] at a 3:2 aspect ratio.
80
Setting Cropping/Aspect Ratio
Setting examples
Y set
U set or EF-S lens
used
the picture.
4 Take
zz When [1.6x (crop)] is set or an EF-S
lens is used, an image magnified
approx. 1.6x is displayed.
zz When [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3
(aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect
ratio)] is set, the image within the
black masked or outlined area is
captured.
V and S set
W and R set
81
Setting Cropping/Aspect Ratio
ooAreas outside the cropped area are not recorded in RAW shooting
when [1.6x (crop)] is set, or with EF-S lenses.
oo[Shooting area] has no effect on display when [1.6x (crop)] is set, or
with EF-S lenses.
oo[85: Add cropping information] is only available when [Full-frame] is
set.
ooThe [z1: zCropping/aspect ratio] setting is not used as the basis
for auto flash zoom (auto flash coverage adjustment) by an external
Speedlite.
ooFor details on pixel counts when cropping or an aspect ratio is set, see
page 610.
ooNearly 100% field of view coverage is maintained vertically and
horizontally when cropping or an aspect ratio is set.
ooAspect ratio information is added to RAW images when an aspect ratio
is set, which are captured at full size. When the RAW images are played
back, the image area used for shooting is indicated by lines. Note that
only the shooting image area is shown in slideshows (p.331).
82
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the
ambient light level. In [A] mode, ISO speed is set automatically
(p.608).
Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting, see page 614.
the <B> button (9).
1 Press
zz With an image displayed on the screen,
press the <B> button.
the ISO speed item.
2 Select
zz Turn the <5> dial to select the ISO
speed item.
the ISO speed.
3 Set
zz Turn the <6> dial to set it.
zz ISO speed can be set within ISO
100–40000 in 1/3-stop increments.
zz Select [AUTO] to set the ISO speed
automatically.
zz For details on the ISO Auto range,
see page 608.
To expand the available ISO speed range from L (equivalent to ISO 50) to
H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200) or H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400), adjust [ISO
speed range] under [z3: zISO speed settings] (p.85).
83
Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos
ISO Speed Guide
zz Low ISO speeds reduce image noise but may increase the risk of
camera/subject shake or reduce the area in focus (shallower depth
of field), in some shooting conditions.
zz High ISO speeds enable low-light shooting, a larger area in focus
(deeper depth of field), and longer flash range but may increase
image noise.
ooAs H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200) and H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400)
are expanded ISO speed settings, noise (dots of light, banding, etc.)
and irregular colors will be more noticeable, and the resolution lower
compared with the standard setting.
ooAs L (equivalent to ISO 50) is an expanded ISO speed setting, the
dynamic range will be somewhat narrower compared with the standard
setting.
ooIf [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced]
(p.109), L (equivalent to ISO 50), ISO 100/125/160, H1 (equivalent to
ISO 51200), and H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400) cannot be selected.
ooWhen shooting with a high ISO speed, high temperature, long exposure,
or multiple exposure, image noise (rough grain, dots of light, banding,
etc.), irregular colors, or color shift may become noticeable.
ooWhen shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise,
such as a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long
exposure, images may not be recorded properly.
ooIf you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject,
overexposure may result.
84
Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos
Setting the Manually-Settable ISO Speed Range
You can set the manually-settable ISO speed range (minimum and
maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within L (equivalent to
ISO 50) to H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), and the maximum limit within
ISO 100 to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).
1 Select [z3: zISO speed settings].
2 Select [ISO speed range].
the minimum limit.
3 Set
zz Select the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
zz Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
the maximum limit.
4 Set
zz Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
zz Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
5 Select [OK].
85
Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos
Setting the ISO Speed Range for ISO Auto
You can set the automatic ISO speed range for ISO Auto within ISO
100–40000. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100–25600, and
the maximum limit within ISO 200–40000.
1 Select [Auto range].
the minimum limit.
2 Set
zz Select the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
zz Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
the maximum limit.
3 Set
zz Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
zz Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
4 Select [OK].
The [Minimum] and [Maximum] settings will also function as the minimum
and maximum speeds for ISO speed safety shift (p.545).
86
Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos
Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto
You can set the minimum shutter speed so that the shutter speed set
automatically will not be too slow when ISO Auto is set.
This is effective in [d] and [f] modes when shooting moving
subjects with a wide-angle lens, or when using a telephoto lens. It
helps to reduce camera shake and blurred subjects.
1 Select [Min. shutter spd.].
Automatically set
the desired minimum shutter
2 Set
speed.
zz Select [Auto] or [Manual].
zz If you select [Auto], turn the <6>
dial to set the desired speed, slower
or faster compared to the standard
speed, then press <0>.
Manually set
zz If you select [Manual], turn the <6>
dial to select the shutter speed, then
press <0>.
ooIf a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed
limit set with [Auto range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min.
shutter spd.] will be set to obtain the standard exposure.
ooThis function will not be applied to flash photography and movie shooting.
When [Auto(Standard)] is set, the minimum shutter speed will be the
reciprocal of the lens focal length. A single step from [Slower] to [Faster] is
equivalent to a single stop of the shutter speed.
87
Selecting a Picture StyleN
Just by selecting a preset Picture Style, you can obtain image
characteristics effectively matching your photographic expression or
the subject.
In [A] mode, [D] (Auto) is set automatically.
1 Select [z4: Picture Style].
a Picture Style.
2 Select
zz Select a Picture Style, then press
<0>.
88
Selecting a Picture Style
Picture Style Characteristics
zz[D] Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The
colors will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets, particularly
in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes.
If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture
Style.
zz[P] Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.
zz[Q] Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up
portraits.
By changing the [Color tone] (p.93), you can adjust the skin tone.
zz[R] Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.
Effective for impressive landscapes.
zz[u] Fine Detail
Suited for detailed outline and fine texture description of the subject.
The colors will be slightly vivid.
zz[S] Neutral
Suited for processing the image with a computer. For natural colors
and subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.
89
Selecting a Picture Style
zz[U] Faithful
Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a
subject that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K
will be adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. For
subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.
zz[V] Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
Color images cannot be recovered from JPEG images shot with the
[Monochrome] Picture Style.
zz[W] User Defined 1–3
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a
Picture Style file, etc. and adjust it as desired (p.95). With any of
the User Defined Picture Style that has not yet been set, pictures will
be taken with the same characteristics settings as with the default
settings of [Standard].
90
Selecting a Picture Style
Symbols
The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [Strength], [Fineness],
or [Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other
settings. The numbers indicate the values for these settings specified
for the respective Picture Style.
Symbols
g
h
i
j
k
l
Sharpness
A Strength
B Fineness
C Threshold
Contrast
Saturation
Color tone
Filter effect (Monochrome)
Toning effect (Monochrome)
During movie shooting, an asterisk “*” will be displayed for both [Fineness]
and [Threshold] for [Sharpness]. [Fineness] and [Threshold] will not be
applied to movies.
91
Customizing a Picture StyleN
You can customize the Picture Styles. You can adjust Picture Style
settings such as [Contrast] or [Sharpness] ([Strength], [Fineness],
and [Threshold]). To see the resulting effects, take test shots. To
customize [Monochrome], see page 94.
1 Select [z4: Picture Style].
a Picture Style.
2 Select
zz Select the Picture Style to adjust, then
press the <B> button.
an item.
3 Select
zz Select an item (such as [Strength] in
[Sharpness]), then press <0>.
zz See the next page for details on the
settings and effects.
92
Customizing a Picture Style
the item.
4 Adjust
zz Adjust the effect level, then press
<0>.
zz Press the <M> button to save
the adjusted setting and return to the
Picture Style selection screen.
ggAny settings you change from default
values are displayed in blue.
Settings and Effects
Sharpness
g
A Strength
0: Weak outline emphasis
1
B Fineness*
2
C Threshold*
Contrast
h
i Saturation
j Color tone
1: Fine
1: Low
-4: Low contrast
-4: Low saturation
-4: Reddish skin tone
7: Strong outline
emphasis
5: Grainy
5: High
+4: High contrast
+4: High saturation
+4: Yellowish skin tone
*1: Indicates the fineness of the outlines to be emphasized. The smaller the number,
the finer the outlines that can be emphasized.
*2: Sets how much the outline is emphasized based on the difference in contrast
between the subject and the surrounding area. The smaller the number, the more
the outline will be emphasized when the contrast difference is low. However, noise
tends to be more noticeable when the number is smaller.
ooFor movie shooting, [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness]
cannot be set (not displayed).
ooBy selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the parameter
settings of the respective Picture Style to their defaults.
ooTo shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted
Picture Style, then shoot.
93
Customizing a Picture Style
[V] Monochrome Adjustment
Besides the effects described on the preceding page such as
[Contrast], or [Strength], [Fineness] and [Threshold] for
[Sharpness], you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect].
[k] Filter effect
With a filter effect applied to a
monochrome image, you can make
white clouds or green trees stand out
more.
Filter
N: None
Sample Effects
Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.
Ye: Yellow
The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will
look crisper.
Or: Orange
R: Red
G: Green
The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will
look crisper and brighter.
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.
[l] Toning effect
94
By applying a toning effect, you can
create a monochrome image in the
selected color. Effective when you want
to create more impressive images.
Registering a Picture StyleN
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust it as desired, and register it under [User Def. 1], [User Def.
2], or [User Def. 3]. Useful when creating several Picture Styles with
different settings.
Picture Styles that you have registered on the camera using EOS Utility
(EOS software) can also be modified here.
1 Select [z4: Picture Style].
[User Def. *].
2 Select
zz Select [User Def. *], then press the
<B> button.
<0>.
3 Press
zz With [Picture Style] selected, press
<0>.
the base Picture Style.
4 Select
zz Select the base Picture Style, then
press <0>.
zz Also select styles this way when
adjusting styles registered to the
camera with EOS Utility (EOS
software).
95
Registering a Picture Style
an item.
5 Select
zz Select an item (such as [Strength] in
[Sharpness]), then press <0>.
the item.
6 Adjust
zz Adjust the effect level, then press
<0>.
zz For details, see “Customizing a
Picture Style” (p.92).
zz Press the <M> button to save
the adjusted setting and return to the
Picture Style selection screen.
ggThe base Picture Style will be
indicated on the right of [User Def. *].
ggBlue style names indicate that you
have changed the settings from
default values.
ooIf a Picture Style is already registered under [User Def. *], changing
the base Picture Style will clear the parameter settings of the previously
registered User Defined Picture Style.
ooIf you perform [56: Clear all camera settings] (p.419), all the [User
Def. *] settings will revert to their defaults.
ooTo shoot with a registered Picture Style, select the registered
[User Def. *], then shoot.
ooRegarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera,
refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
96
B: Setting the White BalanceN
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally,
the Auto [Q] (Ambience priority) or [Qw] (White priority) setting will
obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be
obtained with Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light
source or set it manually by shooting a white object.
In [A] mode, [Q] (Ambience priority) is set automatically.
the <B> button (9).
1 Press
zz With an image displayed on the screen,
press the <B> button.
the white balance item.
2 Select
zz Turn the <5> dial to select the
white balance setting item.
a white balance setting.
3 Select
zz Turn the <6> dial to make a
selection.
ooFor [Q] and [Qw] setting instructions, see page 99.
ooTo set your preferred color temperature, select [P] in [z4: White
balance], then turn the <6> dial.
97
Setting the White Balance
(Approx.)
Display
Q
Qw
W
E
R
Y
U
D
O
P
Mode
Auto (Ambience priority, p.99)
Auto (White priority, p.99)
Daylight
Shade
Cloudy, twilight, sunset
Tungsten light
White fluorescent light
Flash use
Custom (p.100)
Color temperature (p.101)
Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)
3000–7000
5200
7000
6000
3200
4000
Automatically set*
2000–10000
2500–10000
* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.
Otherwise, it will be fixed to approx. 6000 K.
White Balance
To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of
lighting. With a digital camera, the white for color correction basis is
decided depending on the color temperature of the illumination, and
then the color is adjusted with software to make the white areas look
white. With this function, you can take the pictures with natural color
tones.
98
Setting the White Balance
[Q] Auto White Balance
With [Q] (Ambience priority), you can slightly increase the intensity
of the image’s warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene.
If you select [Qw] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity of the
image’s warm color cast.
If you want to match the Auto white balance of previous EOS camera
models, select [Q] (Ambience priority).
1 Select [z4: White balance].
[Q].
2 Select
zz With [Q] selected, press the
<B> button.
an item.
3 Select
zz Select an item, then press <0>.
Cautions for Setting [Qw] (White priority)
ooThe warm color cast of subjects may fade.
ooWhen multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color
cast of the picture may not be reduced.
ooWhen using flash, the color tone will be the same as with [Q] (Ambience
priority).
99
Setting the White Balance
[O] Custom White Balance
With custom white balance, you can manually set the white balance for
the specific light source of the shooting location. Make sure to perform
this procedure under the light source at the actual location of the shoot.
a white object.
1 Shoot
zz Aim the camera at a plain white
subject, so that white fills the screen.
zz Focus manually and shoot with the
standard exposure set for the white
object.
zz You can use any of the white balance
settings.
[z4: Custom White
2 Select
Balance].
the white balance data.
3 Import
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
image captured in step 1, then press
<0>.
ggSelect [OK] to import the data.
4 Select [z4: White balance].
the custom white balance.
5 Select
zz Select [O], then press <0>.
100
Setting the White Balance
ooIf the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard
exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.
ooThe following images cannot be selected: Images captured with the
Picture Style set to [Monochrome], multiple-exposure images, cropped
images, and images shot with another camera.
Instead of shooting a white object, you can also shoot a gray chart or
standard 18% gray reflector (commercially available).
[P] Setting the Color Temperature
You can set the white balance’s color temperature numerically. This is
for advanced users.
1 Select [z4: White balance].
the color temperature.
2 Set
zz Select [P].
zz Turn the <6> dial to set the desired
color temperature, then press <0>.
zz The color temperature can be set
from approx. 2500 K to 10000 K in
100 K increments.
ooWhen setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set the
white balance correction (magenta or green bias) as necessary.
ooIf you set [P] to the reading taken with a commercially available color
temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate
for the difference between the color temperature meter’s reading and the
camera’s color temperature reading.
101
u White Balance CorrectionN
You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have
the same effect as using a commercially available color temperature
conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color can be
corrected to one of nine levels.
This function is for advanced users who understand the use of color
temperature conversion and color compensating filters and their effects.
White Balance Correction
1 Select [z4: WB Shift/Bkt.].
the white balance correction.
2 Set
zz Press the <V> cross keys to move
Sample setting: A2, G1
the “■” mark to the appropriate
position.
zz B is for blue, A for amber, M for
magenta, and G for green. The image’s
color balance will be adjusted toward
the color in the direction of the move.
ggOn the right of the screen, “Shift”
indicates the direction and correction
amount, respectively.
zz Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
zz Press <0> to exit the setting.
One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds
of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Unit of measure for
color temperature used to indicate values such as the density of a color
temperature conversion filter.)
102
White Balance Correction
White Balance Auto Bracketing
With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be
recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current
white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber
bias and magenta/green bias. This function is called white balance
bracketing (WB Bkt.). White balance bracketing is possible up to ±3
levels in single-level increments.
B/A bias ±3 levels
Set the white balance bracketing
amount.
zz In step 2 for “White Balance
Correction”, when you turn the <5>
dial, the “■” mark on the screen will
change to “■ ■ ■” (3 points).
zz Turning the dial clockwise sets the B/A
bracketing, and turning it counterclockwise
sets the M/G bracketing.
ggOn the right, “Bracket” indicates the
bracketing direction and correction amount.
zz Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
zz Press <0> to exit the setting.
ooDuring white balance bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous
shooting will be lower.
ooSince three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record
the image to the card.
ooThe images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
ooYou can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white
balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
ooThe white balance icon blinks when WB bracketing is set.
oo“Bracket” stands for bracketing.
103
Auto Correction of Brightness and ContrastN
Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically if shots look
dark or contrast is too low or high. This function is called Auto Lighting
Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard].
In [A] mode, [Standard] is set automatically.
[z3: Auto Lighting
1 Select
Optimizer].
a correction option.
2 Set
zz Select an option, then press <0>.
the picture.
3 Take
ggThe image will be recorded with the
brightness and contrast corrected as
necessary.
ooNoise may increase and sharpness may change, under some shooting
conditions.
ooIf the effect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and results are not at
your preferred brightness, set to [Low] or [Disable].
ooIf a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure,
the image may still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set
this function to [Disable].
ooMaximum burst is lower with [High]. Image recording to the card also
takes longer.
In step 2, if you press the <B> button and remove the checkmark
[X] for [Disabled in M or B modes] setting, the [z3: Auto Lighting
Optimizer] can also be set even in [a] and [BULB] modes.
104
Setting Noise ReductionN
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
This function reduces the noise generated in the image. It is especially
effective at high ISO speeds. When shooting at low ISO speeds, the
noise in the darker parts of the image (shadow areas) can further be
reduced.
1 Select [z5: High ISO speed NR].
the level.
2 Set
zz Select the desired noise reduction
level, then press <0>.
zz[M] Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Applies the noise reduction with higher image quality than [High].
For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned
and merged automatically into a single JPEG image.
If the image quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, you cannot set
[Multi Shot Noise Reduction].
the picture.
3 Take
ggThe image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
105
Setting Noise Reduction
Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction
ooIf there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake,
the noise reduction effect may become smaller.
ooIf you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
ooIf you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave
afterimages.
ooAuto image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
ooIf the subject’s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are
taken, irregular exposure in the image may result.
ooAfter shooting, it may take some time to record an image to the card
after performing noise reduction and merging the images. [BUSY] is
displayed as images are processed, and shooting is not possible until
processing is finished.
ooAEB is not available.
oo[Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is not available with bulb shooting, Servo
AF, Silent shutter, shooting with AEB or WB bracketing, shooting RAW
or RAW+JPEG images, or with features such as long exposure noise
reduction, multiple exposures, or HDR mode.
ooFlash photography is not possible. Note that the AF-assist beam of EOSdedicated, external Speedlites will be emitted according to the [24:
AF-assist beam firing] setting.
oo[Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is not available (not displayed) when
recording movies.
oo[Standard] will be set automatically if you do any of the following: Setting
the power switch to <2>, replacing card, or setting shooting mode to
other than [t], [d], [s], [f], or [a].
106
Setting Noise Reduction
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise (dots of light and
banding) typical of long exposures can be reduced.
[z5: Long exp. noise
1 Select
reduction].
a reduction option.
2 Set
zz Select an option, then press <0>.
zz[AUTO] Auto
For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This
[Auto] setting is effective enough in most cases.
zz[ON] Enable
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.
The [Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with
the [Auto] setting.
the picture.
3 Take
ggThe image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
107
Setting Noise Reduction
ooWith [Auto] or [Enable] set, the noise reduction process after the picture
is taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure.
ooImages may look grainier with the [Enable] setting than with the [Disable]
or [Auto] setting.
oo[BUSY] is displayed as noise is reduced, and the shooting screen is not
displayed until processing is finished, when you can shoot again.
108
Highlight Tone PriorityN
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights.
1 Select [z3: Highlight tone priority].
an option.
2 Set
zz [Enable]: Improves gradation in
highlights. The dynamic range is
expanded from the standard 18% gray
to bright highlights. The gradation
between the grays and highlights
becomes smoother.
zz [Enhanced]: Reduces overexposed
highlights even more than [Enable],
under some shooting conditions.
the picture.
3 Take
ggThe image will be recorded with
highlight tone priority applied.
ooNoise may increase slightly.
ooThe available ISO range starts at ISO 200. Expanded ISO speeds
cannot be set.
oo[Enhanced] is not available (not displayed) when shooting movies.
ooWith [Enhanced], results in some scenes may not look as expected.
109
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to
Optical CharacteristicsN
Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners
look darker due to the optical characteristics of the lens. Image
distortion due to optical characteristics of the lens is called distortion.
Color fringing along subject outlines is called chromatic aberration. And
decreased image sharpness due to the aperture is called diffraction
phenomenon. These lens aberrations can be corrected. You can also
use Digital Lens Optimizer to correct lens aberration, diffraction, and a
loss of sharpness from the low-pass filter.
By default, [Peripheral illum corr] and [Digital Lens Optimizer]
([Chromatic aberr corr] and [Diffraction correction]) are set to
[Enable], and [Distortion correction] is set to [Disable].
Even in [A] mode, peripheral illumination correction and Digital Lens
Optimizer are applied when lens correction data is registered (saved)
on the camera.
[z2: Lens aberration
1 Select
correction].
2 Select an item.
110
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics
[Enable].
3 Select
zz Confirm that the name of the attached
lens and (except for diffraction
correction) [Correction data
available] are displayed.
zz Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
4 Take
zz The image captured will have lens
aberration corrected.
Peripheral Illumination Correction
ooDepending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image
periphery.
ooThe higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum correction
amount that applied with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
Distortion Correction
ooTo correct distortion, the camera captures a narrower image area than
the area seen when shooting, which crops the image a little and slightly
lowers the apparent resolution.
ooSetting distortion correction may change the angle of view slightly.
ooThe amount of image cropped may vary between still photos and
movies.
ooWhen you magnify images, distortion correction is not applied to the
images displayed.
ooImages with distortion correction applied will not have the Dust Delete
Data (p.121) appended.
With RF lenses, distortion correction during movie recording is supported.
111
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics
Digital Lens Optimizer
ooDepending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with
the effects of correction. Image edges may also be emphasized. Adjust
Picture Style sharpness or set [Digital Lens Optimizer] to [Disable] as
needed before shooting.
ooThe higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
ooFor movie shooting, [Digital Lens Optimizer] will not appear. (Correction
is not possible.)
Enabling [Digital Lens Optimizer] corrects both chromatic aberration and
diffraction, although these options are not displayed.
112
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics
Chromatic Aberration Correction
[Chromatic aberr corr] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is
enabled.
Diffraction Correction
ooDepending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together
with the effects of correction.
ooThe higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
ooFor movie shooting, [Diffraction correction] will not appear. (Correction
is not possible.)
ooWith “Diffraction correction”, degraded resolution due to the low-pass
filter, etc. is corrected in addition to diffraction. Therefore, correction is
effective even at an aperture close to the open aperture.
oo[Diffraction correction] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer]
is enabled.
113
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics
Lens Correction Data
The lens correction data for lens aberration corrections is registered
(stored) in the camera. With [Enable] selected, the peripheral illumination
correction, distortion correction, Digital Lens Optimizer, chromatic aberration
correction, and diffraction correction will be applied automatically.
For lenses incorporating the correction data, it is not necessary to
register the correction data to the camera.
General Cautions for Lens Aberration Correction
ooPeripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction,
distortion correction, and diffraction correction cannot be applied to
JPEG images already taken.
ooWhen using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
ooMagnifying the periphery of the image may display parts of the image
that will not be recorded.
ooThe correction amount will be less (except for diffraction correction) if the
lens used does not have distance information.
General Notes for Lens Aberration Correction
ooThe effect of the lens aberration correction varies depending on the lens
used and shooting conditions. Also, the effect may be difficult to discern
depending on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc.
ooIf the correction is difficult to discern, magnifying and checking the image
after shooting is recommended.
ooCorrections can be applied even when an extender or life-size converter
is attached.
ooIf the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the
camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to
[Disable] (except for diffraction correction).
ooIf necessary, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual as well.
114
Reducing FlickerN
If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source
such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker
and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous
shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors
across the images may result. This feature enables the camera to
detect the flickering frequency and take pictures when exposure and
colors are less affected by flickering.
1 Select [z6: Anti-flicker shoot.].
2 Select [Enable].
the picture.
3 Take
zz To detect flicker manually after setting
to [Enable] or when the light source
changes, before shooting, press the
<Q> button, select [Anti-flicker
shoot.], then press the <B>
button.
zz The picture will be taken with reduced
unevenness of exposure or color tone
caused by the flicker.
ooWith [Enable] set, the shutter-release time lag is longer when you shoot
under a flickering light source. Also, the continuous shooting speed may
become slower, and the shooting interval may become irregular.
ooFlicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected.
Also, if the flickering frequency of the light source changes during
continuous shooting, effects of the flicker cannot be reduced.
115
Reducing Flicker
ooIn the [t], [d], or [f] mode, if the shutter speed changes during
continuous shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene
at different shutter speeds, the color tone may become inconsistent. To
avoid inconsistent color tones, use [t], [s], or [a] mode at a fixed
shutter speed.
ooColor tone of captured images may vary between [Enable] and [Disable].
ooShutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed may change when you start
shooting (even with AE lock).
ooIf the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in
the image, flicker may not be properly detected.
ooFlicker reduction may not be possible under special lighting.
ooDepending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.
ooDepending on the light sources or shooting conditions, the expected
result may not be obtained even if you use this function.
ooTaking test shots in advance is recommended.
ooDetect flicker manually if the screen flickers (as when the light source
changes) by pressing the <Q> button, selecting [Anti-flicker shoot.],
then pressing the <B> button.
ooFlicker is not reduced in [A] mode.
ooFlicker reduction also works with flash photography. However, the
expected result may not be obtained for wireless flash photography.
116
Setting the Color SpaceN
The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. With this
camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or
Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.
In [A] mode, [sRGB] is set automatically.
1 Select [z4: Color space].
a color space option.
2 Set
zz Select an option, then press <0>.
Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other
industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you are not familiar
with image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File
System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued
in an sRGB computer environment and with printers not compliant to
Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Postprocessing of the image with computer software will therefore be
required.
ooIf the still photo is shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the first character
in the file name will be an underscore “_”.
ooThe ICC profile is not appended. For the descriptions about the ICC
profile, refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual (EOS
software).
117
Card Reminder
You can set the camera not to shoot unless there is a card in the
camera. The default setting is [Enable].
[z1: Release shutter
1 Select
without card].
[Disable].
2 Select
zz Select [Disable], then press <0>.
Setting the Image Review Time
You can set how long the image is displayed on the screen immediately
after shooting. To keep the captured image displayed, set [Hold]. To
not have the captured image displayed, set [Off].
1 Select [z1: Image review].
a time option.
2 Set
zz Select an option, then press <0>.
When [Hold] is set, images are displayed as long as the time set in [52:
Power saving].
118
Setting the Metering TimerN
You can set how long the metering timer runs (which determines the
duration of exposure display/AE lock) after it is triggered by an action
such as pressing the shutter button halfway.
1 Select [z3: Metering timer].
a time option.
2 Set
zz Select an option, then press <0>.
119
Exposure SimulationN
Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness
(exposure) of the actual image will look.
1 Select [z3: Expo. simulation].
an option.
2 Set
zz Select an option, then press <0>.
zzEnable (g)
The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual brightness
(exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure compensation,
the image brightness will change accordingly.
zzDuring e
Normally, the image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is
easy to see (E). Image brightness will only be close to the actual
brightness (exposure) of the resulting image while you hold down the
button you have assigned to [Depth-of-field preview] using [84:
Customize buttons], (p.555) (g).
zzDisable (E)
The image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is easy to see.
Even if you set exposure compensation, the image is displayed at
the standard brightness.
120
Appending Dust Delete DataN
Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust
that may be visible on captured images. However, for the case where
visible dust still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the
image for erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used
by Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to erase the dust spots
automatically.
Preparation
zz Use an RF or EF lens.
zz Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
zz Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
zz Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to
infinity (∞). If the lens has no distance scale, rotate the camera to
face toward you and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.
Obtaining the Dust Delete Data
1 Select [z5: Dust Delete Data].
[OK].
2 Select
ggAfter the automatic self-cleaning of
the sensor is performed, a message
will appear. Although there will be
a mechanical sound of the shutter
during the cleaning, no picture is
taken.
121
Appending Dust Delete Data
a solid-white object.
3 Shoot
zz At a distance of 20–30 cm (0.7–1.0 ft.),
fill the screen with a patternless, solidwhite object and take a picture.
zz Since the image will not be saved, the
data can still be obtained even if there
is no card in the camera.
ggWhen the picture is taken, the camera
will start collecting the Dust Delete
Data. When the Dust Delete Data is
obtained, a message will appear.
zz If the data is not obtained successfully,
an error message will appear. Follow
the “Preparation” procedure on the
preceding page, then select [OK].
Take the picture again.
Dust Delete Data
After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG
and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is
recommended that you update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to
erase dust spots automatically, refer to the Digital Photo Professional
Instruction Manual.
The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly
affects the image file size.
ooDust Delete Data is not obtained when EF-S lenses are used, or when
[z1: zCropping/aspect ratio] is set to [1.6x (crop)].
ooBe sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper.
If the object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust
data and affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the Digital Photo
Professional (EOS software).
122
AFully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
[A] is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene
and sets the optimum settings automatically. It can also adjust
focus automatically on either the still or moving subject by detecting the
motion of the subject (p.126).
the shooting mode to [A].
1 Set
zz Press the <W> button.
zz Turn the <6> dial to select [A],
then press <0>.
the camera at what you will
2 Aim
shoot (the subject).
zz A frame may be displayed around
the subject, under some shooting
conditions.
zz When an AF point is displayed on the
screen, aim it over the subject.
on the subject.
3 Focus
zz Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
zz You can also focus by touching a
person’s face or other subject on the
screen (Touch AF).
zz Under low light, the AF-assist beam
(p.264) is automatically activated if
needed.
ggFor stationary subjects, the AF point
is displayed in green when the subject
is in focus, and the camera beeps
(One-Shot AF).
123
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
ggFor moving subjects, the AF point is
displayed in blue and tracks subject
movement. The camera does not
beep. (Servo AF)
the picture.
4 Take
zz Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
ggThe image just captured will be
displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the
screen.
Subject movement (whether subjects are still or moving) may not be
detected correctly for some subject or shooting conditions.
ooIf you normally prefer to shoot with One-Shot AF, set [AF1: A Auto
servo] to [Disable].
ooAF operation (One-Shot AF or Servo AF) is set automatically when
you press the shutter button halfway. Note that AF operation cannot be
switched during shooting.
ooThe [A] mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature,
outdoor, and sunset scenes. If you prefer other color tones, set the
shooting mode to [t], [d], [s], [f], or [a] and select a Picture
Style other than <D> before shooting (p.88).
Minimizing Blurred Photos
zz Use a sturdy tripod that can bear the weight of the shooting
equipment. Mount the camera securely on the tripod.
zz Using a remote switch (sold separately, p.176) or a wireless remote
control (sold separately, p.174) is recommended.
124
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
FAQ
zzFocusing is not possible (indicated by an orange AF point).
Aim the AF point over an area with good contrast, then press the
shutter button halfway (p.56). If you are too close to the subject,
move away and shoot again.
zzMultiple AF points are displayed simultaneously.
If multiple AF points are displayed simultaneously, all of these
positions are in focus. As long as one AF point is displayed on the
subject, you can take the picture.
zzPressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the
subject.
If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (manual focus),
set it to <AF> (autofocus).
zzThe shutter speed display is blinking.
Since it is too dark, taking the picture may result in a blurred subject
due to camera shake. Using a tripod or a Canon EL/EX series
Speedlite (sold separately, p.177) is recommended.
zzWhen the external flash was used, the bottom part of the
picture came out unnaturally dark.
If a hood is attached to the lens, it may obstruct the flash light. If the
subject is close, detach the hood before taking the picture with flash.
125
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Recomposing the Shot
Depending on the scene, positioning the subject toward the left or right
to include a balanced background will result in a picture with better
perspective.
In the [A] mode, pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a still
subject will lock the focus on that subject. Recompose the shot while
keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, and then press the shutter
button completely to take the picture. This is called “focus lock”.
Shooting a Moving Subject
With [21: AAuto servo] set to [Enable], moving subjects are
kept in focus using Servo AF when you compose a shot with a moving
subject and press the shutter button halfway. As long as you keep the
AF point over the subject while pressing the shutter button halfway, the
camera will continue to focus on it, as shown by a blue AF point that
tracks subject movement. At the decisive moment, press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
126
Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Scene Icons
In the [A] shooting mode, the
camera detects the scene type and
sets everything automatically to suit
the scene. The detected scene type is
indicated on the upper left of the screen.
For icon details, see page 623.
127
Information Display (Still Photo Shooting)
For details on the icons displayed for still photo shooting, see page
619.
ooWhen <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the image is
displayed at the brightness level closely matching that of the actual
image to be captured.
ooIf <g> is blinking, it indicates that the image is displayed at a
brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of low- or
bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect
the exposure setting. Note that the noise may be more noticeable than
the actual image recorded.
ooExposure simulation may not be performed under some shooting
settings. The <g> icon and histogram will be displayed in gray. The
image will be displayed on the screen at the standard brightness. The
histogram may not be properly displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.
ooThe histogram can be displayed when [z3: Expo. simulation] is set to
[Enable] (p.120).
128
Cautions for Still Photo Shooting
ooDo not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
oo“General Still Photo Shooting Cautions” are on pages 142–143.
Notes for Still Photo Shooting
ooThe image’s field of view coverage is approx. 100% (with image quality
set to JPEG 73).
ooIf the camera is idle over an extended period, the screen will turn off
automatically after the time set in [Display off] or [Viewfinder off] under
[52: Power saving]. The camera then turns off automatically after the
time set in [Auto power off] (p.377).
ooWith the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately), you can display the
image on a television (p.333). Note that no sound will be output.
ooYou can also shoot with a remote switch (sold separately, p.176) or
wireless remote control (sold separately, p.174).
129
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter
Just by tapping on the screen, you can focus and take the picture
automatically.
the Touch Shutter.
1 Enable
zz Tap [y] on the screen’s bottom left.
Each time you tap on the icon, it will
toggle between [y] and [x].
zz [x] (Touch Shutter: Enable)
The camera will focus on the spot you
tap on, then the picture will be taken.
zz [y] (Touch Shutter: Disable)
You can tap on a spot to perform
focusing on the spot. Press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
on the screen to shoot.
2 Tap
zz Tap on the face or subject on the
screen.
ggOn the point you tap, the camera will
focus (Touch AF) with the AF method
that was set (p.265).
ggWhen [x] is set, the AF point turns
green when focus is achieved, then
the picture is taken automatically.
ggIf focus is not achieved, the AF point
turns orange and the picture cannot
be taken. Tap on the face or subject
on the screen again.
130
Shooting with the Touch Shutter
ooEven if you set the drive mode to <o> or <i>, the camera will still
shoot in the single shooting mode.
ooEven if [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], tapping on the screen will
focus on the image with [One-Shot AF].
ooTapping on the screen in magnified view will not focus or take the picture.
ooIf you shoot by tapping on the screen with [z1: Image review] set to
[Hold], you can press the shutter button halfway to take the next shot.
To shoot with bulb exposure, tap on the screen twice. The first tap on
the screen will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the bulb
exposure. Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping on the screen.
131
d: Program AE
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit
the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.
* [d] stands for Program.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.
1 Set the shooting mode to [d].
on the subject.
2 Focus
zz Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
ggOnce the subject is in focus, the AF
point turns green (with One-Shot AF).
ggThe shutter speed and aperture are
set automatically.
the display.
3 Check
zz As long as the exposure value is not
blinking, standard exposure will be
obtained.
the picture.
4 Take
zz Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
132
Program AE
ooIf the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/number
blink, it indicates underexposure.
Increase the ISO speed or use flash.
ooIf the “1/8000” shutter speed and the highest f/number
blink, it indicates overexposure.
Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold
separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the
lens.
Differences Between [d] and [A] Modes
ooIn [A] mode, many functions, such as the AF operation and metering
mode, are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you
can set are limited. On the other hand, with [d] mode, only the shutter
speed and aperture are set automatically. You can freely set the AF
operation, metering mode, and other functions.
Program Shift
ooIn [d] mode, you can freely change the shutter speed and aperture
combination (Program) set automatically by the camera while
maintaining the same exposure. This is called Program shift.
ooTo shift the program, press the shutter button halfway, then turn the
<6> dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture is displayed.
ooProgram shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer
ends (exposure setting display turns off).
ooProgram shift cannot be used with flash.
133
s: Shutter-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically
sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the
brightness of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster
shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower
shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of
motion.
* [s] stands for Time value.
Blurred motion
(Slow speed: 1/30 sec.)
Frozen motion
(Fast speed: 1/2000 sec.)
1 Set the shooting mode to [s].
the desired shutter speed.
2 Set
zz Turn the <6> dial to set it.
on the subject.
3 Focus
zz Press the shutter button halfway.
ggThe aperture is set automatically.
the display and shoot.
4 Check
zz As long as the aperture is not
blinking, the standard exposure will
be obtained.
134
Shutter-Priority AE
ooIf the lowest f/number blinks, it indicates
underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed until
the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed.
ooIf the highest f/number blinks, it indicates overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a faster shutter speed until
the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed.
Shutter Speed Display
ooFor example, “1/125” or “125” indicates 1/125 sec. Additionally, “0"5”
indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"”, 15 sec.
ooShutter speeds from “8000” to “4” on the LCD panel indicate the
denominator of the fractional shutter speed.
135
f: Aperture-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the
shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching
the subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher
f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and
background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower
f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and
background fall within acceptable focus.
* [f] stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).
Blurred background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)
Sharp foreground and background
(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)
1 Set the shooting mode to [f].
the desired aperture.
2 Set
zz Turn the <6> dial to set it.
on the subject.
3 Focus
zz Press the shutter button halfway.
ggThe shutter speed is set automatically.
the display and shoot.
4 Check
zz As long as the shutter speed is not
blinking, the standard exposure will
be obtained.
136
Aperture-Priority AE
ooIf the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a larger aperture (lower
f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a
higher ISO speed.
ooIf the “1/8000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a smaller aperture (higher
f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a
lower ISO speed.
Aperture Value Display
The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The
f/number displayed varies depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to
the camera, “F00” will be displayed for the aperture.
Depth-of-Field PreviewM
Press the button you have assigned to depth-of-field preview (using
[84: Customize buttons], (p.555)) to stop down the lens to the
current aperture setting and check the area in focus (depth of field).
ooThe larger the aperture value, the wider the area in focus, from the
foreground to the background.
ooThe depth-of-field effect can be clearly seen on images as you change
the aperture and press the depth-of-field preview button.
ooExposure is locked (AE lock) as you hold down the button assigned to
depth-of-field preview.
137
a: Manual Exposure
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired.
To determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator or use
a commercially available exposure meter. This method is called manual
exposure.
* [a] stands for Manual.
1 Set the shooting mode to [a].
2 Set the ISO speed (p.83).
zz With ISO Auto, you can set exposure
compensation (p.139).
the shutter speed and aperture.
3 Set
zz To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial. To set the aperture, turn
the <5> dial.
(1)
(2)
on the subject.
4 Focus
zz Press the shutter button halfway.
ggThe exposure setting will be
displayed.
zz Check the exposure level mark <s>
to see how far the current exposure
level is from the standard exposure
level.
(1)
(2)
Standard exposure index
Exposure level mark
the exposure and take the
5 Set
picture.
zz Check the exposure level indicator
and set the desired shutter speed and
aperture.
138
Manual Exposure
Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto
If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO] for manual exposure shooting, you
can set exposure compensation (p.154) as follows:
●●Touch the exposure level indicator
●●[z3: Expo.comp./AEB]
●●Quick Control screen
If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to obtain the standard
exposure with the set shutter speed and aperture. Therefore, you may
not obtain the desired exposure effect. In such a case, set the exposure
compensation.
ooWith the camera set to the [a] mode + ISO Auto + <q> (Evaluative
metering) and [82: Meter. mode, AE locked after focus] set to the
default setting (p.548), holding down the shutter button halfway will lock
the ISO speed after focus is achieved with One-Shot AF.
ooWhen ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed.
ooTo compare the current exposure to the exposure when you pressed
the <A> button initially with a manually set ISO speed, press the <A>
button, recompose the shot, and check the exposure level indicator.
ooWith ISO Auto set and [81: Exposure level increments] set to [1/2stop], any 1/2-stop exposure compensation will be implemented with
the ISO speed (1/3 stop) and shutter speed. However, the shutter speed
displayed will not change.
139
t: Flexible-Priority AE
In this mode, you can set shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed
manually or automatically and combine these settings with your choice
of exposure compensation. Shooting in [t] mode, with control over
each of these parameters, is equivalent to shooting in [d], [s], [f],
or [a] mode.
* [t] stands for Flexible value.
1 Set the shooting mode to [t].
the shutter speed, aperture, and
2 Set
ISO speed.
zz Turn the <5> dial to select an item
to set. A [6] icon appears to the left
of the selected item.
zz Turn the <6> dial to set the option.
zz To reset the setting to [AUTO], press
the <W> or <Y> key.
the amount of exposure
3 Set
compensation.
zz Turn the <5> dial and select the
exposure level indicator. A [6] icon
appears to the left of the exposure
level indicator.
zz Turn the <6> dial to set the option.
zz To reset the setting to [±0], press the
<W> or <Y> key.
140
Flexible-Priority AE
Combinations of Functions in [t] Mode
Shutter
Speed
Aperture
[AUTO]
[AUTO]
Manual
selection
[AUTO]
[AUTO]
Manual
selection
Manual
selection
Manual
selection
ISO Speed
[AUTO]
Manual
selection
[AUTO]
Manual
selection
[AUTO]
Manual
selection
[AUTO]
Manual
selection
Exposure
Compensation
Shooting
Mode
Available
Similar to [d]
Available
Similar to [s]
Available
Similar to [f]
Available
–
Similar to [a]
ooBlinking values indicate that the values set will cause underexposure or
overexposure. Adjust the exposure until the value stops blinking.
ooSlow synchro is not used under low light when you have set up [t]
mode to resemble [f] or [d] mode, even when [Slow synchro] in
[z2: External Speedlite control] is set to [1/200-30sec. auto].
ooValues for shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed that are set to [AUTO]
are underlined.
ooYou can set shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed to [AUTO] and
exposure compensation to [±0] in steps 2 or 3 by pressing the <X> or
<Z> key.
141
General Still Photo Shooting Cautions
Image Quality
ooWhen you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
ooShooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in
the image.
ooContinuous shooting over an extended period may cause the camera’s
internal temperature to rise and affect image quality. Stop shooting
occasionally.
ooIf you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is
high, image quality may decline. Stop shooting and wait a few minutes
before shooting again.
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning
Icons
ooIf the camera’s internal temperature rises from extended shooting or use
in hot environments, a white <s> or red <E> icon will appear.
ooThe white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
decline. Stop shooting for a while and allow the camera to cool down.
ooThe red <E> icon indicates that shooting will soon end automatically.
Shooting will not be possible again until the camera cools down
internally, so stop shooting temporarily or turn off the camera and let it
cool down a while.
ooShooting in hot environments over extended periods will cause the white
<s> or red <E> icon to appear sooner. When you are not shooting,
always turn off the camera.
ooIf the camera’s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot
with a high ISO speed or long exposure may decline even before the
white <s> icon is displayed.
Shooting Results
ooIf you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come out
as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.
ooEven if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be captured
with the image area of the normal view.
142
General Still Photo Shooting Cautions
Images and Display
ooUnder low- or bright-light conditions, the displayed image may not reflect
the brightness of the captured image.
ooUnder low light, noise may be noticeable in image display even at low
ISO speeds, but there will be less noise in your shots, because image
quality varies between display and captured images.
ooThe screen or exposure value may flicker if the light source (lighting)
changes. In this case, stop shooting temporarily and resume under the
light source you will use.
ooPointing the camera a different direction may momentarily prevent
correct display of brightness. Wait until the brightness level stabilizes
before shooting.
ooIf there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the screen. However, the actual captured image will
correctly show the bright area.
ooIn low light, if you set the [52: Disp. brightness] to a bright setting,
noise or irregular colors may appear in the image. However, the noise or
irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image.
ooWhen you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more
pronounced than in the actual image.
Lens
ooIf the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all
times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image
Stabilizer consumes battery power and may decrease the number
of possible shots depending on the shooting conditions. When the
Image Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when using a tripod, it is
recommended that you set the IS switch to <2>.
ooWith EF lenses, focus preset during shooting is only available when
using (super) telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in
and after the second half of 2011.
143
i Selecting the Drive Mode
Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the
drive mode suiting the scene or subject.
the <B> button (9).
1 Press
zz With an image displayed on the
screen, press the <B> button.
the drive mode item.
2 Select
zz Turn the <5> dial to select the drive
mode item.
the drive mode.
3 Select
zz Turn the <6> dial to make a
selection.
zz[u] Single shooting
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will be taken.
zz[o] High-speed continuous shooting
When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot
continuously at max. approx. 8.0 shots/sec. while you keep holding it down.
However, the maximum continuous shooting speed may become
slower under the following conditions:
When set to reduce flicker:
The continuous shooting speed will be max. approx. 5.4 shots/
sec.
When set for Dual Pixel RAW:
Automatically switches to low-speed continuous shooting.
144
Selecting the Drive Mode
With Servo AF shooting:
When [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], the continuous
shooting speed of max. approx. 5.0 shots/sec. will be given
priority.
With silent shooting:
When [z6: Silent shutter] is set to [Enable], the continuous
shooting speed will be max. approx. 5.0 shots/sec.
In flash photography:
With EL or EX series Speedlites, the continuous shooting speed
will be max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.
zz[i] Low-speed continuous shooting
When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot
continuously at max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec. while you keep
holding it down.
When [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], subject tracking with
a continuous shooting speed of max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec. is
given priority.
When set to Dual Pixel RAW, this is max. approx. 2.2 shots/sec.
zz[m] Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control
zz[l] Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control
For self-timer shooting, see page 147. For remote control
shooting, see page 174.
During <o> high-speed continuous shooting, the maximum continuous
shooting speed varies depending on the shooting conditions. For details,
see the next page.
145
Selecting the Drive Mode
ooApprox. 8.0 shots/sec. is the maximum <o> high-speed continuous
shooting speed (p.144) under these conditions: shooting with a
fully charged battery in One-Shot AF mode at a 1/1000 sec. or faster
shutter speed and maximum aperture (depending on the lens*), at
room temperature (23°C / 73°F), with flicker reduction, Dual Pixel RAW
shooting, and Silent shutter disabled.
* In One-Shot AF mode with Image Stabilizer off when using these
lenses: EF300mm f/4L IS USM, EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM, EF75300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM, EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM.
ooThe continuous shooting speed for <o> high-speed continuous
shooting may be lower, depending on conditions such as these: battery
level, temperature, flicker reduction, Dual Pixel RAW shooting, silent LV
shooting, silent shooting, shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions,
brightness, AF operation, type of lens, use of flash, and shooting
settings.
ooWith Servo AF, the maximum continuous shooting speed may become
slower depending on subject conditions or the lens used. Setting [z6:
Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] when Servo AF is set also lowers the
maximum continuous shooting speed.
ooWith [z6: Anti-flicker shoot.] set to [Enable] (p.115), shooting under
flickering light will decrease the maximum continuous shooting speed.
Also, the continuous shooting interval may become irregular and the
release time lag may become longer.
ooThe maximum continuous shooting speed may drop to approx. 6.0
shots/sec. when a cold battery is used in cold environments, or when the
battery level is low.
ooEven with low-speed continuous shooting, the continuous shooting
speed may become slower depending on the shooting conditions.
ooWhen internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the
continuous shooting speed may drop off because shooting will be
temporarily disabled (p.77).
146
j Using the Self-Timer
Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture such as a
commemorative photograph.
the <B> button (9).
1 Press
zz With an image displayed on the
screen, press the <B> button.
the drive mode item.
2 Select
zz Turn the <5> dial to select the drive
mode item.
the self-timer.
3 Select
zz Turn the <6> dial to select the selftimer.
m: Shoot in 10 sec.
l: Shoot in 2 sec.
zz <Q> <k> are displayed when
the camera is paired with a wireless
remote control (sold separately,
p.174).
the picture.
4 Take
zz Focus on the subject, then press the
shutter button completely.
ggYou can check the self-timer operation
with the self-timer lamp, beeper, and
countdown display (in seconds) on the
LCD panel.
ggSelf-timer lamp blinking accelerates and
the camera beeps quickly approx. 2 sec.
before the picture is taken.
147
Using the Self-Timer
oo<l> enables you to shoot without touching the camera mounted
on a tripod. This prevents camera shake if you shoot still lifes or long
exposures.
ooAfter taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.304) to check
focus and exposure is recommended.
ooWhen using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock (p.126) on
an object at the same distance as where you will stand.
ooTo cancel the self-timer after it starts, press <0>.
ooAuto power off time may be extended when the camera is set for remote
shooting.
148
Selecting the Display Speed for High-Speed
Continuous ShootingN
High-speed display that switches between your shot and the live image
is available when shooting with an RF lens, with [21: AF operation]
set to [Servo AF], and with the drive mode set to <o> [High speed
continuous]. Display is more responsive, making it easier to follow
fast-moving subjects.
Select [z6:
1 display].
High speed
an item.
2 Select
zz Select [Enable] for display that
switches between each continuous
shot and the live image.
ooImages may waver or flicker during high-speed display. This occurs more
often at high shutter speeds. However, this does not affect shooting
results.
ooHigh-speed display is not performed under the following conditions. It
may also stop as you are shooting.
• Shutter speed slower than 1/30 sec., aperture value larger than f/11,
conditions that make autofocusing difficult, flash photography, and ISO
expansion
[Enable] is available when all of these conditions apply.
• With an RF lens, [AF operation] set to [Servo AF] (p.262), drive
mode set to [High speed continuous] (p.144), [Anti- flicker shoot.]
set to [Disable] (p.115), [Expo. simulation] set to [Enable] (p.120),
[Silent shutter] set to [Disable] (p.151)
149
Silent Live View ShootingN
You can adjust the camera’s drive and shutter operating characteristics
to suit shooting conditions or the lens used.
1 Select [z6: Silent LV shoot.].
an option.
2 Set
zz Select an option, then press <0>.
zzMode 1 (Default setting)
zzMode 2
When the shutter button is pressed completely, only one shot will
be taken. While you keep holding down the shutter button, the
camera operation will be suspended. This enables quieter shooting,
and operation will resume once you return the shutter button to the
halfway position. Even if continuous shooting is set, only a single
shot will be taken.
zzDisable
Be sure to set it to [Disable] if you use a TS-E lens for shifting or
tilting the lens or if you use an extension tube. If [Mode 1] or [Mode
2] is set, the standard exposure may not be obtained, or an irregular
exposure may result.
ooDefocused image areas may be incomplete when shooting near
maximum aperture at high shutter speeds. If you dislike the appearance
of defocused image areas, shooting as follows may give better results.
• Shoot with [z6: Silent LV shoot.] set to [Disable].
• Shoot using Silent shutter.
• Lower the shutter speed.
• Increase the aperture value.
ooIf [Mode 2] is set and you use a wireless remote control (sold separately,
p.174), the operation will be the same as with [Mode 1].
150
Silent ShootingN
You can shoot silently, using the sensor’s electronic shutter feature,
instead of with the mechanical shutter normally used in still photo
shooting. Continuous shooting is also possible. This is useful when
shooting where the camera must be quiet.
Available in <u>, <o>, <m>, or <l> drive mode.
1 Select [z6: Silent shutter].
2 Select [Enable].
the drive mode (p.144).
3 Select
zz Select <u>, <o>, <m>, or
<l>.
the picture.
4 Take
ggAs you shoot, a white frame is displayed
around the screen.
ooBe responsible when using silent shooting, and respect subject privacy
and portrait rights.
ooWith fast-moving subjects, shots of the subject may be distorted, or, in
continuous shooting with Servo AF (p.263), shots may be out of focus.
ooWith some lenses and under some shooting conditions, lens focusing
and aperture adjustment may be audible.
ooWhen using silent shooting, if the flash of another camera is fired
or silent shooting is performed under flickering light source such as
a fluorescent light, stripes of light or banding due to the brightness
difference may be recorded in the image.
ooAEB shooting and flash photography are not available.
ooHigh-speed display (p.149) is not used in silent shooting, even when
the drive mode is set to <o>.
Setting [z6: Silent shutter] to [Disable] restores the original setting for
[z6: Silent LV shoot.].
151
q Selecting the Metering ModeN
You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.
In [A] mode, evaluative metering is set automatically.
the <Q> button (7).
1 Press
zz With an image displayed, press the
<Q> button.
the metering mode.
2 Select
zz Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the item.
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the metering mode.
[q]: Evaluative metering
[w]: Partial metering
[r]: Spot metering
[e]: Center-weighted average
metering
[q] Evaluative metering
General-purpose metering mode suited even for backlit subjects. The
camera adjusts the exposure automatically to suit the scene.
[w] Partial metering
Effective where there are much brighter lights around the subject due
to backlight, etc. Covers approx. 6.1% of the area at the center of the
screen. The partial metering area is indicated on the screen.
[r] Spot metering
Effective when metering a specific part of the subject or scene. Covers
approx. 2.7% of the area at the center of the screen. The spot metering
area is indicated on the screen.
[e] Center-weighted average metering
The metering across the screen is averaged, with the center of the
screen weighted more heavily.
152
Selecting the Metering Mode
ooBy default, the camera will set the exposure as follows.
With [q] (Evaluative metering), holding down the shutter button halfway
will lock the exposure setting (AE lock) after focus is achieved with OneShot AF. In the [w] (Partial metering), [r] (Spot metering), and [e]
(Center-weighted average metering) modes, the exposure is set at the
moment the picture is taken. (Pressing the shutter button halfway does
not lock the exposure.)
ooWith [82: Meter. mode, AE locked after focus], you can set whether
or not to lock the exposure (AE lock) when focus is achieved with OneShot AF (p.548).
153
O Setting the Desired Exposure CompensationN
Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken
(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.
Exposure compensation can be set in the [t], [d], [s], [f], and
[a] shooting modes. You can set exposure compensation up to ±3
stops in 1/3-stop increments.
For details on exposure compensation when [a] mode and ISO Auto
are both set, see page 139, and see page 140 for [t] mode.
the exposure.
1 Check
zz Press the shutter button halfway and
check the exposure level indicator.
Increased exposure for a
brighter image
Decreased exposure for a
darker image
2 zzSet it by looking at the screen as you
Set the compensation amount.
turn the <5> dial.
ggA <O> icon is displayed to indicate
exposure compensation.
the picture.
3 Take
zz To cancel exposure compensation,
set the exposure level indicator <N>
to the standard exposure index (<C>).
If [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.104) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation for a darker image is set.
The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you set
the power switch to <2>.
154
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N
By changing the shutter speed, aperture, or ISO speed automatically,
you can bracket the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for
three consecutive shots. This is called AEB.
* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.
1 Select [z3: Expo.comp./AEB].
the AEB range.
2 Set
zz Turn the <6> dial to set the AEB
(1)
Standard exposure
Decreased exposure
Increased exposure
range (1). By pressing the <Y>
<Z> keys, you can set the exposure
compensation amount.
zz Press <0> to set it.
ggWhen you exit the menu, the AEB
range will be displayed on the screen.
the picture.
3 Take
zz Three bracketed shots will be taken
according to the drive mode set in
this sequence: Standard exposure,
decreased exposure, and increased
exposure.
zz AEB will not be automatically
canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step
2 to turn off the AEB range display.
155
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)
If [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.104) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the effect of AEB may be reduced.
oo<A> blinks in the lower left of the screen during AEB shooting.
ooIf the drive mode is set to <u>, press the shutter button three times for
each shot. When <o> or <i> is set and you hold down the shutter
button completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken consecutively
and the camera will automatically stop shooting. When <m> or <l>
is set, the three bracketed shots will be taken consecutively after a 10sec. or 2-sec. delay.
ooYou can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.
ooThe shooting mode cannot be changed during AEB shooting.
ooAEB cannot be used with flash, Multi Shot Noise Reduction, or in HDR
mode.
ooAEB will be canceled automatically if you do any of the following: Setting
the power switch to <2> or when the flash is fully charged.
156
A Locking the Exposure for Shooting (AE Lock)N
You can lock the exposure when you want to set the focus and
exposure separately or when you are to take multiple shots at the same
exposure setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then
recompose and take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is effective for
shooting backlit subjects, etc.
on the subject.
1 Focus
zz Press the shutter button halfway.
ggThe exposure setting will be
displayed.
the <A> button (4).
2 Press
ggA <A> icon is displayed in the lower
left of the screen to indicate that
exposure is locked (AE lock).
zz Each time you press the <A> button,
the current exposure setting is locked.
and take the picture.
3 Recompose
zz When you are to take more pictures
while maintaining the AE lock, keep
holding down the <A> button and
press the shutter button to take
another picture.
AE Lock Effects
Metering
Mode
q
wre
AF Point Selection Method
Automatic Selection
Manual Selection
Exposure centered on the AF
Exposure centered on the
point in focus is locked.
selected AF point is locked.
Exposure at the center of the screen is locked.
* In [q] mode with the lens’s focus mode switch set to <MF>, the exposure at
the center of the screen is locked.
157
BULB: Long (Bulb) Exposures
In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the
shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter
button. This photographic technique is called “bulb exposure”. Use bulb
exposures for night scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects
requiring long exposures.
1 Set the shooting mode to [BULB].
the desired aperture.
2 Set
zz Turn the <6> dial to set it.
the picture.
3 Take
zz The exposure will continue for as
long as you keep the shutter button
pressed completely.
ggThe elapsed exposure time will be
displayed on the LCD panel.
ooDo not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
ooLong bulb exposures produce more noise in the image than usual.
ooIf ISO Auto is set, ISO 400 will be set (p.608).
ooWhen shooting bulb exposures with the self-timer instead of the bulb
timer, keep pressing the shutter button completely (for the self-timer time
and bulb exposure time).
158
Long (Bulb) Exposures
ooWith [z5: Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise
generated during long exposures (p.107).
ooFor bulb exposures, using a tripod and bulb timer is recommended.
ooYou can also shoot bulb exposures by using Remote Switch RS-60E3
(sold separately, p.176).
ooYou can also use Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately,
p.174) for bulb exposures. When you press the remote control’s
transmit button, the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later.
Press the button again to stop the bulb exposure.
Bulb TimerM
You can preset the bulb exposure’s exposure time. The bulb timer
eliminates the need to keep holding down the shutter button during the
bulb exposure. This reduces camera shake.
The bulb timer can be set only in the [BULB] (bulb exposure). It cannot
be set (or will not function) in any other mode.
1 Select [z6: Bulb timer].
[Enable].
2 Select
zz Select [Enable], then press the
<B> button.
159
Long (Bulb) Exposures
the desired exposure time.
3 Set
zz Select the hour, minute, or second.
zz Press <0> to display <r>.
zz Set the desired number, then press
<0>. (Returns to <s>.)
4 Select [OK].
the picture.
5 Take
ggPress the shutter button completely,
and the bulb exposure will start and
continue until the set time elapses.
zz [H] and the exposure time are
displayed on the LCD panel during
bulb timer shooting.
zz To cancel the timer setting, set
[Disable] in step 2.
ooWhile the bulb timer is operating, if you press the shutter button
completely and let go of it, the bulb exposure will stop.
ooIf you keep pressing the shutter button completely after the exposure
starts, the bulb exposure will continue even after the set exposure time
elapses. (The bulb exposure will not stop automatically when the set
exposure time elapses.)
ooChanging shooting modes cancels the bulb timer and restores the
setting to [Disable].
160
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
You can shoot still photos with clipped highlights and shadows reduced
for a high dynamic range of tones even in high-contrast scenes. HDR
shooting is effective for landscape and still-life shots.
With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures
(standard exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are
captured consecutively for each shot and then merged together
automatically. The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image.
* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
1 Select [z5: HDR Mode].
[Adjust dyn range].
2 Set
zz Select the range, then press <0>.
zz Selecting [Auto] will have the
dynamic range set automatically
depending on the image’s overall
tonal range.
zz The higher the number, the wider the
dynamic range will be.
zz To exit HDR shooting, select [Disable
HDR].
[Effect].
3 Set
zz Select the effect, then press <0>.
161
HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting
Effects
zz[P] Natural
For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and
shadow details would otherwise be lost. Clipped highlights and
shadows will be reduced.
zz[A] Art standard
While the clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced more than
with [Natural], the contrast will be lower, and the gradation flatter to
have the picture look like a painting. The subject outlines will have
bright (or dark) edges.
zz[B] Art vivid
The colors are more saturated than with [Art standard], and the low
contrast and flat gradation create a graphic art effect.
zz[C] Art bold
The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and
the picture looks like an oil painting.
zz[D] Art embossed
The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are
decreased to make the picture look flat. The picture looks faded and
old. The subject outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.
Saturation
Outline
emphasis
Brightness
Tone
Art standard
Art vivid
Standard
High
Art bold
Higher
Art embossed
Low
Standard
Weak
Strong
Stronger
Standard
Flat
Standard
Flat
Standard
Flat
Dark
Flatter
Each effect will be applied based on the characteristics of the Picture Style
currently set (p.88).
162
HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting
a [Continuous HDR] option.
4 Set
zz Select an option, then press <0>.
zz With [1 shot only], HDR shooting will
be canceled automatically after the
shooting ends.
zz With [Every shot], HDR shooting
continues until the setting in step 2 is
set to [Disable HDR].
[Auto Image Align].
5 Set
zz For handheld shooting, select
[Enable]. When using a tripod, select
[Disable], then press <0>.
the images to save.
6 Specify
zz To save the three images captured
and the resulting HDR image, select
[All images] and press <0>.
zz To save only the HDR image, select
[HDR img only] and press <0>.
the picture.
7 Take
zz When you press the shutter button
completely, three consecutive images
will be captured, and the HDR image
will be recorded to the card.
163
HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting
ooRAW HDR images are captured in JPEG73 image quality. RAW+JPEG
HDR images are captured in the specified JPEG image quality. The three
images captured to create an HDR image are also in the specified image
quality.
ooHDR shooting is not possible with expanded ISO speeds (L, H1, H2).
HDR shooting is possible within ISO 100–40000 (varies depending on
the settings of [Minimum] and [Maximum] for [ISO speed range]).
ooThe flash will not fire during HDR shooting.
ooAEB is not available.
ooIf you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave
afterimages.
ooIn HDR shooting, three images are captured with different shutter speeds
set automatically. Therefore, even in the [t], [s], and [a] shooting
modes, the shutter speed will be shifted based on the shutter speed you
set.
ooTo prevent camera shake, a high ISO speed may be set.
164
HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting
ooWhen shooting HDR images with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable],
AF point display information (p.309) and Dust Delete Data (p.121) will
not be appended to the image.
ooIf you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to
[Enable], image periphery will be slightly trimmed and resolution will be
slightly lowered. Also, if the images cannot be aligned properly due to
camera shake, etc., auto image alignment may not take effect. Note that
when shooting with excessively bright (or dark) exposure settings, auto
image alignment may not work properly.
ooIf you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to
[Disable], the three images may not be properly aligned and the HDR
effect may be reduced. Using a tripod is recommended.
ooAuto image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
ooThe color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced
correctly. Irregular colors, irregular exposure or noise may appear.
ooHDR shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural
color reproduction of the illuminated areas.
ooWith HDR shooting, the images will be merged, then saved to the
card, so it may take some time. [BUSY] is displayed on the screen and
LCD panel as images are processed, and shooting is not possible until
processing is finished.
165
P Multiple ExposuresN
As you shoot multiple exposures (2–9), you can see how the images
will be merged into a single image.
1 Select [z5: Multiple exposure].
a [Multiple exposure] option.
2 Set
zz Select an option, then press <0>.
zz To exit shooting multiple exposures,
select [Disable].
zzOn: Func/Ctrl (Function and control priority)
Convenient when shooting multiple exposures gradually as you
check the results. During continuous shooting, the continuous
shooting speed will decrease greatly.
zzOn: ContShtng (Continuous shooting priority)
Used for continuous multiple exposures of moving subjects.
Continuous shooting is possible without the following operations:
menu viewing, image review after capture, image playback, and
undo last image (p.172). Captured images are not displayed
merged.
Note that only the multiple-exposure image will be saved. (Single
exposures used for the multiple-exposure image are discarded.)
Multiple-exposure shooting may not be possible with some lenses.
166
Multiple Exposures
[Multi-expos ctrl].
3 Set
zz Select the desired multiple-exposure
control method, then press <0>.
zzAdditive
The exposure of each single image captured is added cumulatively.
Based on the [No. of exposures], set a negative exposure
compensation. Follow the basic guide below to set the exposure
compensation amount.
Exposure Compensation Setting Guide by Number of Exposures
Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures:
-2 stops
zzAverage
Based on the [No. of exposures], negative exposure compensation
is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot
multiple exposures of the same scene, the exposure of the subject’s
background will be automatically controlled to obtain the standard
exposure.
zzBright/Dark
Brightness (or darkness) of the base image and added images is
compared at the same position, and bright (or dark) portions are
retained. Some overlapping colors may be mixed, depending on the
relative brightness (or darkness) of the images.
the [No. of exposures].
4 Set
zz Select the number of exposures, then
press <0>.
zz You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures.
167
Multiple Exposures
the images to save.
5 Specify
zz To save all single exposures and the
multiple-exposure image, select [All
images] and press <0>.
zz To save only the multiple-exposure
image, select [Result only] and press
<0>.
a [Continue Mult-exp] option.
6 Set
zz Select an option, then press <0>.
zz With [1 shot only], multipleexposure shooting will be canceled
automatically after the shooting ends.
zz With [Continuously], multipleexposure shooting continues until the
setting in step 2 is set to [Disable].
(1)
the first exposure.
7 Shoot
ggWhen [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, the
image is displayed after capture.
zz You can check the remaining
exposures, which is indicated on the
screen (1).
zz Pressing the <x> button enables
you to view the captured image
(p.172).
168
Multiple Exposures
the next exposures.
8 Shoot
zz When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, images
captured so far are displayed merged.
To display only the current image,
press the <B> button repeatedly.
zz Multiple-exposure shooting will end
when the set number of exposures
are taken.
ooWith [On:Func/Ctrl], you can press the <x> button to view the
multiple-exposure images so far or delete the previous single exposure
(p.172).
ooThe shooting information for the last shot will be recorded and appended
to the multiple-exposure image.
169
Multiple Exposures
ooThe image quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise
reduction, color space, etc. set for the first single exposure will also be
set for the subsequent exposures.
ooIf [z4: Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for
shooting.
ooWith [On:Func/Ctrl] and [Additive] set, any noise, irregular colors,
banding, or similar issues affecting images displayed as you shoot may
look different in the final multiple-exposure image.
ooWith multiple exposures, the more exposures there are, the more
noticeable the noise, irregular colors, and banding will be.
ooIf [Additive] is set, the image processing after taking the multiple
exposures will take time. (The access lamp will light up longer.)
ooIn step 8, the brightness and noise of the multiple-exposure image
displayed during shooting will be different from those of the final multipleexposure image recorded.
ooMultiple-exposure shooting is canceled if you set the power switch to
<2> or switch batteries or cards.
ooSwitching to [A] shooting mode ends multiple-exposure shooting.
170
Multiple Exposures
Merging Multiple Exposures with an Image Recorded on the Card
You can select a RAW image recorded on the card as the first single
exposure. The image data of the selected RAW image will remain intact.
Only 1 or F images can be used. JPEG images cannot be
selected. Images you can specify also vary depending on the lens
attached. For details, see the table below.
1 Select [Select image for multi. expo.].
the first image.
2 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the image to be used as the first
single exposure, then press <0>.
zz Select [OK].
ggThe file number of the selected image will
be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
the picture.
3 Take
zz When you select the first image,
the number of remaining exposures
as set with [No. of exposures] will
decrease by 1.
zzImages You Can Select
Lens Attached Cropped Shooting
Selectable Images
Off
RAW images captured at full size
On
RAW images from cropped shooting or
taken with an EF-S lens
EF-S lens
–
RF/
EF lens
ooThese images cannot be selected as the first single exposure: Images
captured with [z3: Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable] or
[Enhanced], or images captured with [z1: zCropping/aspect ratio]
not set to [Full-frame] or [1.6x (crop)].
oo[Disable] is applied for [z2: Lens aberration correction] and [z3:
Auto Lighting Optimizer] regardless of the settings of the image
selected as the first single exposure.
171
Multiple Exposures
ooThe ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, color space,
etc. set for the first image will also be applied for the subsequent images.
ooIf Picture Style is [Auto] for the image selected as the first image,
[Standard] will be applied for shooting.
ooYou cannot select an image taken with another camera.
ooImages captured using lenses incompatible with multiple-exposure
shooting cannot be selected (as the first single exposure).
oo [Select image for multi. expo.] is not available unless a lens is attached.
ooYou can also select a RAW image used in multiple-exposure shooting.
ooSelect [Deselect img] to cancel image selection.
Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting
Before you finish shooting your specified number
of exposures using [On:Func/Ctrl] (not with
[On:ContShtng]), you can press the <x>
button to view the multiple-exposure image so far,
check exposure, and see how the images are layered.
Pressing the <L> button will display the operations
possible during multiple-exposure shooting.
Operation
Description
The screen before you pressed the <L> button will
reappear.
Deletes the last image you shot (shoot another image).
q Undo last image
The number of remaining exposures will increase by 1.
With [Save source imgs: All images], all single
exposures and the multiple-exposure image created so
far are saved before exiting.
W Save and exit
With [Save source imgs: Result only], only the multipleexposure image created so far is saved before exiting.
The multiple-exposure shooting will end without saving
r Exit without saving
the image.
2 Return to
previous screen
During multiple-exposure shooting, you can only play back multiple-exposure images.
172
Multiple Exposures
FAQ
zzAre there any restrictions on the image quality?
All single exposures and the multiple-exposure image are captured
at your specified image quality. All JPEG image quality settings can
be selected.
zzCan I merge images recorded on the card?
With [Select image for multi. expo.], you can select the first single
exposure from the images recorded on the card (p.171). Note that
you cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card.
zzHow are multiple-exposure files numbered?
With the camera set to save all images, multiple-exposure image
files are named with the number after the last single exposure used
to create them.
zzWill auto power off take effect during multiple-exposure
shooting?
As long as [Auto power off] under [52: Power saving] is not set to
[Disable], the camera automatically turns off after approx. 30 min.,
which ends multiple-exposure shooting and cancels multipleexposure settings.
173
Remote Control Shooting
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) compatible with
Bluetooth® low energy technology enables remote control shooting up
to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera.
Pairing
To use BR-E1, you must first pair (connect and register) the
camera and remote control. For pairing instructions, see page
408.
Do the following after the devices are paired.
the <B> button (9).
1 Press
zz With an image displayed on the
screen, press the <B> button.
the drive mode item.
2 Select
zz Turn the <5> dial to select the drive
mode item.
the self-timer/remote control.
3 Select
zz Turn the <6> dial to select <Q> or
<k>.
174
Remote Control Shooting
the picture.
4 Take
zz By pressing the <2> button on the
remote control, you can also autofocus.
zz To shoot, press the release button on
the remote control.
zz For detailed shooting instructions,
refer to the BR-E1 instruction
manual.
You cannot use infrared remote control units such as Remote Controller
RC-6.
ooIf focusing is not possible with AF, focus manually before shooting
(p.281).
ooAuto power off time may be extended when the camera is set for remote
shooting.
ooThe remote control can also be used for movie shooting (p.245).
175
Using a Remote Switch
You can shoot by connecting Remote
Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately).
For operating instructions, refer to the
remote switch instruction manual.
1 Open the terminal cover.
the plug to the remote
2 Connect
control terminal.
176
D Flash Photography
EL/EX Series Speedlites for EOS Cameras
Using an EL/EX series Speedlite (sold separately) makes flash
photography easy.
For operation procedures, refer to the EL/EX series Speedlite’s
Instruction Manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all
the features of EL/EX series Speedlites.
To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions on the camera’s
menu screen, see page 179.
zz Flash
exposure compensation
You can adjust flash output (flash exposure compensation). With an
image displayed on the screen, press the <B> button, turn the
<5> dial to select the flash exposure compensation item, then turn
the <6> dial to set the flash exposure compensation. You can set
flash exposure compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
zzFE lock
This enables you to attain an appropriate flash exposure for a
specific part of the subject. Aim the viewfinder center over the
subject, press the camera’s <A> button, then compose the shot and
take the picture.
Even if you set negative flash exposure compensation (to keep images
darker), bright images may still be captured unless [z3: Auto Lighting
Optimizer] (p.104) is set to [Disable].
ooThe Speedlite will automatically fire an AF-assist beam as needed, if
autofocusing is difficult under low light.
ooYou can adjust the flash exposure compensation with Quick Control
(p.68) or with [Flash function settings] under [z2: External
Speedlite control] (p.182).
ooThe camera can turn on a Speedlite automatically when the camera is
turned on. For details, refer to the instruction manual of Speedlites that
support this feature.
177
Flash Photography
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EL/EX Series
zz With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL
autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.
Set the camera’s shooting mode to [a] manual exposure or [f]
aperture-priority AE and adjust the aperture setting before shooting.
zz When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the
manual flash mode.
Non-Canon Flash Units
zzSync Speed
The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact flash units
at 1/200 sec. and slower speeds. With large studio flash units, the
flash duration is longer than that of a compact flash unit and varies
depending on the model. Be sure to check before shooting if flash
sync is properly performed by test shooting at a sync speed of
approx. 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec.
ooIf the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to
another camera brand, the camera not only may not operate properly,
but malfunction may result.
ooDo not attach a high-voltage flash unit to the camera’s hot shoe. It may
not be fired.
Flash photography using the PC terminal is possible with Battery Grip BGE22 (sold separately).
178
Setting the Flash FunctionN
With an EL/EX series Speedlite having compatible flash function
settings, you can use the camera’s menu screen to set the Speedlite’s
functions and Custom Functions. Attach the Speedlite to the camera
and turn on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions.
For details on the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
Instruction Manual.
[z2: External Speedlite
1 Select
control].
an item.
2 Select
zz Select an item, then press <0>.
179
Setting the Flash Function
Flash Firing
To enable flash photography, set to
[Enable]. To disable flash firing or
enable only the AF-assist beam, set to
[Disable].
When a Speedlite is attached that supports auto flash firing, you can
also configure the following settings to enable automatic firing as
needed for shooting conditions.
●●Set [Flash firing] to [Enable].
●●Set the Speedlite to automatic flash mode.
●●Set the camera shooting mode to [A] or [d].
For detailed shooting instructions, refer to the instruction manual of
Speedlites supporting auto flash firing.
E-TTL II Flash Metering
For normal flash exposures, set it to
[Evaluative]. If [Average] is set, the
flash exposure will be averaged for the
entire metered scene. Depending on the
scene, flash exposure compensation
may be necessary. This setting is for
advanced users.
180
Setting the Flash Function
Slow Synchro
You can set the flash-sync speed for
flash photography in [f] aperturepriority AE mode or [d] Program AE
mode.
zz[
] 1/200-30sec. auto
zz[
] 1/200-1/60sec. auto
zz[
] 1/200 sec. (fixed)
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/200 sec.
to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. Slow-sync shooting is used
under some shooting conditions, in low-light locations, and shutter
speed is automatically lowered.
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.
It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake. However,
while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash, the
background may come out dark.
The flash sync speed is fixed at 1/200 sec. This more effectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/200-1/60sec.
auto]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out
darker than with [1/200-1/60sec. auto].
ooBy default, it is set to [1/200-1/60sec. auto]. To use Slow synchro in [f]
or [d] mode, set to [1/200-30sec. auto].
ooHigh-speed sync is not available in [f] or [d] mode when set to [1/200
sec. (fixed)].
181
Setting the Flash Function
Safety FE
To avoid overexposure from the flash
firing during the day or at close range,
the camera can automatically lower
the ISO speed and shoot with standard
subject exposure when set to ISO Auto.
Flash Function Settings
The information displayed, position of display, and available
options vary depending on the Speedlite model, its Custom
Function settings, the flash mode, and other factors. For details on
the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s Instruction Manual.
Sample display
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(5)
(1)
(2)
Flash mode
Wireless functions/Flash ratio
control
Flash zoom (Flash coverage)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Shutter synchronization
Flash exposure compensation
Flash exposure bracketing
Functions are limited when using EX series Speedlites that are not
compatible with flash function settings.
182
Setting the Flash Function
zzFlash mode
You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash photography.
[E-TTL II flash metering] is the standard
mode of EL/EX series Speedlites for
automatic flash photography.
[Manual flash] is for setting the
Speedlite’s [Flash output level]
yourself.
[CSP] (continuous shooting priority mode) automatically decreases
flash output by one stop and increases ISO speed by one stop. Useful
in continuous shooting, and helps conserve flash battery power.
Regarding other flash modes, refer to the Instruction Manual of a
Speedlite compatible with the respective flash mode.
Adjust exposure compensation (p.154) as needed in case of overexposure
from flash photography with [CSP] in [t], [s], or [a] mode.
With [CSP], ISO speed is automatically set to [Auto]. [Safety FE] is also
set to [Enable] automatically. After canceling [CSP], check the ISO speed
and [Safety FE] setting.
183
Setting the Flash Function
zzWireless functions / Flash ratio control
Wireless (multiple) flash photography
is possible with radio or optical
transmission.
For details on wireless flash, refer to
the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite
compatible with wireless flash
photography.
With a macro flash (MR-14EX II, etc.)
compatible with flash function settings,
you can set the flash ratio between flash
tubes or flash heads A and B, or use
wireless flash with additional receiver
units.
For details on flash ratio control, refer to
the macro flash’s Instruction Manual.
zzFlash zoom (Flash coverage)
With Speedlites having a zooming flash
head, you can set the flash coverage.
Normally, set this to [AUTO] so that the
camera will automatically set the flash
coverage to match the lens focal length.
184
Setting the Flash Function
zzShutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [First-curtain
synchronization] so that the flash fires
immediately after the exposure starts.
If [Second-curtain synchronization] is set, the flash will be fired right
before the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter
speed, you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at
night with a more natural feel. When second-curtain synchronization is
set together with [E-TTL II flash metering], the flash will be fired twice
in a row: once when you press the shutter button completely and once
right before the end of the exposure.
If [High-speed synchronization] is set, the flash can be used at
all shutter speeds. This is effective when you want to shoot with
background blur (open aperture) in locations such as outdoors in
daylight.
When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to
1/80 sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/90 sec. or faster, first-curtain
synchronization will be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain
synchronization] is set.
185
Setting the Flash Function
zzFlash exposure compensation
You can set flash exposure
compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop
increments.
For details, refer to the Speedlite’s
Instruction Manual.
If flash exposure compensation is set with the Speedlite, you cannot set
the flash exposure compensation with the camera. If it is set with both the
camera and Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting overrides the camera’s.
zzFlash exposure bracketing
While changing the flash output
automatically, three shots will be taken.
For details, refer to the Instruction
Manual of a Speedlite equipped with
flash exposure bracketing.
186
Setting the Flash Function
Flash Custom Function Settings
For details on the Speedlite’s Custom Functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
(sold separately) Instruction Manual.
1 Select [Flash C.Fn settings].
the desired functions.
2 Set
zz Select the number, then press
<0>.
zz Select an option, then press <0>.
ooWith an EL/EX series Speedlite, the Speedlite will always fire at full
output if the [Flash metering mode] Custom Function is set to [TTL]
(autoflash).
ooThe Speedlite’s Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled on
the camera’s [z2: External Speedlite control] screen. Set it directly
on the Speedlite.
Clearing Flash Function Settings / Flash C.Fn Settings
1 Select [Clear settings].
the settings to be cleared.
2 Select
zz Select [Clear flash settings] or
[Clear all Speedlite C.Fn’s], then
press <0>.
zz On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK]. Then the flash settings or
Custom Function settings will all be
cleared.
187
2
-2 Shooting Movies
[Shooting Mode] Settings for Movies
To prepare for movie shooting, press the
<W> button, then press the <B>
button to access the [Shooting mode]
screen at left.
[y]
[k]
[t]
[v]
[M]
[ /
: Scene Intelligent Auto (p.209)
: Program AE (p.209)
: Shutter-priority AE (p.210)
: Aperture-priority AE (p.211)
: Manual exposure (p.213)
/ ]: Custom shooting mode
(p.417)
You can also shoot movies by pressing the movie shooting button during
still photo shooting. Doing this in [A] mode records movies in [A] mode
with the settings specified in [z1: Movie rec quality]. In other shooting
modes, movies are recorded using [ ] (movie C3) mode settings.
188
Tab Menus: Movie Shooting
zzShooting 1
p.192
p.219
p.202
p.205
p.220
zzShooting 2
p.245
p.224
p.245
zzShooting 3
p.246
p.246
p.247
p.247
p.248
p.249
p.249
189
Tab Menus: Movie Shooting
zzShooting 4
p.250
p.250
p.250
p.250
p.236
p.250
p.251
In [y] mode, the following screens are displayed.
zzShooting 1
p.192
p.202
p.205
p.220
zzShooting 2
p.224
p.245
p.251
190
Index to Features: Movie Shooting
Shooting Mode
zz [y] [k] modes
B p.209
zz [t] mode
B p.210
zz [v] mode
B p.211
zz [M] mode
B p.213
Menus/Shooting Features
zz Movie recording
quality
B p.192
zz 24.00p
B p.198
zz High Frame Rate
B p.199
zz Sound recording
B p.202
zz Time code
B p.205
zz Movie cropping
B p.219
zz Movie digital IS
B p.220
zz HDR movie
B p.222
zz Time-lapse movie
B p.224
zz Canon Log
B p.236
zz Lens aberration
correction
B p.245
zz Remote control
shooting
B p.245
zz Exposure
compensation
B p.246
zz ISO speed (movie)
B p.246
zz Auto Lighting
Optimizer
B p.247
zz Highlight tone priority
B p.247
zz Auto slow shutter
B p.248
zz Metering timer
B p.249
zz White balance
correction
B p.250
zz Picture Style
B p.250
zz Noise reduction for
high ISO speeds
B p.250
zz HDMI display
B p.251
zz Av 1/8-stop increments B p.249
zz White balance
B p.250
zz Custom White Balance B p.250
191
Setting the Movie Recording Quality
Under the [z1: Movie rec quality]
tab, select [Movie rec. size] to set the
image size, frame rate, and compression
method. The movie will be recorded as
an MP4 file.
The frame rate displayed on the [Movie
rec. size] screen switches automatically
depending on the [53: Video system]
setting (p.384).
The card’s writing and reading speeds required for recording movies
(card performance requirements) vary depending on the movie
recording quality. Before shooting movies, see page 611 to check the
performance requirements of the card.
Movie Recording Size
zzImage size
[H] 3840x2160
The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.
When shooting HW movies, use a UHS-II SD card (p.611).
[L] 1920x1080
The movie is recorded in Full High-Definition (Full HD) quality. The
aspect ratio is 16:9.
[w] 1280x720
The movie is recorded in High-Definition (HD) quality. The aspect
ratio is 16:9.
192
Setting the Movie Recording Quality
ooIf you change the [53: Video system] setting, also set [z1: Movie rec
quality] again.
ooNormal playback of 4K, L8/7, and High Frame Rate movies,
for example, may not be possible on other devices, because playback is
processing-intensive.
ooSharpness and noise vary slightly depending on movie recording quality,
cropped shooting settings, and the lens used.
ooTo obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the
camera before shooting movies is recommended (p.373).
ooFrame rate options on the screen for movie recording size vary
depending on whether [53: Video system] is set to [For NTSC] or [For
PAL].
ooMovies cannot be recorded in VGA quality.
4K Movie Shooting
zz Shooting 4K movies requires a high-performance card. For details,
see “Cards that Can Record Movies” on page 611.
zz Shooting 4K movies or High Frame Rate movies greatly increases
the processing load, which may cause the camera’s internal
temperature to increase faster or become higher than for regular
movies. If a red E icon appears during movie shooting, the card may
be hot, so stop shooting the movie and let the camera cool down
before removing the card. (Do not remove the card immediately.)
zz From a 4K movie, you can select any frame to save as an approx.
8.3-megapixel (3840×2160) JPEG still image to the card (p.329).
193
Setting the Movie Recording Quality
Movie-Recording Coverage
Image sensor coverage for movies varies depending on movie
recording quality and cropped shooting settings and the lens used.
With EF-S lenses, movies are cropped around the center of the image.
zzRF or EF lenses: With [z1: Movie cropping] set to [Disable]
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
Full HD
HD
4K time-lapse
Full HD time-lapse
4K
zzRF or EF lenses: With [z1: Movie cropping] set to [Enable]
zzEF-S lenses
(3)
(3)
(4)
(4)
4K time-lapse
Full HD time-lapse
4K
Full HD
HD
ooL8W, L8X, L7W, L7X and High Frame
Rate movies cannot be shot with EF-S lenses or when [z1: Movie
cropping] set to [Enable].
ooRecording with Movie digital IS (p.220) further crops the image around
the center of the screen.
194
Setting the Movie Recording Quality
zzFrame rate (fps: frame per second)
[2] 119.9fps/[8] 59.94fps/[6] 29.97fps
For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan,
South Korea, Mexico, etc.). For 2, see page 199.
[3] 100.0fps/[7] 50.00fps/[5] 25.00fps
For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,
Australia, etc.). For 3, see page 199.
[4] 23.98fps/[B] 24.00fps
Mainly for motion pictures. 4 (23.98fps) is available when [53:
Video system] is set to [For NTSC]. For B, see page 198.
zzCompression method
[W] ALL-I (For editing/I-only)
Compresses each frame, one at a time, for recording. Although file
sizes are larger than with IPB (Standard), movies are more suitable for
editing.
[X] IPB (Standard)
Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording. File
sizes are smaller than with ALL-I (For editing), which enables movie
shooting over longer periods (with a card of the same capacity).
[
] IPB (Light)
Since the movie is recorded at a bit rate lower than with IPB
(Standard), the file size will be smaller than with IPB (Standard)
and the playback compatibility will be higher. This will make the
possible shooting time longer than with IPB (Standard) (with a
card having the same capacity).
195
Setting the Movie Recording Quality
zzMovie recording format
[C] MP4
All movies you shoot with the camera are recorded as movie files
in MP4 format (file extension “.MP4”). This file format provides
higher compatibility for playback than with MOV.
196
Setting the Movie Recording Quality
Cards that Can Record Movies
For details on cards that can record at each level of movie recording
quality, see page 611.
When shooting movies, use a high-capacity card with a writing/reading
speed (as specified in card performance requirements) shown in the
table on page 611 or higher than the standard specification. Test the
card by taking a few movies in the desired quality (p.192) and make
sure the card can properly record the movie.
ooFormat cards before shooting 4K movies (p.373).
ooIf you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie may not
be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card with a
slow reading speed, the movie may not be played back properly.
ooWhen shooting movies, use high-performance cards with a writing speed
sufficiently higher than the bit rate.
ooWhen movies cannot be recorded normally, format the card and try
again. If formatting the card does not resolve the problem, refer to the
card manufacturer’s website, etc.
ooTo obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the
camera before shooting movies is recommended (p.373).
ooTo check the card’s writing/reading speed, refer to the card
manufacturer’s website, etc.
197
Setting the Movie Recording Quality
24.00p
Records movies at a frame rate of 24.00 fps.
When [Enable] is set, you can select the
movie recording quality as follows:
HBW, HBX, LBW,
or LBX.
If you set [Movie rec. size] before
setting [24.00p] to [Enable], set [Movie
rec. size] again.
Precautions on [24.00p: Enable]
ooHDMI video output is 2160/24.00p or 1080/24.00p, depending on your
specified movie recording quality. Movies may not be displayed unless
the camera is connected via HDMI to a television or other device
compatible with 1080/24.00p signals.
ooCheck the [Movie rec. size] setting if you return this setting to [Disable].
198
Setting the Movie Recording Quality
High Frame Rate
You can shoot HD movies at a high frame rate of 119.9 fps or 100.0 fps.
This is ideal for shooting movies that will be played back in slow
motion. The maximum recording time per movie is 7 min. 29 sec.
Movies are recorded as w2W or
w3W.
Movie Servo AF and Movie digital IS
have no effect when you shoot High
Frame Rate movies. Also during High
Frame Rate movie shooting, AF is not
used in focusing.
Sound is not recorded in High Frame
Rate movies.
Movie time code display during recording advances 4 sec. per second.
Because High Frame Rate movies are recorded as 29.97 fps/25.00 fps
movie files, they are played back in slow motion at 1/4 speed.
Precautions on [High Frame Rate: Enable]
ooTime codes are not recorded when [Count up] is set to [Free run] under
[z1: Time code] (p.205).
ooCheck the [Movie rec. size] setting if you return this setting to [Disable].
ooThe screen may flicker if you shoot High Frame Rate movies under
fluorescent or LED lighting.
ooFor a moment when you start or stop shooting High Frame Rate movies,
the movie is not updated, and the frame stops momentarily. Be aware of
this when recording movies to external devices via HDMI.
ooMovie frame rates shown on the screen as you shoot High Frame Rate
movies do not correspond to the frame rate of the movie recorded.
ooHeadphones cannot be used, because no sound is audible.
199
Setting the Movie Recording Quality
Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting
without interruption.
zzUsing SD/SDHC cards formatted with the camera
If you use the camera to format an SD/SDHC card, the camera will
format it in FAT32.
With a FAT32-formatted card, if you shoot a movie and the file size
exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be created automatically.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play back
each movie file individually. Movie files cannot be played back
automatically in consecutive order. After the movie playback ends,
select the next movie and play it back.
zzUsing SDXC cards formatted with the camera
If you use the camera to format an SDXC card, the camera will
format it in exFAT.
When using an exFAT-formatted card, even if the file size exceeds
4 GB during movie shooting, the movie will be saved as a single file
(rather than being split into multiple files).
When importing movie files exceeding 4 GB to a computer, use either
EOS Utility or a card reader (p.575). It may not be possible to save movie
files exceeding 4 GB if you attempt this using standard features of the
computer’s operating system.
200
Setting the Movie Recording Quality
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
For details on file sizes and the recording time available at each level
of recording quality, see page 612.
Movie Shooting Time Limit
zzWhen shooting non-High Frame Rate movies
The maximum recording time per movie is 29 min. 59 sec. Once
29 min. 59 sec. is reached, recording automatically stops. You can
start shooting a movie again by pressing the movie shooting button
(which records the movie as a new file).
zzWhen shooting High Frame Rate movies
The maximum recording time per movie is 7 min. 29 sec. Once
7 min. 29 sec is reached, recording automatically stops. You can
start shooting a High Frame Rate movie again by pressing the movie
shooting button (which records the movie as a new file).
201
Setting the Sound Recording
You can shoot movies while recording
sound with the built-in stereo microphone
or an external stereo microphone.
You can also freely adjust the soundrecording level.
Use [z1: Sound recording] to set
sound recording functions.
Audio is recorded in LPCM format for movies with ALL-I compression
and AAC for movies with IPB compression.
Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level
zzAuto
The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto level
control will take effect automatically in response to the sound level.
zzManual
For advanced users. You can adjust the sound-recording level as
needed.
Select [Rec. level] and press the <Y> <Z> keys while looking at
the level meter to adjust the sound-recording level. Look at the peak
hold indicator, and adjust so that the level meter sometimes lights
up on the right of the “12” (-12 dB) mark for the loudest sounds. If it
exceeds “0”, the sound will be distorted.
zzDisable
Sound will not be recorded.
Wind Filter
Set to [Auto] to reduce wind noise when there is wind outdoors. Only
activated when the camera’s built-in microphone is used. When the
wind filter function takes effect, part of the low bass sounds will also be
reduced.
202
Setting the Sound Recording
Attenuator
Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises.
Even if [Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or [Manual] for shooting, sound
distortion may still result if there is a very loud sound. In such a case,
setting it to [Enable] is recommended.
zzUsing a microphone
Normally, the camera’s built-in microphone records in stereo.
If an external stereo microphone equipped with a miniature stereo
plug (3.5 mm diameter) is connected to the camera’s external
microphone IN terminal, the external microphone will be given
the priority. Using the Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold
separately) is recommended.
zzUsing headphones
By connecting commercially available headphones with a 3.5 mm
mini plug to the headphone terminal, you can listen to the sound as
movies are recorded. You can listen in stereo when using the built-in
microphone or an external stereo microphone. To adjust headphone
volume, press the <Q> button, select [n], then turn the <6> dial
for adjustment.
You can also use headphones during movie playback.
203
Setting the Sound Recording
ooSounds from Wi-Fi operations may be captured with built-in or external
microphones. During sound recording, using the wireless communication
function is not recommended.
ooWhen connecting an external microphone or headphones to the camera,
be sure to insert the plug all the way in.
ooThe camera’s built-in microphone will also record the operation sound
and mechanical sound of the camera during shooting. Using Directional
Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) may reduce such sounds in
the movie.
ooDo not connect anything other than an external microphone to the
camera’s external microphone IN terminal.
ooNoise reduction is not applied to the audio played through headphones.
Thus, the audio recorded with the movie will be different.
ooDo not change the [Sound recording] settings when listening with
headphones. This may cause sudden loud output that may hurt your
ears.
ooIn [A] mode, the settings available for [Sound recording] are [On] or
[Off]. Set to [On] for automatic adjustment of the recording level.
ooAudio is also output when the camera is connected to televisions via
HDMI, except when [Sound rec.] is set to [Disable].
ooThe sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be
adjusted.
ooSound is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
204
Setting the Time Code
As movies are recorded, a time code is also
recorded automatically to keep track of the time
for synchronization. Time codes are constantly
recorded in hours, minutes, seconds, and frames.
They are mainly used when movies are edited.
To set up the time code, use [z1: Time
code].
Count Up
zzRec run
The time code advances only while you are shooting movies. The
initial time code value in each movie file captured continues from the
value in the previous file.
zzFree run
The time code advances even when you are not shooting movies.
Start Time Setting
You can set the initial start time of the time code.
zzManual input setting
Enables you to set any starting hour, minute, second, and frame.
zzReset
Resets the time set with [Manual input setting] or [Set to camera
time] to “00:00:00.” or “00:00:00:” (p.208).
zzSet to camera time
Matches the hour, minute, and second set as the time on the
camera. Sets the frame value to “00”.
ooWhen set to [Free run], time codes are not added to High Frame Rate
movies that you shoot.
ooWhen set to [Free run], time codes will be affected by any changes to
settings for time, zone, or daylight saving time (p.380).
ooTime codes may not be displayed correctly if your movies are played
back on devices other than the camera.
205
Setting the Time Code
Movie Recording Count
You can select how time is displayed on the movie shooting screen.
zzRec time
Displays the time that has elapsed since you started shooting the
movie.
zzTime code
Displays the time code during movie recording.
Movie Playback Count
You can select how time is displayed on the movie playback screen.
zzRec time
Displays the recording or playback time during movie playback.
zzTime code
Displays the time code during movie playback.
With [Time code] set
During movie shooting
During movie playback
ooTime codes are always recorded to movie files (except for High Frame
Rate movies with set to [Free run]), regardless of the [Movie rec count]
setting.
ooThe [Movie play count] setting under [z1: Time code] is linked to the
[x3: Movie play count] setting, so that these settings always match.
ooThe “frame” count is not displayed during movie shooting or playback.
206
Setting the Time Code
HDMI
zzTime code
Time codes can be added to movies as you record them to an
external device via HDMI.
Off
No time code is added to HDMI video output.
On
Adds a time code to HDMI video output. When [On] is set, [Rec
Command] is displayed.
zzRecord Command
For HDMI video output recorded by an external device, you can
synchronize recording to when you start and stop shooting the movie
on the camera.
Off
Recording is started and stopped by the external device.
On
Recording by an external device is synchronized to when you
start and stop shooting a movie.
ooTime codes are not added to HDMI video output when you shoot High
Frame Rate movies with [Count up] in [Time code] set to [Free run].
ooTo determine whether your external recording device is compatible with
[Time code] and [Rec Command] functions, check with the device
manufacturer.
ooEven with [Time code] set to [Off], external recording devices may add
time codes to movies, depending on their specifications. For details on
device specifications relevant to adding time code to HDMI input, check
with the device manufacturer.
ooDepending on support by external recording devices, [Rec Command]
may not work correctly if you start recording movies by pressing the
movie shooting button during still photo shooting.
207
Setting the Time Code
Drop Frame
The time code will not match the actual time when frames are counted
in the time code if the frame rate is set to 2 (119.9 fps), 8 (59.94
fps), or 6 (29.97 fps). The discrepancy is corrected automatically
when [Enable] is set. This correction function is called “drop frame”. It
is intended for use in movie editing or other applications by advanced
users.
zzEnable
Corrects the discrepancy automatically by skipping time code
numbers (DF: drop frame).
zzDisable
The discrepancy is not corrected (NDF: non-drop frame).
Time codes are displayed as follows.
Enable (DF)
00:00:00. (Playback: 00:00:00.00)
Disable (NDF)
00:00:00: (Playback: 00:00:00:00)
Drop frame is not used when the frame rate is 3 (100.0 fps), 7 (50.00
fps), 5 (25.00 fps), B (24.00 fps), or 4 (23.98 fps). (The [Drop
frame] item is not displayed when 3/7/5/B/4 is set, or when
[53: Video system] is set to [For PAL].)
208
k Shooting Movies
y/k Autoexposure Shooting
When the shooting mode is set to [y] or [k], autoexposure control
will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness.
the shooting mode to [y] or
1 Set
[k].
zz Press the <W> button.
zz Turn the <6> dial to select [y] or
[k].
on the subject.
2 Focus
zz Before shooting a movie, focus with
AF or manual focus (p.268ꟷ275,
281).
zz By default, [21: Movie Servo AF]
is set to [Enable] so that the camera
always keeps focusing (p.286).
zz When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method.
the movie.
3 Shoot
zz Press the movie shooting button to
(1)
start shooting a movie.
ggWhile the movie is being shot, the
“oREC” mark (1) will be displayed on
the upper right of the screen.
ggSound is recorded by the microphones
at the positions indicated (2).
zz To stop shooting the movie, press the
movie shooting button again.
(2)
209
Shooting Movies
t Shutter-Priority AE
[t] mode enables you to set your preferred shutter speed for movies.
ISO speed and aperture are set automatically to suit the brightness and
obtain standard exposure.
1 Set the shooting mode to [t].
the desired shutter speed (1).
2 Set
zz Turn the <6> dial as you watch the
screen.
zz The settable shutter speeds vary
depending on the frame rate.
(1)
and shoot the movie.
3 Focus
zz The procedure is the same as steps
2 and 3 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.209).
ooAvoid adjusting shutter speed while a movie is being recorded, which
may record changes in exposure.
ooWhen shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx.
1/25 sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed,
the less smooth the subject’s movement will look.
ooIf you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
210
Shooting Movies
v Aperture-Priority AE
[v] mode enables you to set your preferred aperture for movies. ISO
speed and shutter speed are set automatically to suit the brightness
and obtain standard exposure.
1 Set the shooting mode to [v].
the desired aperture (1).
2 Set
zz Turn the <6> dial as you watch the
screen.
(1)
and shoot the movie.
3 Focus
zz The procedure is the same as steps
2 and 3 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.209).
Avoid adjusting aperture while a movie is being recorded, which may record
changes in exposure caused by aperture adjustment.
211
Shooting Movies
Notes for [y], [k], [t], and [v] Modes
ooIn the [y] mode, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera
is displayed on the upper left of the screen (p.623).
ooYou can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the <A> button (except
in the [A] mode, p.157). After applying AE lock during movie shooting,
you can cancel it by pressing the <S> button. (AE lock setting is
retained until you press the <S> button.)
ooExposure compensation can be set in a range of up to ±3 stops (except
in the [A] mode).
ooISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture are not recorded in movie Exif
information in [y] or [k] mode.
ooThe camera is compatible with Speedlite functionality to turn on the LED
light automatically under low light when shooting movies in [y], [k],
[t], or [v] mode. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the
Speedlite equipped with an LED light.
ISO Speed in [y], [k], [t], and [v] Modes
ISO speed is set automatically in [y], [k], [t], and [v] modes.
For details on the ISO speed, see page 614.
Scene Icons
In the [y] shooting mode, the
camera detects the scene type and
sets everything automatically to suit
the scene. The detected scene type is
indicated on the upper left of the screen.
For icon details, see page 623.
212
Shooting Movies
M Manual Exposure Shooting
You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed
for movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for
advanced users.
1 Set the shooting mode to [M].
the ISO speed.
2 Set
zz Press the <B> button.
zz Turn the <5> dial to select the ISO
speed item.
zz Turn the <6> dial to set it.
the shutter speed (1) and
3 Set
aperture (2).
zz Press the shutter button halfway and
check the exposure level indicator.
zz To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial. To set the aperture, turn
the <5> dial.
zz The settable shutter speeds vary
depending on the frame rate.
(1)
(2)
and shoot the movie.
4 Focus
zz The procedure is the same as steps
2 and 3 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.209).
213
Shooting Movies
ooFor movie shooting, the ISO speed cannot be expanded to L (equivalent
to ISO 50).
ooWhen switching from still photo shooting to movie shooting, check the
camera settings again before shooting movies.
ooDuring movie shooting, avoid changing the shutter speed or aperture.
Doing so may record the changes in the exposure or create more noise
at high ISO speeds.
ooWhen shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx.
1/25 sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed,
the less smooth the subject’s movement will look.
ooIf you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
ooWith ISO Auto, exposure compensation can be set in a range of ±3
stops.
ooWhen ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed. After locking the ISO speed during movie shooting, you can
cancel it by pressing the <S> button. (ISO speed lock is maintained
until you press the <S> button.)
ooIf you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to
when the <A> button was pressed.
ooWith the camera ready to shoot in the [M] mode, you can display the
histogram by pressing the <B> button.
ooYou can adjust ISO speed while recording a movie by pressing the
<B> button and using the <6> dial.
214
Shooting Movies
ISO Speed in [M] Mode
In [M] mode, you can set the ISO speed manually or select [AUTO] to
set it automatically. For details on the ISO speed, see page 614.
Shutter Speed
Available shutter speeds in [t] (shutter-priority AE) and [M] (manual
exposure) modes vary depending on the frame rate of your specified
movie recording quality.
Frame
Rate
2
3
8
7
Normal Movie
Shooting
–
Shutter Speed (sec.)
High Frame Rate
HDR Movie Shooting
Movie Shooting
1/4000–1/125
1/4000–1/100
–
6
1/4000–1/8
5
B
4
–
[s] 1/4000–1/60
[a] 1/1000–1/60
[s] 1/4000–1/50
[a] 1/1000–1/50
–
215
Shooting Movies
Still Photo Shooting
Still photos cannot be taken during movie shooting. To take still
photos, stop recording and change the [Shooting mode] setting to still
photos (p.70) first.
Information Display (Movie Shooting)
For details on the icons displayed for movie shooting, see page 621.
216
Cautions for Movie Shooting
ooDo not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
ooIf you shoot something that has fine detail, moire or false colors may
result.
ooIf <Q> or <Qw> is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during
movie shooting, the white balance may also change.
ooIf you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie image
may flicker.
ooIf you perform AF with a USM lens during movie shooting in low light,
horizontal banding noise may be recorded in the movie. The same type
of noise may occur if you focus manually with certain lenses equipped
with an electronic focusing ring.
ooShooting a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform
zooming during movie shooting. Zooming as you shoot movies may
cause exposure changes or lens sounds to be recorded, an uneven
audio level, or loss of focus.
ooLarge aperture values may delay or prevent accurate focusing.
ooDuring movie shooting, if you perform AF, any of the following may occur:
The focus is temporarily greatly thrown off, changes in movie brightness
is recorded, the movie recording stops momentarily, and the mechanical
sound of the lens is recorded.
ooAvoid covering the built-in microphones (p.209) with your fingers or
other objects.
oo“General Movie Shooting Cautions” are on page 253.
ooIf necessary, also read “General Still Photo Shooting Cautions” on
page 142.
217
Notes for Movie Shooting
ooEach time you shoot a movie, a new movie file is created on the card.
ooThe movie’s field of view coverage for shooting 4K, Full HD, and HD
movies is approx. 100%.
ooYou can also focus by pressing the <p> button.
ooTo enable starting or stopping movie shooting by pressing the shutter
button completely, set [Fully-press] for [54: V btn function] to [Start/
stop mov rec].
ooStereo sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphone (p.209).
ooAny external microphones such as Directional Stereo Microphone DME1 (sold separately) connected to the camera’s external microphone IN
terminal are used instead of the build-in microphones (p.203).
ooMost external microphones equipped with a 3.5 mm diameter mini plug
can be used.
ooWith EF lenses, focus preset during movie shooting is available when
using (super) telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in
and after the second half of 2011.
ooYCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the Rec. ITU-R BT.709 color
space are used for 4K, Full HD, and HD movies.
218
Movie CroppingN
With RF or EF lenses, movies can be cropped around the center of the
image, as if using a telephoto lens.
Shooting movies with EF-S lenses has the same effect as this movie
cropping feature.
1 Select [z1: Movie cropping].
[Enable].
2 Select
ggThe center area is magnified.
ooL8W, L8X, L7W, L7X and High Frame
Rate movies cannot be shot with movie cropping.
ooThe center of the screen is further cropped, reducing the shooting area,
when [z1: Movie digital IS] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced].
ooThe shooting area available with movie cropping is the same as when
shooting movies with EF-S lenses.
oo4K movies are always shot with the center of the shooting screen
cropped, and enabling [z1: Movie cropping] does not change the
shooting angle of view.
ooFor details on the shooting area, see page 194.
219
Movie Digital IS
In-camera image stabilization electronically corrects camera shake
during movie shooting. This function is called “Movie digital IS”. With
Movie digital IS, images can be stabilized even when using a lens
without Image Stabilizer. When using a lens with built-in optical Image
Stabilizer, set the lens’s Image Stabilizer switch to <1>.
1 Select [z1: Movie digital IS].
2 Select an item.
zzDisable (v)
Image stabilization with Movie digital IS is disabled.
zzEnable (w)
Camera shake will be corrected. The image will be slightly magnified.
zzEnhanced (x)
Compared to when [Enable] is set, stronger camera shake can be
corrected. The image will be more magnified.
220
Movie Digital IS
Combination IS
Even more effective correction is possible by shooting movies with
Movie digital IS and a Combination IS-compatible lens, which will
combine optical and digital image stabilization by the lens and camera.
ooMovie digital IS will not function when the lens’s optical Imager Stabilizer
switch is set to <2>.
ooAlthough movies can also be recorded with Movie digital IS when using
EF-S lenses or movie cropping, the shooting area is further reduced.
ooWith a lens whose focal length is longer than 800 mm, Movie digital IS
will not function.
ooStabilization by Movie digital IS may be less effective under some
settings for movie recording quality.
ooThe wider the angle of view (wide angle), the more effective the image
stabilization will be. The narrower the angle of view (telephoto), the less
effective the image stabilization will be.
ooWhen using a tripod, setting Movie digital IS to [Disable] is
recommended.
ooDepending on the subject and shooting conditions, the subject may blur
noticeably (the subject momentarily looks out of focus) due to the effects
of the Movie digital IS.
ooWhen using a TS-E lens, fish-eye lens, or non-Canon lens, setting Movie
digital IS to [Disable] is recommended.
ooSince Movie digital IS magnifies the image, the image looks more grainy.
Noise, dots of light, etc. may also become noticeable.
ooFor details on lenses compatible with Combination IS, visit the Canon
website.
oo“+” is added to the Movie digital IS icon (see p.220) when a lens
compatible with Combination IS is used.
221
Shooting HDR Movies
You can shoot high dynamic range movies that retain detail in highlights
of high-contrast scenes.
You can specify to shoot HDR movies from the Quick Control screen
when using RF or EF lenses with [Movie rec. size] under [z1: Movie
rec. quality] set to L6X (NTSC) or L5X (PAL), or
when using EF-S lenses or movie cropping with this setting set to
w6X (NTSC) or w5X (PAL).
[Movie rec. size].
1 Check
zz Check that [Movie rec. size] under
[z1: Movie rec quality] is set to a
size mentioned above.
2 Press the <Q> button (7).
[4].
3 Select
zz Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[4] (HDR Movie Shooting) in the
lower right of the screen.
[5] (Enable).
4 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
[5] (Enable).
222
Shooting HDR Movies
an HDR movie.
5 Shoot
zz Shoot the movie in the same way as
normal movie shooting.
zz For details on file sizes and the
recording time available, see the table
on page 612.
ooMovies are recorded in HD (Full HD is not available) when EF-S lenses
or movie cropping is used.
ooISO speed for HDR movies has a setting range of ISO 100–25600,
whether set automatically or manually. ISO expansion is not available.
ooFor details on shutter speeds, see page 215.
ooMinimum ISO speed in [t] mode is ISO 400.
ooHDR movie shooting is not available with [z1: Movie digital IS], [z2:
Time-lapse movie], [z3: Highlight tone priority], or [Canon Log].
ooImages may still flicker in HDR movie shooting even when a suitable
shutter speed is set.
ooSince multiple frames are merged to create an HDR movie, certain
parts of the movie may look distorted. During handheld shooting,
camera shake may make the distortion look more noticeable. Using a
tripod is recommended. Note that even if a tripod is used for shooting,
afterimages or noise may become more noticeable when the HDR movie
is played back frame-by-frame or in slow-motion compared to normal
playback.
ooImage color and brightness may change significantly for a moment if
you change settings for HDR movie shooting. Also, the movie will not be
updated for a moment, and the frame stops momentarily. Be aware of
this when recording movies to external devices via HDMI.
223
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
Still photos shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically
to create a 4K or Full HD time-lapse movie. A time-lapse movie shows
how a subject changes in a much shorter period of time than the actual
time it took. It is effective for a fixed-point observation of changing
scenery, growing plants, celestial motion, etc.
Time-lapse movies will be recorded in MP4 format at the following
quality: H6W (NTSC)/H5W (PAL) for 4K shooting, and
L 6 W (NTSC)/L 5 W (PAL) for Full HD shooting.
Note that the frame rate will be switched automatically according to the
[53: Video system] setting (p.384).
1 Select a shooting mode.
2 Select [z2: Time-lapse movie].
3 Select [Time-lapse].
the desired movie recording
4 Select
size.
zz Select the size, then press <0>.
224
Shooting Time-lapse Movies
zzEnableH(3840x2160)
The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9. The
frame rate is 29.97 fps (6) for NTSC and 25.00 fps (5) for
PAL, and movies are recorded in MP4 (C) format with ALL-I (W)
compression.
zzEnableL (1920x1080)
The movie will be recorded in Full High-Definition (Full HD) quality.
The aspect ratio is 16:9. The frame rate is 29.97 fps (6) for NTSC
and 25.00 fps (5) for PAL, and movies are recorded in MP4 (C)
format with ALL-I (W) compression.
the shooting interval.
5 Set
zz Select [Interval].
(1)
(2)
zz Refer to [k: Time required] (1) and
[3: Playback time] (2) to set the
number.
zz Select the hour, minute, or second.
zz Press <0> to display <r>.
zz Set the desired number, then press
<0>. (Returns to <s>.)
zz Can be set in a range of [00:00:02]–
[99:59:59]. (An interval of once per
second is not available.)
zz Select [OK] to register the setting.
225
Shooting Time-lapse Movies
the number of shots.
6 Set
zz Select [No. of shots].
zz Refer to the [k: Time required]
and [3: Playback time] to set the
number.
zz Select the digit.
zz Press <0> to display <r>.
zz Set the desired number, then press
<0>. (Returns to <s>.)
zz Can be set in a range of [0002]–
[3600].
zz Check that [3: Playback time] is
not displayed in red.
zz Select [OK] to register the setting.
ooFor cards that can record time-lapse movies (card performance
requirements), see page 611.
ooIf the number of shots is set to 3600, the time-lapse movie will be approx.
2 min. in NTSC and approx. 2 min. 24 sec. in PAL.
226
Shooting Time-lapse Movies
the exposure’s setting
7 Select
method.
zz Select [Auto exposure].
zz Select an option, then press <0>.
zzFixed 1st frame
When taking the first shot, metering is performed to set the exposure
automatically to match the brightness. The exposure setting for the
first shot will be applied to subsequent shots. Other shooting-related
settings for the first shot will also be applied for subsequent shots.
zzEach frame
Metering is also performed for each subsequent shot to set the
exposure automatically to match the brightness. Note that if functions
such as Picture Style and white balance are set to [Auto], they will
be set automatically for each subsequent shot.
whether the image is to be
8 Set
displayed.
zz Select [Screen auto off].
zz Select an option, then press <0>.
zzDisable
Even during time-lapse movie shooting, the image will be displayed.
(The screen turns off only at the time of shooting.) Note that the
screen will turn off when approx. 30 min. elapse after the shooting
started.
zzEnable
Note that the screen will turn off when approx. 10 sec. elapse after
the shooting started.
During time-lapse movie shooting, you can press the <B> button to turn
on/off the screen.
227
Shooting Time-lapse Movies
the beeper.
9 Set
zz Select [Beep as img taken].
zz If [Disable] is set, the beeper will not
sound for shooting.
10 Check the settings.
(1)
(2)
(1) Time required
Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the
set interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed.
(2) Playback time
Indicates the movie recording time (time required to play back the
movie) when creating the time-lapse movie in 4K movie or Full HD
movie from the still photos taken with the set intervals.
the menu.
11 Exit
zz Press the <M> button to turn off
the menu screen.
228
Shooting Time-lapse Movies
the message.
12 Read
zz Read the message and select [OK].
test shots.
13 Take
zz As with still photo shooting, set the
exposure and shooting functions, then
press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
zz Press the shutter button completely to
take test shots. The still photos will be
recorded to the card.
zz If there are no problems with the test
shots, go to the next step.
zz To take test shots again, repeat this
step.
ooTest shots are captured in JPEG 73 quality.
ooIn the [t] or [M] mode, you can set the shutter speed within a range
of 1/4000 sec. to 30 sec.
ooYou can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in [k], [t], or [v] mode
or in [M] mode with ISO Auto, in [aISO Auto] under [z3: kISO
speed settings] (p.246).
ooWhen shooting with manual exposure, setting [Maximum] for [ISO
speed range] or [Range for H] under [z3: kISO speed settings]
to [H2(102400)] expands the maximum limit of the manual setting range
to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).
ooIf you have set [Half-press] under [54: V btn function] to [Meter.+k
Servo AF], it is automatically changed to [Meter.+One-Shot AF] when
you set up time-lapse movie shooting.
229
Shooting Time-lapse Movies
the movie shooting button.
14 Press
ggThe camera will be ready to start
shooting a time-lapse movie.
zz To return to step 13, press the movie
shooting button again.
the time-lapse movie.
15 Shoot
zz Press the <B> button and check
(1)
230
(2)
again the “Time required (1)” and
“Interval (2)” displayed on the screen.
zz Press the shutter button completely
to start shooting the time-lapse
movie.
zz AF will not work during time-lapse
movie shooting.
zz While the time-lapse movie is
recorded, “oREC” is displayed in the
upper right of the screen.
zz Since the electronic shutter is used
for shooting, the shutter make no
mechanical sound during time-lapse
movie shooting.
ggWhen the set number of shots are
taken, the time-lapse movie shooting
ends.
zz To cancel shooting time-lapse movies,
set [Time-lapse] to [Disable].
Shooting Time-lapse Movies
ooUsing a tripod is recommended.
ooTaking test shots as in step 13 and shooting test movies for time-lapse
movies beforehand is recommended.
ooRegardless of the [Movie rec. size] setting under [z1: Movie rec
quality], 4K time-lapse movies are recorded in H6W (NTSC)/
H5W (PAL), and Full HD time-lapse movies are recorded in L
6 W (NTSC)/L 5 W (PAL).
ooThe movie’s field of view coverage for both the 4K and Full HD timelapse movie shooting is approx. 100%.
ooTo cancel the time-lapse movie shooting in progress, either press the
shutter button completely or press the movie shooting button. The timelapse movie shot so far will be recorded on the card.
ooIf the time required for shooting is more than 24 hours but not more than
48 hours, “2 days” will be indicated. If three or more days are required,
the number of days will be indicated in 24-hour increments.
ooEven if the time-lapse movie’s playback time is less than 1 sec., a movie
file will still be created. For [Playback time], “00:00:00” will be displayed.
ooIf the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet accessories
(sold separately) is recommended.
ooYCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the Rec. ITU-R BT.709 color
space are used for 4K/Full HD time-lapse movies.
ooIf the card does not have enough free space to record the set number of
shots, [Playback time] will be displayed in red. Although the camera can
continue shooting, the shooting will stop when the card becomes full.
ooIf the movie file size exceeds 4 GB with the [No. of shots] settings and
the card is not formatted in exFAT (p.374), [Playback time] will be
displayed in red. If you keep shooting in this condition and the movie file
size reaches 4 GB, the time-lapse movie shooting will stop.
231
Shooting Time-lapse Movies
ooDo not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
ooIf the camera is connected to a computer with the interface cable, or if an
HDMI cable is connected to the camera, you cannot select [Enable].
ooMovie Servo AF will not function.
ooFor time-lapse movies in [t] (Shutter priority AE) mode, aperture is
fixed and exposure is controlled using ISO speed.
ooIf the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or slower, the exposure of the movie
may not be displayed properly (may differ from that of the resulting
movie).
ooDo not zoom the lens during time-lapse movie shooting. Zooming the
lens may cause the image to be out of focus, the exposure to change, or
the lens aberration correction not to function properly.
ooWhen shooting a time-lapse movie under a flickering light, noticeable
image flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures may be
recorded.
ooImages displayed as time-lapse movies are recorded may look different
from the resulting movie (in details such as inconsistent brightness from
flickering light sources, or noise from a high ISO speed).
ooWhen shooting a time-lapse movie under low light, the image displayed
during shooting may look different from what is actually recorded in the
movie. In such cases, the <g> icon will blink.
ooIf you move the camera from left to right (panning) or shoot a moving
subject during time-lapse movie shooting, the image may look extremely
distorted.
ooDuring time-lapse movie shooting, auto power off will not take effect.
Also, you cannot adjust the shooting function and menu function settings,
play back images, etc.
ooNo sound or time codes are recorded for time-lapse movies.
ooWith time-lapse movie shooting, you can press the shutter button
completely to start or stop the movie shooting regardless of the [54: V
btn function] setting.
ooWith [Interval] set to less than 3 sec. and [Auto exposure] set to [Each
frame], if the brightness differs greatly from the preceding shot, the
camera may not shoot at the set interval.
232
Shooting Time-lapse Movies
ooIf the shutter speed exceeds the shooting interval (such as for long
exposures), or if a slow shutter speed is set automatically, the camera
may not be able to shoot at the set interval. Shooting may also be
prevented by shooting intervals nearly the same as the shutter speed.
ooIf the next scheduled shot is not possible, it will be skipped. This may
shorten the recording time of the created time-lapse movie.
ooIf the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the shooting interval
due to the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the shots
may not be taken with the set intervals.
ooEven if [Screen auto off] is set to [Disable], the screen will turn off
during the exposure.
ooEven if [Screen auto off] is set to [Disable], the image may not be
displayed for the short interval before the next shot.
ooIf the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the shooting interval
due to the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the shots
may not be taken with the set intervals.
ooThe captured images are not recorded as still photos. Even if you cancel
the time-lapse movie shooting after only one shot is taken, it will be
recorded as a movie file.
ooIf you connect the camera to a computer with the interface cable and use
EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z2: Time-lapse movie] to [Disable]. If
it is set to [Enable], the camera cannot communicate with the computer.
ooDuring time-lapse movie shooting, the lens’s Image Stabilizer will not
operate.
ooTime-lapse movie shooting ends if the power switch is set to <2>, for
example, and the setting is changed to [Disable].
ooEven if a flash is used, it will not fire.
ooThe following operations cancel standby for time-lapse movie shooting
and switch the setting to [Disable].
• Selecting either [Clean nowf] or [Clean manually] under [53:
Sensor cleaning] or selecting [56: Clear all camera settings].
233
Shooting Time-lapse Movies
ooIf you start time-lapse movie shooting while the white <s> temperature
warning (p.253) is displayed, the image quality of the time-lapse
movie may decline. It is recommended that you start time-lapse movie
shooting after the white <s> disappears (camera’s internal temperature
decreases).
ooWith [Auto exposure] set to [Each frame], ISO speed, shutter
speed, and aperture may not be recorded in the time-lapse movie Exif
information in some modes.
234
Shooting Time-lapse Movies
You can use Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, p.174) to
start and stop the time-lapse movie shooting.
zz With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
• First pair the Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 with the camera (p.408).
• Set [z2: Remote control] to [Enable].
• Take test shots, then when the camera is ready to shoot (as in step 14
on page 230), set the BR-E1’s release mode/movie shooting switch
to <o> (immediate release) or <2> (release after 2-sec. delay).
• If the remote control’s switch has been set to [k], the time-lapse
movie shooting cannot start.
Camera status/remote
control setting
Test-shooting screen
Shooting-ready
During time-lapse movie
shooting
<2> 2-sec. delay
<o> Immediate [k] Movie shooting
release
Test-shooting
To shooting-ready
Starts shooting
To test-shooting screen
Ends shooting
Ends shooting
Approx. Time Available for Shooting Time-lapse Movies
For guidelines on how long you can shoot time-lapse movies (until the
battery runs out), see page 613.
235
Shooting Movies Set to Canon LogN
Canon Log gamma curve leverages image sensor characteristics to
capture a wide dynamic range for movies that will be processed later in
postproduction. With minimal loss of detail in shadows and highlights,
movies retain more visual information across the dynamic range.
To work with Canon Log movies in postproduction, you can apply
look-up tables (LUTs). LUT data can be downloaded from the Canon
website.
the shooting mode to [M].
1 Set
zz Settings after step 3 are only available
in [M] shooting mode.
2 Select [z4: Canon Log settings].
[Canon Log].
3 Select
zz Press <0>.
[On (8bit)] or [On (10bit)]
4 Select
(p.238).
zz Select [On (8bit)] when recording
movies to the card.
zz Select either [On (8bit)] or [On
(10bit)] when recording to an external
device via HDMI.
236
Shooting Movies Set to Canon Log
the options as desired.
5 Set
zz Set [View Assist.], [Color Matrix]
[Characteristics], and [HDMI color
space]. For details, see pages
239–241.
up shooting.
6 Set
zz Set the ISO speed manually (p.242).
7
zz Set the shutter speed and aperture.
Shoot the movie.
zz Before recording movies to a card,
see page 611.
zz When recording movies to an external
device via HDMI, connect the devices
with an HDMI cable.
zz For instructions on external recording
via HDMI, refer to the instruction
manual of the external device.
237
Shooting Movies Set to Canon Log
zzCanon Log
zz On (8bit)
Select when recording movies with
Canon Log to the card. Also enables
you to record to an external device
via HDMI. Recording quality via HDMI
switches automatically based on the
[z1: Movie rec quality] setting.
On (10bit)
Select for 10-bit 4K (3840×2160) recording via HDMI to an
external device that supports 10-bit recording in 4K. Movies
cannot be recorded to the card. [z4: HDMI display] is
automatically set to [A+a].
ooNo HDMI output is produced by the camera when set to [On (10bit)] if
the external recording device does not support 10-bit recording in 4K.
If there is no video output, confirm that the external recording device
supports the signals.
ooFull HD and HD output is not available when set to [On (10bit)].
ooPressing the movie shooting button (p.209) will not start movie
recording if you are shooting still photos in a mode other than [A] and
[On (10bit)] is set for [ ] (movie C3) mode.
YCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the Rec. ITU-R BT.709 color space
are used when recording with Canon Log to the card, just as in regular
movie shooting.
238
Shooting Movies Set to Canon Log
zzView Assist.
When played on the camera, these
movies may look darker and have lower
contrast than movies shot with a Picture
Style applied, due to Canon Log image
characteristics, which are intended to
ensure a wide dynamic range.
For clearer display that makes it easier
to check details, set [View Assist.] to
[On].
●●Setting this feature to [On] does not affect movies recorded to the
card, which are recorded using Canon Log. Similarly, HDMI video
output has Canon Log characteristics, and View Assist is not used
for it.
oo[V.Assist] is displayed on the information display screen when View
Assist is used.
ooWhen set to [On], View Assist is also used with magnified display.
239
Shooting Movies Set to Canon Log
zzColor Matrix
Using a color matrix, you can specify
how colors are reproduced, to plan for
postproduction processing.
Cinema EOS Original
Reproduces [Cinema EOS Original] colors as used on
professional Cinema EOS cameras.
Neutral
Reproduces [Neutral] colors as used on professional Cinema
EOS cameras. Similar to actual subject colors.
240
Shooting Movies Set to Canon Log
zzCharacteristics
Adjust as needed. Select an item
([Sharpness: Strength], [Saturation],
or [Hue]), adjust the effect level, then
press <0>.
Sharpness:
Strength
Saturation
Reds
Hue*
Greens
Blues
0: Weak outline emphasis
7: Strong outline emphasis
-4: Low
-4: Toward magenta
-4: Toward yellow
-4: Toward cyan
+4: High
+4: Toward yellow
+4: Toward cyan
+4: Toward magenta
* Reds, greens, and blues cannot be adjusted separately.
zzHDMI color space
[HDMI color space] can be set when
[Canon Log] is set to [On (10bit)] and
[Color Matrix] to [Neutral].
Choose [BT.709] or [BT.2020] as the
color space for HDMI output.
241
Shooting Movies Set to Canon Log
Shooting Settings
zz Shooting with ISO Auto is not possible, and if set to ISO Auto when
Canon Log is specified, the setting is changed to ISO 400. Set the
ISO speed manually.
zz Manually setting the ISO speed to 100–320 will make the dynamic
range narrower.
zz Canon Log offers a dynamic range of approx. 800% at ISO 400 or
higher.
zz With Canon Log, autofocusing may be more difficult for subjects
under low light, or for low-contrast subjects.
Expanded ISO speeds when shooting with Canon Log are ISO 100, 125,
160, 200, 250, and 320. [L] is displayed when an ISO speed is set.
Canon Log Image Quality
zz With Canon Log, movies may be affected by horizontal banding,
depending on the subject or shooting conditions. Shoot a few test
movies and check the results in advance. In particular, noise may
become more noticeable if you enhance the contrast when colorgrading your movies.
zz With Canon Log, skies, white walls, and similar subjects may be
affected by noise or uneven gradation, exposure, or colors.
zz Horizontal banding is more likely to occur when you shoot somewhat
dark, flat subjects. This image noise may even occur at relatively low
ISO speeds around ISO 400.
zz If noise is noticeable, try shooting under brighter conditions and
adjusting brightness in color grading. Noise can also be reduced by
shooting at ISO speeds lower than ISO 400, although dynamic range
is narrower.
242
Shooting Movies Set to Canon Log
General Canon Log Shooting Precautions
ooHDR movies are not available when Canon Log is set.
ooSpecifying Canon Log will set [Peripheral illum corr] under [z2: Lens
aberration correction] to [Disable].
ooCanon Log 2 and Canon Log 3 are not supported.
Playing Movies Recorded with Canon Log
View Assist is not used during movie playback.
243
Menu Function Settings
This section describes menus used for shooting movies.
[z1]
zzMovie recording quality
For details on movie recording quality, see page 192.
zzMovie croppingM
For details on movie cropping, see page 219.
zzSound recording
For details on sound recording, see page 202.
zzTime code
For details on time codes, see page 205.
zzMovie digital IS
For details on Movie digital IS, see page 220.
244
Menu Function Settings
[z2]
zzLens aberration correctionM
Peripheral illumination, distortion, and chromatic aberration can
be corrected as you shoot movies. For details on lens aberration
correction, see page 110.
zzTime-lapse movie
For details on shooting time-lapse movies, see page 224.
zzRemote control shooting
When [Enable] is set, you can start or stop movie shooting using
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, p.174). First, pair
the BR-E1 with the camera (p.408).
With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
Set the release mode/movie shooting switch to the <k> position,
then press the release button.
For details on Time-lapse movie shooting, see page 235.
245
Menu Function Settings
[z3]M
zzExposure compensationM
Exposure compensation is available in a range of ±3 stops, in 1/3stop increments. For details on exposure compensation, see page
154.
zzkISO speed settingsM
ISO speed
In [M] mode, you can set the ISO speed manually. You can also
select ISO Auto.
ISO speed range
When recording HD/Full HD movies or Full HD time-lapse
movies, you can set the ISO speed setting range (minimum and
maximum). By default, it is set to ISO 100–25600. You can set the
minimum limit within ISO 100 to H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200),
and the maximum limit within ISO 200 to H2 (equivalent to ISO
102400).
Range for H
When recording 4K or 4K time-lapse movies, you can set the ISO
speed setting range (minimum and maximum). By default, it is set
to ISO 100–12800. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100
to H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), and the maximum limit within
ISO 200 to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).
ISO Auto
You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in HD or Full HD
movie shooting in [k], [t], and [v] modes or in [M] mode
with ISO Auto. By default, it is set to [Max.:25600]. You can set
the maximum limit within [Max.:6400] to [Max.:H2(102400)].
246
Menu Function Settings
HISO Auto
You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in 4K movie shooting
in [k], [t], or [v] mode or in [M] mode with ISO Auto. By
default, it is set to [Max.:12800]. You can set the maximum limit
within [Max.:6400] to [Max.:H2(102400)].
aISO Auto
You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in 4K/Full HD timelapse movie shooting in [k], [t], or [v] mode or in [M]
mode with ISO Auto. By default, it is set to [Max.:12800]. You can
set the maximum limit within [Max.:400] to [Max.:25600].
Expanded ISO speeds (indicated by [H]) are ISO 32000/40000 for HD/Full
HD movies and ISO 16000/20000/25600/32000/40000 for 4K movies.
zzAuto Lighting OptimizerM
Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically. For details
on Auto Lighting Optimizer, see page 104.
zzHighlight tone priorityM
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights as you shoot
movies. For details on Highlight tone priority, see page 109.
[Enhanced] is not available (not displayed) when shooting movies with
[z3: Highlight tone priority] set.
247
Menu Function Settings
zzk Auto slow shutterM
You can choose whether to shoot movies
that are brighter and less noisy than
when set to [Disable] by automatically
slowing the shutter speed under low
light.
Available in [k] and [v] shooting
modes. Applies to movies recorded with
a frame rate of 7 or 8.
Disable
Enables you to shoot movies with smoother, more natural
movement, less affected by subject shake than when set to
[Enable]. Note that under low light, movies may be darker than
when set to [Enable].
Enable
Enables you to shoot brighter, less noisy movies than when set
to [Disable] by automatically reducing the shutter speed to a
maximum of 1/30 sec. (NTSC) or 1/25 sec. (PAL) under low light.
Setting to [Disable] is recommended when shooting moving subjects under
low light, or when afterimages such as trails may occur.
248
Menu Function Settings
zzMetering timerM
For details on the metering timer, see page 119.
zzk Av 1/8-stop incrementsM
You can set aperture values on a finer
scale when shooting movies with an RF
lens.
Select [Enable] to change the aperture
increment from 1/3 stop (or 1/2 stop) to
1/8 stop in [v] or [M] mode.
oo[kAv 1/8-stop incr.] is not available (not displayed) when EF or EF-S
lenses are used.
ooEven when set to [Enable], aperture cannot be set in 1/8-stop
increments with EF or EF-S lenses.
ooWhen set to [Enable], setting options in [81: Exposure level
increments] are disabled and have no effect.
249
Menu Function Settings
[z4]M
zzWhite balanceM
For details on white balance, see page 97.
zzCustom White BalanceM
For details on custom white balance, see page 100.
zzWhite balance correctionM
For details on white balance correction, see page 102.
zzPicture StyleM
For details on Picture Styles, see page 88.
zzCanon Log settingsM
For details on Canon Log, see page 236.
zzHigh ISO speed noise reductionM
For details on High ISO speed noise reduction, see page 105.
250
Menu Function Settings
zzHDMI display
You can specify how movies are
displayed as they are recorded via HDMI
to an external device. Movie output itself
is either 4K (3840×2160) or Full HD
(1920×1080), depending on the [Movie
rec. size] setting.
The default setting for HDMI display is
[A+a].
zzA+a
●●Enables movie display both on the camera screen and on the other
device, via HDMI output.
●●Camera operations such as image playback or menu display are
shown on the other device via HDMI, not on the camera.
zza
●●Deactivates the camera screen during output via HDMI, so that the
screen is blank.
●●Shooting information, AF points, and other information is shown on
the other device via HDMI, but as you watch an external monitor or
other device connected to the recorder, you can stop output of this
information by pressing the <B> button.
●●Before recording movies to an external device, confirm that no
information is being sent by the camera, so that no shooting
information, AF points, and so on is displayed on the external
monitor or other device.
251
Menu Function Settings
For Longer HDMI Output
To continue HDMI output for longer than 30 min., select [A+a], then
set [Auto power off] under [52: Power saving] to [Disable] (p.377).
HDMI output will continue after the screen turns off when the time set
in [Display off] elapses.
ooHDMI output without information prevents display of warnings about
the card space, battery level, or high internal temperature (p.253) via
HDMI.
ooDuring HDMI output, display of the next image may take some time
if you switch between movies of different recording qualities or frame
rates.
ooAvoid operating the camera when recording movies to external devices,
which may cause information to be displayed in the HDMI video output.
ooBrightness and color of movies shot with the camera may look different
from that of HDMI video output recorded by external recording devices,
depending on the viewing environment.
ooYou can change the information displayed by pressing the <B>
button.
ooTime codes can be added to HDMI video output (p.207).
ooAudio is also output via HDMI, except when [Sound rec.] is set to
[Disable].
252
General Movie Shooting Cautions
Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icon
ooIf the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie
shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a red <E> icon will
appear.
ooThe red <E> icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the
camera rest for a while.
ooShooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause
the red <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, always
turn off the camera.
Recording and Image Quality
ooIf the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at
all times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The
Image Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total
movie shooting time depending on the shooting conditions. When the
Image Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when using a tripod, it is
recommended that you set the IS switch to <2>.
ooIf the brightness changes as you shoot a movie with auto exposure or
shutter priority AE, the movie may appear to stop momentarily. In such a
case, shoot movies with manual exposure.
ooIf there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the screen. The movie will be recorded almost exactly
as it appears on the screen.
ooIn low light, noise or irregular colors may appear in the image. Movies
are recorded almost exactly as they appear on the screen, except in
time-lapse movie shooting or with Canon Log View Assist.
ooIf you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may
decline or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support
MP4 format).
253
General Movie Shooting Cautions
Recording and Image Quality
ooIf you use a card with a slow writing speed, an
indicator may appear on the right of the screen
during movie shooting. It indicates how much data
has not yet been written to the card (remaining
capacity of the internal buffer memory). The slower
(1)
the card, the faster the indicator will climb upward.
If the indicator (1) becomes full, movie shooting will
stop automatically.
ooIf the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will
either not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward. First,
shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.
ooIf the indicator indicates that the card is full and movie shooting stops
automatically, the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded
properly.
ooIf the card’s writing speed is slow (due to fragmentation) and the indicator
appears, formatting the card may make the writing speed faster.
Restrictions in IPB Recording
Note that the following restrictions apply when the compression method for
movie recording quality is X or V (audio: AAC).
ooSound will not be recorded for approx. the last two frames.
ooWhen you play back movies on Windows, movie images and sound may
become slightly out of synchronization.
254
3
AF
This chapter describes autofocus operation and introduces
menu settings on the AF ([2]) tab.
zz A M icon to the right of a page title indicates that the
function is available only in [t], [d], [s], [f], [a], or
[BULB] mode.
<AF> stands for autofocus. <MF> stands for manual focus.
255
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos)
zzAF1
p.262
p.265
p.276
p.277
p.278
p.279
zzAF2
p.283
p.284
When RF lenses without a focus mode switch are used, [Foucus mode] is
displayed on the [21] tab.
256
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos)
zzAF3
p.288
p.289
p.290
zzAF4
p.293
p.295
p.296
zzAF5
p.297
p.298
p.299
p.300
Features in [23], [24], and [25] menus are described in the camera’s
Help system (p.405).
257
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos)
In [A] mode, the following screen is displayed.
zzAF1
p.277
p.278
p.279
p.263
p.284
258
Tab Menus: AF (Movies)
zzAF1
p.265
p.276
p.277
p.279
p.286
zzAF2
p.283
p.284
When RF lenses without a focus mode switch are used, [Foucus mode] is
displayed on the [21] tab.
259
Tab Menus: AF (Movies)
zzAF3
p.291
p.292
zzAF4
p.293
zzAF5
p.297
p.298
Features in [23], [24], and [25] menus are described in the camera’s
Help system (p.405).
260
Tab Menus: AF (Movies)
In [y] mode, the following screen is displayed.
zzAF1
p.277
p.279
p.286
p.284
261
Selecting the AF OperationN
You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting
conditions or subject.
1 Select [21: AF operation].
2 Select an item.
If focus cannot be achieved, the AF point will turn orange. If this occurs, the
picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed completely.
Recompose the shot and try to focus again. Or, see “Shooting Conditions
that Make Focusing Difficult” (p.275).
262
Selecting the AF Operation
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects (ONE SHOT)
Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus only once.
zz When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound.
zz The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button
halfway, allowing you to recompose the image before taking the picture.
zz For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous
shooting, see p.144.
If [53: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is
achieved.
Servo AF for Moving Subjects (SERVO)
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold
down the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on
the subject continuously.
zz When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue.
zz The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
zz For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous
shooting, see p.144.
ooDepending on the lens used, the distance to the subject and the
subject’s speed, the camera may not be able to achieve correct focus.
ooZooming during continuous shooting may throw off the focus. Zoom first,
then recompose and shoot.
ooWhen [Servo AF] is set and [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is set
(p.105), [z5: High ISO speed NR] will automatically switch to
[Standard].
ooWith Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
ooIn [A] mode, by default, the camera automatically switches to Servo
AF in response to subject movement. If you normally prefer to shoot with
One-Shot AF, set [21: A Auto servo] to [Disable].
263
Selecting the AF Operation
AF-Assist Beam
Under low light, the AF-assist beam may be lit continuously when you
press the shutter button halfway. This makes it easier to focus with AF.
ooThe AF-assist beam does not fire when [21: AF operation] is set to
[Servo AF].
ooThe AF-assist beam does not fire when Touch AF is used (when [z5:
Touch Shutter] is set to [Disable]).
ooA small series of flashes is fired by external flash units equipped with an
IR AF-assist beam. However, the beam does not fire when you are using
a Speedlite 90EX, Macro Ring Lite, or Macro Twin Lite, or in wireless
flash shooting using radio or optical transmission.
ooA small series of flashes is fired even if you set the external flash’s AFassist beam emission method in the Personal Functions to infrared AFassist beam firing. To disable AF-assist beam firing, set [24: AF-assist
beam firing] to [Disable] (p.295).
ooFocus range with the AF-assist beam is generally no more than
4 meters / 13.1 feet.
ooThe AF-assist beam firing in [t], [d], [s], [f], [a], and [BULB]
modes depends on the setting in [24: AF-assist beam firing] (p.295).
264
Selecting the AF Method
You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject.
The camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in an AF point or
Zone AF frame. In [A] mode, [u+Tracking] is set automatically.
For instructions on selecting an AF method, see page 268.
AF Method
: Face+Tracking
The camera detects and focuses
on human faces. The AF point <p>
appears over a detected face, which is
then tracked.
If no face is detected, the entire AF area is used for auto selection AF.
With Servo AF, you can set the initial position for Servo AF (p.270).
As long as the Area AF frame can track the subject during shooting,
focusing will continue.
: 1-point AF
The camera focuses using a single AF
point <S>.
265
Selecting the AF Method
: Expand AF area (Z)
Focusing uses one AF point <S> and
points above, below, and to the left and
right <w>. Effective for moving subjects,
which are difficult to track with 1-point
AF.
Although Servo AF requires you to focus on a subject initially with an
AF point <S>, focusing is easier with this AF method than with Zone
AF.
: Expand AF area: Around
Focusing uses one AF point <S> and
surrounding points <w>.
Enables focusing over a wider area than
Z AF point expansion. Effective for
moving subjects, which are difficult to
track with 1-point AF.
Servo AF operation is the same as for
Z AF point expansion.
: Zone AF
Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF
frames to cover a larger area than AF
point expansion, which makes focusing
easier than with 1-point AF/AF point
expansion and also effective for moving
subjects.
Generally focuses on the nearest subject. Note the camera attempts to
focus on faces of any people in the Zone AF frame.
AF points in focus are displayed with <S>.
266
Selecting the AF Method
: Large Zone AF: Vertical
Uses auto selection AF in a vertical
Large Zone AF frame to cover a larger
area than Zone AF, which makes
focusing easier than with 1-point AF/AF
point expansion and also effective for
moving subjects.
Generally focuses on the nearest subject. Note the camera attempts to
focus on faces of any people in the Zone AF frame.
AF points in focus are displayed with <S>.
: Large Zone AF: Horizontal
Uses auto selection AF in a horizontal
Large Zone AF frame to cover a larger
area than Zone AF, which makes
focusing easier than with 1-point AF/AF
point expansion and also effective for
moving subjects.
Generally focuses on the nearest subject. Note the camera attempts to
focus on faces of any people in the Zone AF frame.
AF points in focus are displayed with <S>.
267
Selecting the AF Method
Selecting the AF MethodM
You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject.
If you prefer to focus manually, see page 281.
1 Select [21: AF method].
2 Select an item.
ooTo set the AF method, you can also access the AF method screen by
pressing the <S> button and then the <B> button.
ooThe descriptions on pages 269–272 assume that [21: AF
operation] is set to [One-Shot AF] (p.263). With [Servo AF] (p.263)
set, the AF point will turn blue when focus is achieved.
ooRegarding the Touch Shutter (AF and shutter release by touch
operation), see page 130.
268
Selecting the AF Method
zzu(face)+Tracking: c
The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves,
the AF point <p> also moves to track the face.
the AF point.
1 Check
gg<p> (an AF point) appears over any
face detected.
zz To choose a different face, first press
the <S> button, after which <h>
appears when multiple faces are
detected. Use the <Y> <Z> keys to
move <h> over the face you want
to focus on.
zz To switch [Eye Detection AF]
between [Enable] and [Disable],
press the <B> button repeatedly
after pressing the <B> button
(p.277).
zz You can also tap on the screen to
select the face or subject. Tapping the
screen changes the AF point to < >.
on the subject.
2 Focus
zz Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
ggWhen focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
ggAn orange AF point is displayed if the
camera cannot focus.
3 Take the picture.
269
Selecting the AF Method
Specifying a Subject for Focus
On the screen, tap where you want to focus, whether on a subject or at
a certain position.
Once the AF point < > achieves focus, the AF point will also move to
track the subject if you change the composition or if the subject moves.
ooIf the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not
be possible. Adjust the focus manually (p.281) so that the face can be
detected, then perform AF.
ooAn object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
ooFace detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the
picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
ooThe <p> may cover only a part of the face, not the whole face.
ooAF cannot detect subjects or people’s faces at the edges of the screen.
Recompose the shot to center the subject or bring the subject closer to the center.
ooThe size of the AF point changes depending on the subject.
Setting the Initial Servo AF Position
1. Set [25: Initial Servo AF pt for c] to an option other than
[Automatic].
2. An Area AF frame (1) and AF point (2) are displayed.
(1)
(2)
3. Press the <S> button, then turn the <6> or <5> dial to move
the AF point to the position to focus on. You can also move the
AF point by touching the screen or pressing the <V> cross keys.
Pressing the <L> button will return the AF point to the screen center.
4. Press <0> to set the current position as the starting position for
Servo AF.
270
Selecting the AF Method
zz1-point AF / Expand AF area (Z) / Expand AF area: Around
/ Zone AF / Large Zone AF: Vertical / Large Zone AF:
HorizontalM
You can manually set the AF point or Zone AF frame. Here, 1-point
AF screens are used as an example.
1
(1)
Check the AF point.
ggThe AF point (1) will appear.
zz With Expand AF area (Z) or Expand
AF area: Around, adjacent AF points
are also displayed.
zz With Zone AF, Large Zone AF
(Vertical), or Large Zone AF
(Horizontal), the specified Zone AF
frame is displayed.
the AF point.
2 Move
zz Press the <S> button.
zz Move the AF point to where you want
to focus by turning the <6> dial to
move horizontally or <5> dial to
move vertically. (With some lenses, it
may not go to the edge of the screen.)
zz You can also move the AF point by
touching the screen or pressing the
<V> cross keys.
zz To center the AF point or Zone AF
frame, press the <L> button.
zz To magnify display, press the <B>
button. Each press of the <B>
button changes the magnification
ratio.
271
Selecting the AF Method
on the subject.
3 Focus
zz Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
ggWhen focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
ggIf focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
4 Take the picture.
ooThe camera will keep moving the active AF point <S> to track subjects
for Zone AF, Large Zone AF: Vertical, or Large Zone AF: Horizontal when
Servo AF operation is used, but under some shooting conditions (such
as when subjects are small), it may not be possible to track the subject.
ooFocusing with an AF-assist beam may be difficult when using a
peripheral AF point. In this case, select an AF point in the center.
With [25: Orientation linked AF point], you can set separate AF points
for vertical and horizontal shooting (p.299).
272
Selecting the AF Method
Magnified View
You can check the focus by magnifying display by approx. 5x or 10x.
Magnified view is not possible with [u+Tracking].
zz Magnification is centered on the AF point for [1-point AF], [Expand
AF area (Z)], and [Expand AF area: Around] and is centered on
the Zone AF frame for [Zone AF], [Large Zone AF: Vertical], and
[Large Zone AF: Horizontal].
zz Autofocusing is performed with magnified display if you press the
shutter button halfway when set to [1-point AF]. When set to other
AF methods, autofocusing is performed after restoring normal
display.
zz With Servo AF, if you press the shutter button halfway in the
magnified view, the camera will return to the normal view for
focusing.
ooIf focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to the normal view and
perform AF.
ooIf you perform AF in the normal view and then use the magnified view,
accurate focus may not be achieved.
ooAF speed differs between normal view and magnified view.
ooContinuous AF and Movie Servo AF are not available when display is
magnified.
ooWith the magnified view, achieving focus becomes more difficult due to
camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
273
Selecting the AF Method
Notes for AF
AF Operation
zz Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway
will focus again.
zz Image brightness may change during autofocusing.
zz Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take longer
to focus, or the continuous shooting speed may decrease.
zz If the light source changes as you shoot, the screen may flicker, and
focusing may be difficult. In this case, restart the camera and resume
shooting with AF under the light source you will use.
ooIf focusing is not possible with AF, focus manually (p.281).
ooFor subjects at the edge of the screen that are slightly out of focus, try
centering the subject (or AF point, or Zone AF frame) to bring them into
focus, then recompose the shot before shooting.
ooWith certain lenses, it may take more time to achieve focus with
autofocus, or accurate focusing may not be achieved.
274
Selecting the AF Method
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
zz Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color flat
surfaces or when highlight or shadow details are clipped.
zz Subjects in low light.
zz Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the
horizontal direction.
zz Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows,
computer keyboards, etc.).
zz Fine lines and subject outlines.
zz Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps
changing.
zz Night scenes or points of light.
zz The image flickers under fluorescent or LED lighting.
zz Extremely small subjects.
zz Subjects at the edge of the screen.
zz Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Car with a highly
reflective body, etc.).
zz Near and distant subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal
in a cage, etc.).
zz Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and will not stay still
due to camera shake or subject blur.
zz Performing AF when the subject is very far out of focus.
zz Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
zz A special effect filter is used.
zz Noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.
AF Range
The available autofocus range varies depending on the lens and aspect
ratio used and whether you are shooting 4K movies or using features
such as Movie cropping or Movie digital IS.
275
Setting the AF Point SizeN
For pinpoint focusing, you can set [AF frame size] to [Small].
1
Select [21: AF frame size].
2 Select an item.
Only available when [21: AF method] is set to [1-point AF].
276
Focusing on People’s Eyes
With the AF method set to [u+Tracking], you can shoot with the
subject’s eyes in focus.
1
Select [21: Eye Detection AF].
2
Select [Enable].
3
Aim the camera at the subject.
ggAn AF point is displayed around their
eye.
zz You can tap the screen to select an
eye for focus.
Eyes to focus on are selected
automatically.
zz Depending on the [Eye Detection
AF] setting, you can choose an eye
or face for focus with the <Y> <Z>
keys when < > appears after you
press the <S> button.
4 Take the picture.
ooSubject eyes may not be detected correctly, depending on the subject
and shooting conditions.
To disable Eye Detection AF without using menu operations, press these
buttons, one after another: <S>, <B>, and <B>. To resume Eye
Detection AF, press the <B> button again.
277
Setting Continuous AF
This function keeps subjects generally in focus. The camera is ready to
focus immediately when you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Select [21: Continuous AF].
2
Select [Enable].
ooEnabling this function reduces the number of shots available, because
the lens is driven continuously and battery power is consumed.
ooBefore setting the lens focus mode switch to <MF> during Continuous
AF, set the camera’s power switch to <2>.
278
Setting Touch & Drag AF
You can move the AF point or Zone AF frame by touching or dragging
on the screen as you look through the viewfinder.
Enabling Touch & Drag AF
Select [21: Touch & drag AF
1 settings].
[Touch & drag AF].
2 zSelect
z Select [Enable].
Positioning Method
You can set how positions are specified by touching or dragging.
the positioning method.
1 Set
zz Select an item.
zz [Absolute]
The AF point moves to the touched or dragged position on the
screen.
zz [Relative]
The AF point moves in the direction you drag, by an amount
corresponding to the amount you drag, no matter where you touch
the screen.
279
Setting Touch & Drag AF
Active Touch Area
You can specify the area of the screen used for touch and drag
operations.
the active touch area.
1 Set
zz Select an item.
Touching the screen when [u+Tracking] is set displays a round orange
frame < >. After you lift your finger at the position to move the AF point to,
< > is displayed and that subject is tracked. To cancel subject selection,
press the <L> button.
280
MF: Focusing Manually
If focusing is not possible with autofocus, you can magnify the image
and focus manually.
the lens’s focus mode switch to
1 Set
<MF>.
zz Turn the lens focusing ring to focus
roughly.
the image.
2 Magnify
zz Press the <u> button, then the
<B> button.
the magnified area.
3 Move
zz Move the area horizontally by turning
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) AE lock
(2) Magnified area position
(3) Magnification (Approx.)
the <6> dial or vertically by turning
the <5> dial. You can also move
the area by pressing the <V> cross
keys.
zz To center the magnified area again,
press the <L> button.
281
MF: Focusing Manually
magnification.
4 Adjust
zz Each press of the <B> button
changes the magnification ratio, as
follows.
1x → 5x → 10x
manually.
5 Focus
zz While looking at the magnified image,
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.
zz After focusing, press <0> to return
to the normal view.
6 Take the picture.
ooIn magnified view, the exposure is locked.
ooEven with manual focusing, you can use the Touch Shutter to take a
picture.
282
MF: Focusing Manually
Setting MF Peaking (Outline Emphasis)M
Edges of subjects in focus can be displayed in color to make focusing
easier. You can set the outline color and adjust the sensitivity (level) of
edge detection.
1 Select [22: MF peaking settings].
[Peaking].
2 zSelect
z Select [On].
3
Set the level and color.
zz Set it as necessary.
ooPeaking display is not shown during magnified display.
ooMF peaking may be hard to discern at high ISO speeds, especially when
ISO expansion is set. If necessary, lower the ISO speed or set [Peaking]
to [Off].
ooPeaking display shown on the screen is not recorded in images.
ooMF peaking may be hard to discern when Canon Log is set. If necessary,
set [View Assist.] to [On].
283
MF: Focusing Manually
Focus Guide
Setting [Focus guide] to [On] provides a visual guide that shows
which direction to adjust focus and the extent of adjustment needed.
The guide frame is displayed near any eyes that are detected for the
main subject when [21: AF method] is set to [u+Tracking] and
[21: Eye Detection AF] is set to [Enable].
[22: Focus guide].
1 Select
zz In [A] mode, it is shown on the
[21] tab.
[On].
2 zSelect
z To move the guide frame, press the
<S> button, then press the <V>
cross keys.
zz You can also touch the screen to
move the guide frame.
zz To center the guide frame, press the
<L> button.
The guide frame indicates the direction and extent of adjustment as
follows.
Significantly
out of focus
toward infinity
Adjustment
information
not detected
284
Slightly out of
focus toward
infinity
In focus
Slightly out of
focus toward
close range
Significantly out
of focus toward
close range
MF: Focusing Manually
ooUnder difficult shooting conditions for AF (p.275), the guide frame may
not be displayed correctly.
ooNo AF points are displayed while the guide frame is displayed.
ooNo adjustment information is detected for apertures darker than f/8 when
MP-E 65mm f/2.8 1-5x Macro Photo is used or darker than f/11 for other
lenses, as indicated by the Focus Guide appearance.
ooThe guide frame is not displayed in these situations.
• When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <f>
• When display is magnified
• When you are shooting High Frame Rate movies
ooThe guide frame is not displayed correctly after you shift or tilt a TS-E
lens.
The camera’s auto power off counter does not count time spent adjusting
the focus with a lens’s electronic focusing ring.
285
Setting Movie Servo AF
With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject
continuously during movie shooting.
1 Select [21: Movie Servo AF].
2 Select [Enable].
zzWhen [Enable] is set:
●●The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you
are not pressing the shutter button halfway.
●●To keep the focus at a specific position, or if you prefer not to
record mechanical sounds from the lens, you can temporarily stop
Movie Servo AF by touching [Z] in the lower left of the screen.
●●When Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie shooting
after operations such as pressing the <M> or <x> button or
changing the AF method, Movie Servo AF will resume.
zzWhen [Disable] is set:
●●Press the shutter button halfway or press the <p> button to focus.
286
Setting Movie Servo AF
Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]
ooShooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
• A subject moving at a close distance to the camera.
• When shooting with a higher f/number.
• Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page
275.
ooSince the lens is driven continuously and the battery power is consumed,
the possible movie shooting time (p.612) will be shortened.
ooWith certain lenses, the mechanical sound for focusing may be recorded.
In such a case, using Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold
separately) may reduce such sounds in the movie.
ooMovie Servo AF will pause during zooming or magnified view.
ooDuring movie shooting, if a subject approaches or moves away or if
the camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded
movie image may momentarily expand or contract (change in image
magnification).
ooBefore setting the lens focus mode switch to <MF> during Movie Servo
AF, set the camera’s power switch to <2>.
287
Customizing AF FunctionsN
[23]
zzTracking sensitivity
You can set the subject-tracking
sensitivity, which affects responsiveness
to interfering objects that move across
AF points or subjects that stray from AF
points during Servo AF.
0
Standard setting. Suitable for moving subjects in general.
Locked on: -2 / Locked on: -1
The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an
obstacle cuts across the AF points or if the subject strays from
the AF points. The -2 setting makes the camera keep tracking the
target subject longer than the -1 setting.
However, if the camera focuses on a wrong subject, it may take
slightly longer to switch and focus on the target subject.
Responsive: +2 / Responsive: +1
The camera can focus consecutively on subjects at different
distances that are covered by the AF points. Also effective when
you want to always focus on the closest subject. The +2 setting
is more responsive than the +1 setting when focusing on the next
subject.
However, the camera will be more prone to focus on an
unintended subject.
288
Customizing AF Functions
zz Acceleration/deceleration
tracking
Sets the Servo AF tracking sensitivity for
subjects that change speed suddenly, as
by suddenly moving or stopping.
0
Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes
in moving speed).
-2 / -1
Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes
in moving speed). Effective when a setting of 0 makes focus
unstable, due to slight subject movement or an obstruction in
front of the subject.
+2 / +1
Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden
acceleration/deceleration, or sudden stops. Even if the moving
subject’s speed suddenly changes dramatically, the camera
continues to focus on the target subject. For example, the
camera is less likely to focus behind a subject that suddenly
starts approaching you, or in front of an approaching subject that
suddenly stops moving. Setting +2 can track dramatic changes in
the moving subject’s speed better than with +1.
However, since the camera will be sensitive to even slight
movements of the subject, focusing may become unstable for
short periods.
289
Customizing AF Functions
zzAF point auto switching
This sets the switching sensitivity of
the AF points as they track the subject
moving dramatically up, down, left, or
right.
Takes effect when [21: AF method]
is set to [Face+Tracking], [Expand AF
area: Z], [Expand AF area: Around],
[Zone AF], [Large Zone AF: Vertical],
or [Large Zone AF: Horizontal].
0
Standard setting for gradual AF point switching.
+2 / +1
Even if the target subject moves dramatically up, down, left, or
right and moves away from the AF point, the camera switches
its focus to neighboring AF points to continue focusing on the
subject. The camera switches to the AF point deemed most
likely to focus on the subject based on the subject’s continual
movement, contrast, etc. Setting +2 makes the camera more
prone to switch the AF point than with +1.
However, with a wide-angle lens having a wide depth of field or if
the subject is too small in the frame, the camera may focus with
an unintended AF point.
290
Customizing AF Functions
zzMovie Servo AF track sensitivity
You can adjust the tracking sensitivity
(to one of seven levels), which affects
responsiveness if the subject strays from
the AF point during Movie Servo AF, as
when interfering objects move across AF
points or when you pan.
This function is settable when [21:
Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and
[21: AF method] is set to [1-point
AF].
Locked on: -3/-2/-1
With this setting, the camera is less likely to track a different
subject if the main subject strays from the AF point. The closer
the setting is to the minus (-) symbol, the less the camera is
inclined to track a different subject. It is effective when you want
to prevent the AF points from rapidly tracking something that is
not the intended subject during panning or when an obstacle cuts
across the AF points.
Responsive: +1/+2/+3
This makes the camera more responsive when tracking a subject
that covers the AF point. The closer the setting is to the plus (+)
symbol, the more responsive the camera is. It is effective when
you want to keep tracking a moving subject as its distance from
the camera changes or to rapidly focus on another subject.
Operation when [21: AF method] is set to an option other than [1-point
AF] is equivalent to a setting of [0].
291
Customizing AF Functions
zzMovie Servo AF speed
You can set the Movie Servo AF’s AF
speed and its operation conditions.
This function is settable when [21:
Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and
[21: AF method] is set to [1-point
AF].
Additionally, the function is enabled
when using a lens supporting slow focus
transition during movie shooting*.
When active:
You can set [Always on] to have the AF speed take effect at
all times for movie shooting (before and during movie shooting)
or set [During shooting] to have the AF speed take effect only
during movie shooting.
AF speed:
You can adjust the AF speed (focus transition speed) from the
standard speed (0) to slow (one of seven levels) or fast (one of
two levels) to obtain the desired effect for the movie creation.
* Lenses supporting slow focus transition during movie
shooting
USM and STM lenses released in and after 2009 are compatible.
For details, refer to the Canon website.
With certain lenses, even if you adjust the AF speed, the speed may not
change.
ooOperation when [21: AF method] is set to an option other than [1-point
AF] is equivalent to setting [AF speed] to [Standard (0)].
ooAn asterisk to the right of [23: Movie Servo AF Speed] indicates that
the default setting has been modified.
292
Customizing AF Functions
[24]
zzLens electronic MF
With the USM and STM lenses equipped with electronic manual
focusing, you can set whether to use electronic manual focusing
after autofocusing in One-Shot AF mode.
1 Select [24: Lens electronic MF].
2 Select an item.
[
] Disable after One-Shot
Manual focus adjustment after the AF operation is disabled.
[
] One-Shot→enabled
You can manually adjust the focus after the AF operation if you
keep holding down the shutter button halfway.
[
] One-Shot→enabled (magnify)
You can manually adjust the focus after the AF operation if you
keep holding down the shutter button halfway, and you can
magnify the area in focus by turning the lens focusing ring while
the button is pressed halfway.
293
Customizing AF Functions
[
] Disable in AF mode
Manual focus adjustment is disabled when the lens’s focus mode
switch is set to <AF>.
With [One-Shot9enabled (magnify)], display may not be magnified even
if you turn the lens focusing ring while pressing the shutter button halfway
immediately after shooting. If so, you can magnify display by releasing the
shutter button, waiting for <u> display, then pressing the shutter button
halfway as you turn the lens focusing ring.
For details on whether your lens supports electronic manual focus, refer to
the lens instruction manual.
294
Customizing AF Functions
zzAF-assist beam firing
Enables or disables the AF-assist beam of the camera or an external
Speedlite for EOS cameras.
1 Select [24: AF-assist beam firing].
2 Select an item.
[ON] Enable
Enables firing of the AF-assist beam, when needed.
[OFF] Disable
Disables firing of the AF-assist beam. Set if you prefer not to fire
AF-assist beams from the camera and external flash units.
[LED] LED AF assist beam only
An LED AF-assist beam is fired by LED-equipped external flash
units. If your external flash unit is not LED-equipped, the camera’s
AF-assist beam is fired instead.
If an external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set
to [Disable], this function’s setting will be overridden and the AF-assist
beam will not be emitted.
295
Customizing AF Functions
zzOne-Shot AF release priority
You can specify whether to prioritize focus or release timing for OneShot AF (except when shooting with Touch Shutter).
[24: One-Shot AF release
1 Select
prior.].
2 Select an item.
[ ] Focus priority
The picture will not be taken until focus is achieved. Useful when
you want to achieve focus before capturing the image.
[ ] Release priority
Shutter release timing is prioritized over focusing. Useful when
capturing the decisive moment is most important.
Note that pictures are taken whether or not the subject is in
focus.
296
Customizing AF Functions
[25]
zzLens drive when AF impossible
If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, you can have the camera
keep searching for the precise focus or have it stop searching.
[25: Lens drive when AF
1 Select
impossible].
2 Select an item.
[ON] Continue focus search
If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, the lens is driven to
search for the precise focus.
[OFF] Stop focus search
If autofocus starts and the focus is far off or if focus cannot be
achieved, the lens drive will not be performed. This prevents the
lens from becoming grossly out of focus due to the focus search
drive.
When focus search drive is performed using a super telephoto lens or a
lens with a wide focusing drive range, the lens can become grossly out of
focus, and it may take more time to achieve focus next time. Setting [Stop
focus search] is recommended.
297
Customizing AF Functions
zzLimit AF methods
You can limit the AF methods available to those that you will use.
For details on AF methods, see page 265.
1 Select [25: Limit AF methods].
limit the available AF methods,
2 To
add a checkmark [X] to the ones to
display.
The [X] mark cannot be removed from [1-point AF].
An asterisk to the right of [25: Limit AF methods] indicates that the
default setting has been modified.
298
Customizing AF Functions
zzOrientation linked AF point
You can assign AF points or Zone AF frames to different positions
based on whether you are shooting vertically or horizontally.
[25: Orientation linked AF
1 Select
point].
2 Select an item.
[ ] Same for both vert/horiz
AF points or Zone AF frames in the same position are used for
both vertical and horizontal shooting.
[
] Separate AF pts: Pt only
Separate AF point or Zone AF frame positions can be assigned
for each camera orientation (1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with the
camera grip above, 3. Vertical with the camera grip below).
Useful when switching to AF points or Zone AF frames in other
positions automatically based on camera orientation.
AF points or Zone AF frames assigned to each of the three
camera orientations are retained.
Clearing all camera settings (p.419) restores this setting to [Same for
both vert/horiz]. Settings for orientations 1–3 are cleared, and the camera
is set to use the center AF point in 1-point AF.
299
Customizing AF Functions
zzInitial Servo AF pt for c
You can set the initial AF point for Servo AF when the AF method is
set to [Face+Tracking].
[25: Initial Servo AF pt for
1 Select
c].
2 Select an item.
[ ] Initial AF pt set for c
Servo AF starts from the manually set AF point when AF operation
is set to [Servo AF] and the AF method is set to [u+Tracking].
[ ] AF pt set for
If you switch from 1-point AF, Expand AF area ( ), or Expand AF
area: Around to [u+Tracking], Servo AF starts from the manually
set AF point. Useful for starting Servo AF from the specified AF
point before switching to [u+Tracking].
[AUTO] Automatic
The initial AF point of Servo AF for [u+Tracking] is set
automatically to suit the shooting conditions.
300
4
Playback
This chapter covers topics related to playback—playing back
captured still photos and movies—and introduces menu
settings on the Playback ([x]) tab.
Images shot and saved with another device
Normal display or selection on this camera may not be possible for
images captured on other cameras, or images from this camera that
have been edited or renamed on a computer.
301
Tab Menus: Playback
zzPlayback 1
p.318
p.317
p.335
p.353
p.357
p.348
p.339
zzPlayback 2
p.346
p.345
p.321
p.331
p.313
p.311
zzPlayback 3
p.307
p.309
p.309
p.305
p.206
p.305
p.316
[31: RAW image processing] is not shown in [A] or [y] mode.
302
Index to Features: Playback and Related Operations
Playback
Image Transfer
zz Single-image display
B p.304
zz Shooting information
display
zz Image transfer to
a computer/FTP server B p.348
B p.305
zz Print order (DPOF)
B p.353
zz Grid display
B p.305
zz Photobook Set-up
B p.357
zz Touch playback
B p.306
zz Playback information
display
B p.307
zz Index display
B p.310
zz Image browsing
(Jump display)
B p.311
zz Setting image search
conditions
B p.313
zz Magnified view
B p.315
zz Image rotation
B p.317
zz Protect
B p.318
zz Rating
B p.321
zz Movie playback
B p.325
zz Editing a movie’s first
and last scenes
B p.327
zz Frame Grab (4K)
B p.329
zz Slide show
B p.331
zz Viewing images on
a television
B p.333
zz Erasing
B p.335
Image Editing
zz RAW image processing B p.339
zz Resizing JPEGs
B p.345
zz Cropping JPEGs
B p.346
303
x Image Playback
Single-Image Display
back the image.
1 Play
zz Press the <x> button.
an image.
2 Select
zz To play back newer images, press the
<Z> button, and to play back older
images, press the <Y> button.
zz Each time you press the <B>
button, the display will change.
No information
Basic
information
display
Shooting information display
the image playback.
3 Exit
zz Press the <x> button to exit the
image playback.
304
Image Playback
Shooting Information Display
With the shooting information screen displayed, you can press the <W>
<X> keys to change the information displayed. You can also customize
the information displayed, in [x3: Playback information display]
(p.307).
Specifying Initial Image Display When Playback Begins
You can specify which image is
displayed first when you start image
playback.
Playback resumes from the last image played (except when you
have just finished shooting) when [x3: View from last seen] is set
to [Enable]. To resume playback from your most recent shot, set to
[Disable] and restart the camera.
Grid Display
In single-image display, you can display
a grid over the images you view.
You can choose the type of grid in [33:
Playback grid].
This function is convenient for checking
the image’s vertical or horizontal tilt as
well as composition.
The grid is not displayed during movie playback.
305
Image Playback
Touch Playback
The camera features a touch-screen panel that you can touch to
control playback. Supported touch operations are like those used with
smartphones and similar devices. First, press the <x> button to
prepare for touch playback.
Browsing images
Jump display
Index display
Magnified view
You can also magnify display by double-tapping with one finger.
306
Customizing Playback Information Display
You can specify screens and accompanying information displayed
during image playback.
[33: Playback information
1 Select
display].
a checkmark [X] next to the
2 Add
number of screens to display.
zz Press the <W> <X> keys to select a
number.
zz Press <0> to add a checkmark
[X].
zz Repeat these steps to add a
checkmark [X] to the number of each
screen to display, then select [OK].
ggYour selected information can be
accessed by pressing the <B>
button during playback, or by pressing
the <W> <X> keys when shooting
information is displayed.
Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the
exposure level distribution and overall
brightness. The RGB histogram is
for checking the color saturation and
gradation. You can switch the histogram
displayed by pressing the <B> button
when <z> is displayed in the lower
left of the [x3: Playback information
display] screen.
307
Customizing Playback Information Display
zz[Brightness] display
This histogram is a graph showing the
distribution of the image’s brightness level.
The horizontal axis indicates the brightness
level (darker on the left and brighter on the
right) while the vertical axis indicates how
many pixels exist for each brightness level.
The more pixels there are toward the left,
the darker the image. The more pixels there
are toward the right, the brighter the image.
If there are too many pixels on the left, the
shadow detail will be lost. If there are too
many pixels on the right, the highlight detail
will be lost. The gradation in-between will
be reproduced. By checking the image and
its brightness histogram, you can see the
exposure level inclination and the overall
gradation.
zz[RGB] display
Sample Histograms
Dark image
Normal brightness
Bright image
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary
color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue).
The horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on
the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how
many pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels
there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color.
The more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter and denser
the color. If there are too many pixels on the left, the respective
color information will be lacking. If there are too many pixels on the
right, the color will be too saturated with no gradation. By checking
the image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s saturation and
gradation condition, as well as white balance inclination.
308
Customizing Playback Information Display
Highlight Alert
When [33: Highlight alert] is set
to [Enable], overexposed, clipped
highlights will blink. To obtain more
detailed gradation in the blinking areas
where you want the gradation to be
faithfully reproduced, set the exposure
compensation to a negative amount and
shoot again for a better result.
AF Point Display
When [33: AF point disp.] is set to
[Enable], the AF point that achieved
focus will be displayed in red. Note that
multiple AF points may be displayed
when AF points are automatically
selected.
309
H Index Display (Multiple-Image Display)
Search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9, 36, or
100 images on one screen.
the <u> button.
1 Press
zz During image playback, press the <u>
button.
gg[6u] will be displayed on the lower
right of the screen.
to the index display.
2 Switch
zz Turn the <6> dial counterclockwise.
ggThe 4-image index display will appear.
The selected image is highlighted with
an orange frame.
zz Turning the <6> dial further
counterclockwise will switch the
display from 9 images, 36 images,
and to 100 images. If you turn the dial
clockwise, it will rotate through 100,
36, 9, 4, and single-image display.
B
B
B
B
an image.
3 Select
zz Press the <V> cross keys to move
the orange frame and select the
image.
zz Press <0> in the index display
to display the selected image in the
single-image display.
310
e Jump Display (Jumping Through Images)
In the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump
through the images forward or backward according to the jump method
set.
1 Select [x2: Image jump w/6].
the jump method.
2 Select
[d] Display images one by one
[e] Jump by 10 images
[r] Jump images by the specified
number
[g] Display by date
[h] Display by folder
[i] Display movies only
[j] Display stills only
[P] Display protected images only
[k] Display by image rating (p.321)
ooWith [Jump images by the specified number], you can turn the <6>
dial to select the number of images to jump by.
ooWhen you select [Display by image rating], turn the <6> dial to
specify the rating. If you browse images with 9 selected, all the rated
images will be displayed.
311
Jump Display (Jumping Through Images)
by jumping.
3 Browse
zz Press the <x> button.
zz In the single-image display, turn the
<6> dial.
ggYou can browse by the set method.
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Jump method
Playback position
ooTo search images by shooting date, select [g: Date].
ooTo search images by folder, select [h: Folder].
ooIf the card contains both movies and still photos, select [i: Movies] or
[j: Stills] to display one or the other.
312
t Filtering Images for Playback
You can filter image display according to your search conditions. After
setting the image search conditions, you can play back and display
only the found images.
You can also protect, rate, erase, play a slide show, and apply other
operations to filtered images. This feature enables you to quickly do a
specific task to the found images in one batch.
[32: Set image search
1 Select
conditions].
the search conditions.
2 Set
zz Press the <W> <X> keys to select an
item.
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to set an
option.
ggA checkmark [X] (1) is appended to
the left of the item. (Specified as the
search condition.)
zz If you select the item and press
the <B> button, the checkmark
[X] will be removed. (The search
condition is canceled.)
(1)
Item
9Rating
dDate
nFolder
JProtect
fType of file
Description
Displays images with the selected (rating) condition.
Displays images taken on the selected shooting date.
Displays images in the selected folder.
Displays images with the selected (protect) condition.
Displays images in the selected file type.
[ z Stills], [ z (RAW)], [ z (RAW, RAW+JPEG)],
[ z (RAW+JPEG)], [ z (RAW+JPEG, JPEG)], [ z
(JPEG)], and [k Movies]
313
Filtering Images for Playback
the search conditions.
3 Apply
zz Press <0> and read the message
displayed.
zz Select [OK].
ggThe search condition is specified.
the found images.
4 Display
zz Press the <3> button.
(2)
ggOnly the images that match the set
conditions (filtered) will be played
back.
ggWhen the images are filtered for
display, the screen will have an outer
yellow frame (2).
Clearing the Search Conditions
Access the screen in step 2, then press the <L> button to remove all
the checkmarks [X]. Press <0> to clear the search conditions.
If no images match the search conditions, [OK] is not available on the
screen in step 2.
ooSearch conditions may be cleared if you perform power, card, or image
editing operations.
ooAuto power off time may be extended while the [32: Set image search
conditions] screen is displayed.
314
u Magnifying Images
You can magnify your captured images.
the image.
1 Magnify
zz During image playback, press the
(1)
<u> button.
ggThe magnified view will appear.
The magnified area position (1) and
[6u] will be displayed on the lower
right of the screen.
zz To magnify images, turn the <6>
dial clockwise.
zz To reduce magnification, turn the
<6> dial counterclockwise. For
index display (p.310), keep turning
the dial.
the image.
2 Scroll
zz Press the <V> cross keys to scroll
the image vertically and horizontally.
zz To cancel the magnified view, press
the <u> button.
315
Magnifying Images
Setting the Initial Magnification Ratio and Position
If you select [33: Magnificatn (apx)],
you can set the initial magnification ratio
and position for the magnified view.
zz1x (no magnification)
The image is not magnified. The magnified view will start with the
single-image display.
zz2x, 4x, 8x, 10x (magnify from center)
The magnified view starts at the image center at the selected
magnification.
zzActual size (from selected point)
The recorded image’s pixels will be displayed at approx. 100%. The
magnified view starts at the AF point that achieved focus. If the photo is
taken with manual focus, the magnified view starts at the image center.
zzSame as last magnification (from center)
The magnification will be the same as the last time you exited the
magnified view with the <u> button. The magnified view starts at
the image center.
Under some AF method settings, the magnified view extends from the
center of images even if [Actual size (from selected pt)] is set.
316
b Rotating Images
You can use this feature to rotate the displayed image to the desired
orientation.
1 Select [31: Rotate image].
an image.
2 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the image to be rotated.
the image.
3 Rotate
zz Each time you press <0>, the
image will rotate clockwise as follows:
90° → 270° → 0°.
zz To rotate another image, repeat steps
2 and 3.
ooIf you set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.372) before taking vertical
shots, you need not rotate the image with this function.
ooIf the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during
image playback, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].
317
K Protecting Images
You can protect important images from being accidentally erased.
Protecting a Single Image
1 Select [31: Protect images].
2 Select [Select images].
an image.
3 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the image to be protected.
(1)
the image.
4 Protect
zz Press <0> to protect the selected
image. The <K> icon (1) will appear
at the top of the screen.
zz To cancel the image protection, press
<0> again. The <K> icon will
disappear.
zz To protect another image, repeat
steps 3 and 4.
318
Protecting Images
Specifying the Range of Images to be Protected
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the
first and last images for a range to protect all the specified images at
once.
[Select range].
1 Select
zz Select [Select range] in [31:
Protect images].
the range of images.
2 Specify
zz Select the first image (start point),
then press <0>.
zz Next, select the last image (end
point), then press <0>.
ggThe images in the specified range will
be protected and the <J> icon will
appear.
zz To select another image to be
protected, repeat step 2.
319
Protecting Images
Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [31:
Protect images], all the images in the
folder or on the card will be protected.
To cancel the selection, select
[Unprotect all images in folder] or
[Unprotect all images on card].
If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search
conditions] (p.313), the display will change to [All found images]
and [Unprotect all found].
If you select [All found images], all the
images filtered by the search conditions
will be protected.
If you select [Unprotect all found], the
protection of all the filtered images will
be canceled.
If you format the card (p.373), the protected images will also be
erased.
ooOnce an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s
erase function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the
protection.
ooIf you erase all the images (p.338), only the protected images will
remain. This is convenient when you want to erase all unnecessary
images at once.
320
p Setting Ratings
You can rate images on a scale of 1–5 (l/m/n/o/p). This
function is called rating.
Rating a Single Image
1 Select [32: Rating].
2 Select [Select images].
the image to be rated.
3 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the image to be rated.
the image.
4 Rate
zz Press <0>, and a blue highlight
frame will appear as shown in the
screen shown on the left.
zz Press the <W> <X> keys to select a
rating mark, then press <0>.
ggWhen you append a rating mark to
the image, the number beside the set
rating will increase by one.
zz To rate another image, repeat steps 3
and 4.
321
Setting Ratings
Rating by Specifying the Range
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the
first and last images for a range to rate all the specified images at once.
[Select range].
1 Select
zz Select [Select range] in [32:
Rating].
the range.
2 Specify
zz Select the first image (start point),
then press <0>.
zz Next, select the last image (end
point), then press <0>.
zz A checkmark [X] will be appended
to all the images within the range
between first and last images.
3 Press the <M> button.
the image.
4 Rate
zz Turn the <6> dial to select a rating
mark, then select [OK].
ggAll the images in the specified range
will be rated (same rating) at once.
322
Setting Ratings
Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can rate all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
Under [32: Rating], when you select
[All images in folder] or [All images
on card], all the images in the folder or
on the card will be rated.
Turn the <6> dial to select a rating,
then select [OK].
When you are not rating images or
cancelling the rating, select [OFF].
If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search
conditions] (p.313), the display will change to [All found images].
If you select [All found images], all the
images filtered by the search conditions
will be rated as specified.
ooValues next to ratings are displayed as [###] if more than 1,000 images
have that rating.
ooWith [32: Set image search conditions] and [32: Image jump
w/6], you can display only the images given a specific rating.
323
k Enjoying Movies
You can play back and enjoy the captured movies mainly in the
following three ways.
Playback on a Television (p.333)
By connecting the camera to a television
with an HDMI cable, you can play back
the captured still photos and movies
on the television. Using the HDMI
Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is
recommended.
Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a interface
cable, movies and still photos cannot be played back or saved.
Playback on the Camera Screen (p.325)
You can play back movies on the camera
screen. You can also edit out the movie’s
first and last scenes and can play back
the still photos or movies on the card in
an automatic slide show.
Playback and Editing with a Computer
The movie files recorded on the card
can be imported to a computer and
played back or edited with pre-installed
or general-purpose software.
To play back or edit movies with commercially available software, use
software compatible with the file format of your movies. For details on
commercially available software, contact the software manufacturer.
324
k Playing Back Movies
back the image.
1 Play
zz Press the <x> button.
a movie.
2 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the movie to be played back.
zz In the single-image display, the
<s1> icon displayed on the upper
left indicates a movie.
zz In the index display, perforations at
the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. As movies cannot be played
back from the index display, press
<0> to switch to the singleimage display.
the single-image display, press
3 In<0
>.
<0> to play back the movie.
4 Press
ggThe movie will start playing back.
(1)
zz You can pause playback and display the
movie playback panel by pressing <0>.
Press it again to resume the playback.
zz You can adjust the sound volume
even during movie playback by
turning the <6> dial.
(1)
Speaker
325
Playing Back Movies
Movie Playback Panel
Item
7 Play
8 Slow motion
5 First frame
3 Previous frame
6 Next frame
4 Last frame
X Edit
I Frame Grab
mm’ ss”
Volume
Playback Operations
Pressing <0> toggles between playback and stop.
Adjusts the slow motion speed by turning the < 5>
dial. The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper
right of the screen.
Displays the movie’s first frame.
Displays the previous frame each time you press
<0>. Holding <0> down will rewind the movie.
Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press
< 0 >. Holding < 0 > down will fast forward the
movie.
Displays the movie’s last frame.
Displays the editing screen (p.327).
Available when you play 4K or 4K time-lapse movies.
Enables you to extract the current frame and save it as
a JPEG still image (p.329).
Playback position
Playback time (minutes:seconds)
Turn the <6> dial to adjust the volume of the speaker
(p.325).
ooThe camera may not be able to play back movies shot with another
camera.
ooIf you connect the camera to a television to play back a movie (p.333),
adjust the sound volume with the television. (Turning the <6> dial will
not change the sound volume.)
ooMovie playback may stop if the card’s read speed is too slow or movie
files have corrupted frames.
326
XEditing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.
increments.
movie playback.
1 Pause
ggThe movie playback panel will appear.
the movie playback panel,
2 On
select [X].
the part to be edited out.
3 Specify
zz Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or
[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to see the
previous or next frames. Keep holding
down the key to fast forward or fast
rewind the frames. Turn the <5>
dial for frame-by-frame playback.
zz After deciding which part to edit out, press
<0>. The portion indicated by a line at
the bottom of the screen will remain.
the edited movie.
4 Check
zz Select [7] and press <0> to play
back the edited movie.
zz To change the edited part, go back to
step 3.
zz To cancel the editing, press the
<M> button.
327
Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
the edited movie.
5 Save
zz Select [W], then press <0>.
zz The save screen will appear.
zz To save it as a new movie, select [New
file]. To save it and overwrite the
original movie file, select [Overwrite],
then press <0>.
zz On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK] to save the edited movie and
return to the movie playback screen.
ooBecause editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (at the
position indicated by [ ] at the bottom of the screen), the actual position
where movies are trimmed may differ from your specified position.
ooMovies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.
ooYou cannot edit a movie when the camera is connected to a computer.
328
I Grabbing a Frame from 4K Movies or
4K Time-Lapse Movies
From 4K movies or 4K time-lapse movies, you can select individual
frames to save as approx. 8.3-megapixel (3840×2160) JPEG still
images. This function is called “Frame Grab (4K frame capture)”.
back the image.
1 Play
zz Press the <3> button.
a 4K movie.
2 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select a
4K movie or 4K time-lapse movie.
zz On the shooting information screen,
4K movies and 4K time-lapse movies
are indicated by an [H] icon.
zz In index display, press <0> to
switch to single-image display.
the single-image display, press
3 In<0
>.
and pause the movie.
4 Play
ggThe movie playback panel will appear.
a frame to grab.
5 Select
zz Use the movie playback panel to
select the frame to grab as a still
photo.
zz For movie playback panel instructions,
see page 326.
[I].
6 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
[I], then press <0>.
329
Grabbing a Frame from 4K Movies or 4K Time-Lapse Movies
the frame.
7 Save
zz Select [OK] to save the current frame
as a JPEG still image.
the image to display.
8 Select
zz Check the destination folder and
image file number.
zz Select [View original movie] or [View
extracted still image].
ggThe selected image will be displayed.
Frame grabbing is not possible with Full HD movies, Full HD time-lapse
movies, or with 4K movies or 4K time-lapse movies shot with a different
camera.
330
Slide Show (Auto Playback)
You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.
the images to be played
1 Specify
back.
zz To play back all the images on the
card, go to step 2.
zz If you want to specify the images to
be played back in the slide show, filter
the images with [32: Set image
search conditions] (p.313).
2 Select [32: Slide show].
the playback as desired.
3 Set
zz Select [Set up], then press <0>.
zz Set the [Display time], [Repeat]
(repeated playback), and [Transition
effect] (effect when changing images)
for the still photos.
zz After completing the settings, press
the <M> button.
Display time
Repeat
Transition effect
331
Slide Show (Auto Playback)
the slide show.
4 Start
zz Select [Start], then press <0>.
ggAfter [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.
the slide show.
5 Exit
zz To exit the slide show and return to
the setting screen, press the <M>
button.
ooTo pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be
displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume
the slide show.
ooDuring the automatic playback of still photos, you can press the <B>
button to switch the display format (p.304).
ooDuring movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the
<6> dial.
ooDuring auto playback or pause, you can press the <Y> <Z> keys to
view another image.
ooDuring auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.
ooThe display time may differ depending on the image.
332
Viewing Images on a Television
By connecting the camera to a television with an HDMI cable, you can
play back the captured still photos and movies on the television. Using
the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended.
If the image does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [53: Video
system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the
video system of your television).
the HDMI cable to the
1 Connect
camera.
zz With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo
facing the front of the camera, insert it
into the <D> terminal.
the HDMI cable to the
2 Connect
television.
zz Connect the HDMI cable to the
television’s HDMI IN port.
on the television and switch
3 Turn
the television’s video input to select
the connected port.
the camera’s power switch to
4 Set
<1>.
the <x> button.
5 Press
ggThe image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.)
zz The images will automatically be
displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected television.
333
Viewing Images on a Television
ooAdjust movie sound volume with the television. The sound volume
cannot be adjusted with the camera.
ooBefore connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
television, turn off the camera and television.
ooDepending on the television, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
ooDo not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
ooCertain televisions may not display the images due to incompatibility.
ooIt may take some time before images are displayed. To avoid delay, set
[53: HDMI resolution] to [1080p] (p.395).
ooTouch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
connected to a television.
334
L Erasing Images
You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or
erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.318) will not be erased.
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no
longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images
from being erased accidentally, protect them.
Erasing a Single Image
the image to be erased.
1 Select
zz Press the <x> button.
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the image to be erased.
2 Press the <L> button.
3 Erase the image.
JPEG or RAW Images or Movies
zz Select [Erase], then press <0>.
RAW+JPEG Images
zz Select an item, then press <0>.
335
Erasing Images
Checkmarking [X] Images to Be Erased in a Batch
By adding checkmarks to the images to be erased, you can erase all
those images at once.
1 Select [31: Erase images].
2 Select [Select and erase images].
an image.
3 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the image to be erased, then press
<0>.
ggA checkmark [X] will be displayed on
the upper left of the screen.
zz To select another image to be erased,
repeat step 3.
the images.
4 Erase
zz Press the <M> button, then press
[OK].
ggThe selected images will be erased at
once.
336
Erasing Images
Specifying the Range of Images to Be Erased
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the
first and last images for a range to erase all the specified images at
once.
[Select range].
1 Select
zz Select [Select range] in [31: Erase
images].
the range of images.
2 Specify
zz Select the first image (start point),
then press <0>.
zz Next, select the last image (end
point), then press <0>.
ggA checkmark [X] will be appended
to all the images within the range
between first and last images.
3 Press the <M> button.
the images.
4 Erase
zz Select [OK].
ggThe images in the specified range will
be erased.
337
Erasing Images
Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When [31: Erase images] is set to [All
images in folder] or [All images on
card], all the images in the folder or on
the card will be erased.
If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search
conditions] (p.313), the display will change to [All found images].
If you select [All found images], all the
images filtered by the search conditions
will be erased.
To erase all the images including protected images, format the card (p.373).
338
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
You can process 1 or F images with the camera and save them
as JPEG images. As the RAW image itself does not change, you can
apply different processing conditions to create any number of JPEG
images from it.
You can also use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process
RAW images.
[31: RAW image
1 Select
processing].
an item, then select images.
2 Select
zz You can select multiple images to
process at once.
[Select images]
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
images to process, then press
<0>.
ggA checkmark [X] will be displayed on
the upper left of the screen.
zz Press the <M> button.
[Select range]
zz Select the first image (start point),
then press <0>.
zz Next, select the last image (end
point), then press <0>.
ggA checkmark [X] will be appended
to all the images within the range
between first and last images.
zz Press the <M> button.
339
Processing RAW Images with the Camera
the desired processing
3 Set
conditions.
[Use shot settings]
zz Images are processed using image
settings at the time of capture.
[Customize RAW processing]
zz Press the <W> <X> <Y> <Z> keys
to select an item.
zz Turn the <6> or <5> dial to
switch the setting.
zz Press <0> to access the function
setting screen.
zz To return to the image settings at
the time of shooting, press the <L>
button.
Comparison Screen
zz You can switch between the [After
change] and [Shot settings] screens
by pressing the <B> button and
turning the <5> dial.
zz Items in orange on the [After change]
screen have been modified since the
time of capture.
zz Press the <M> button.
the image.
4 Save
zz When using [Customize RAW
processing], select [W] (Save).
zz Read the message and select [OK].
zz To process other images, select [Yes]
and repeat steps 2–4.
340
Processing RAW Images with the Camera
the image to display.
5 Select
zz Select [Original image] or
[Processed img.].
ggThe selected image will be displayed.
Magnified View
You can magnify images displayed for [Customize RAW processing]
by pressing the <u> button. Magnification varies depending on the
[Image quality] setting. Using <V> cross keys, you can scroll the
magnified image vertically and horizontally.
To cancel the magnified view, press the <u> button again.
Images with Aspect Ratio Setting
The area of the image inside the aspect-ratio lines is processed for
images captured with [z1: zCropping/aspect ratio] (p.80) set
to [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)].
JPEG images generated from RAW images are saved with your
specified aspect ratio.
Dual Pixel RAW Images
Although you can also use the camera to process RAW images shot
with [z1: Dual Pixel RAW] set to [Enable] (p.78), the camera
cannot take advantage of the Dual Pixel data in processing.
When you process multiple-exposure 1 or F images, certain settings
cannot be changed.
341
Processing RAW Images with the Camera
RAW Image Processing Options
zz[
] Brightness adjustment
zz[
] White balance (p.97)
zz[
] Picture Style (p.88)
You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop
increments.
You can select the white balance. If you select [Q], you can select
[Auto: Ambience priority] or [Auto: White priority]. If you select
[P], you can set the color temperature.
You can select the Picture Style. You can adjust the sharpness,
contrast, and other parameters.
zz[
] Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.104)
zz[
] High ISO speed noise reduction (p.105)
You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer.
You can set the noise reduction processing for high ISO speeds. If
the effect is difficult to discern, magnify the image (p.341).
zz[73] Image quality (p.75)
You can set the image quality when creating a JPEG image. Note
that only 73/83/b are available for RAW images captured in
cropped shooting or with EF-S lenses.
342
Processing RAW Images with the Camera
zz[
] Color space (p.117)
zz[
] Lens aberration correction
You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera screen
is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the difference in the image will
hardly be perceptible when either color space is set.
[
] Peripheral illumination correction (p.111)
A phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due
to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set,
the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to
discern, magnify the image (p.341) and check the four corners.
The peripheral illumination correction applied with the camera
will be less pronounced than that applied with the Digital Photo
Professional (EOS software) at maximum correction amount.
If the effects of correction are not apparent, use Digital Photo
Professional to apply the peripheral illumination correction.
[
] Distortion correction (p.111)
Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected. If
[Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. The image
periphery will be trimmed in the corrected image.
Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, adjust the
sharpness with the Picture Style’s [Sharpness] parameter setting
as necessary.
[ ] Digital Lens Optimizer (p.112)
Correct lens aberration, diffraction, and low-pass filter-induced
loss of sharpness by applying optical design values. Magnify
images (p.341) to check the effects of setting this option to
[Enable]. Without magnification, the effect of Digital Lens
Optimizer is not displayed. Selecting [Enable] corrects both
chromatic aberration and diffraction, although these options are
not displayed.
343
Processing RAW Images with the Camera
[
] Chromatic aberration correction (p.113)
Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject’s outline)
due to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is
set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult
to discern, magnify the image (p.341).
[
] Diffraction correction (p.113)
The diffraction by the lens aperture degrading the image
sharpness can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected
image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify
the image (p.341).
ooProcessing RAW images in the camera will not produce exactly the
same results as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software).
ooIf you perform [Brightness adjustment], noise, banding, etc. may be
intensified with the effects of adjustment.
ooWhen [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set, noise may be intensified together
with the effects of correction. Image edges may also be emphasized.
Adjust Picture Style sharpness or set [Digital Lens Optimizer] to
[Disable], as needed.
ooThe lens correction data for lens aberration corrections is registered
(stored) in the camera.
ooThe effect of the lens aberration correction varies depending on the lens
used and shooting conditions. Also, the effect may be difficult to discern
depending on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc.
ooFor details on the correction data used with Digital Lens Optimizer, see
page 112.
344
S Resizing JPEG Images
You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save
it as a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3, 4,
and a images. JPEG b and RAW images cannot be resized.
1 Select [32: Resize].
an image.
2 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the image you want to resize.
the desired image size.
3 Select
zz Press <0> to display the image
(1)
sizes.
zz Select the desired image size (1),
then press <0>.
zz Only resizing to b is available for
JPEG images captured in cropped
shooting or with EF-S lenses.
the image.
4 Save
zz Select [OK] to save the resized
image.
zz Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
zz To resize another image, repeat steps
2 to 4.
For details on image sizes of resized images, see page 616.
345
N Cropping JPEG Images
You can crop a captured JPEG image and save it as another image.
Cropping an image is possible only with JPEG images. Images shot in
RAW cannot be cropped.
1 Select [x2: Cropping].
an image.
2 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the image you want to crop.
the cropping frame.
3 Set
zz Press <0> to display the cropping
frame.
zz The image area within the cropping
frame will be cropped.
zzChanging the Cropping Frame Size
Turn the <6> dial to change the cropping frame size. The smaller
the cropping frame, the more magnified the cropped image will look.
zzChanging the Aspect Ratio and Orientation
Turn the <5> dial to select <e>. Press <0> to change the
cropping frame’s aspect ratio. You can select the aspect ratio as
follows: [3:2], [16:9], [4:3], [1:1], [2:3], [9:16], or [3:4].
346
Cropping JPEG Images
zzMoving the Cropping Frame
Press the <V> cross keys to move the frame vertically or
horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired
image area.
zzCorrecting the Tilt
You can correct image tilt by ±10°. Turn the <5> dial to select
<c>, then press <0>. While checking the tilt against the grid,
turn the <5> dial (in 0.1° increments) or tap the left or right wedge
(in 0.5° increments) on the upper left of the screen to correct the tilt.
After completing the tilt correction, press <0>.
the image area to be
4 Check
cropped.
zz Turn the <5> dial to select <b>.
ggThe image area to be cropped will be
displayed.
the image.
5 Save
zz Turn the <5> dial to select <W>.
zz Select [OK] to save the cropped
image.
zz Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
zz To crop another image, repeat steps 2
to 5.
ooThe position and size of the cropping frame may change depending on
the angle set for tilt correction.
ooOnce a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again or resized.
ooAF point display information (p.309) and Dust Delete Data (p.121) will
not be appended to the cropped images.
347
d Transferring Images to a Computer/FTP Server
You can connect the camera to a computer and use the camera to
transfer images from the card to the computer. You can also connect
the camera to a wireless file transmitter (sold separately) and transfer
images to an FTP server. This function is called direct image transfer.
Direct image transfer is performed from the camera, as you look
at the camera screen.
This section describes how to transfer images by connecting the
camera to a computer with an interface cable. For details on image
transfer to FTP servers, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless
file transmitter.
Images transferred to a computer are saved in folders by shooting
date, within the [Pictures] or [My Pictures] folder.
Before connecting the camera to the computer, install EOS Utility (EOS
software) on the computer (p.572).
Preparing for Image Transfer
the camera’s power switch to
1 Set
<2>.
the camera to the
2 Connect
computer.
zz Use the interface cable included with
the camera.
zz When connecting the cable to the
camera, use the cable protector
(p.37) and insert the plug in the
digital terminal.
zz Insert the other end of the cable
into the computer’s USB terminal
(Type-C).
As an interface cable, use either the included cable or a genuine Canon
cable.
348
Transferring Images to a Computer/FTP Server
the power switch to <1>.
3 Set
zz When a message to select a program
is displayed on the computer, select
[EOS Utility].
ggThe EOS Utility screen is displayed
on the computer.
After the EOS Utility screen appears, do not operate EOS Utility.
[Direct transfer] in step 6 on page 351 is not displayed unless the main
EOS Utility screen is displayed, which will prevent image transfer to the
computer.
ooIf the EOS Utility screen does not appear, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual.
ooTurn off the camera before disconnecting the cable, and hold the cable
by the plug when disconnecting it.
Transferring RAW+JPEG Images
For RAW+JPEG images, you can specify
which image to transfer.
In step 2 on the next page, select
[RAW+JPEG transfer], then specify the
type of image to transfer.
349
Transferring Images to a Computer/FTP Server
Selecting Images to Transfer
zzSelecting Images
1 Select [x1: Image transfer].
2 Select [Image sel./transfer].
a transfer method.
3 Select
zz Select [Direct transfer] for image
transfer to a computer.
4 Select [Sel.Image].
the images to transfer.
5 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
images to transfer, then press <0>.
zz Press the <W> <X> keys to add a [X]
in the upper left of the screen, then
press <0>.
zz To select other images to transfer,
repeat step 5.
zz After you finish choosing images,
press <M>.
350
Transferring Images to a Computer/FTP Server
the image.
6 Transfer
zz Confirm that the main EOS Utility
screen is displayed on the computer.
zz Select [Direct transfer], then press
<0>.
zz Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog to transfer the images to the
computer.
zz You can also transfer images selected
with [Multiple] this way.
ooWhen [Sel.Image] is selected, you can check image transfer status in
the upper left of the screen: No mark: Not selected. X: Selected for
transfer. l: Transfer failed. k: Transfer successful.
ooYou can also follow the instructions for [RAW+JPEG transfer] (p.349)
and steps 1–5 on the previous page when the camera is not connected
to a computer.
zzSelecting Multiple Images
zz Select Range
Under [Multiple], select [Select
range]. Selecting the first and last
images of the range marks all the
images in the range with a checkmark
[X], and one copy of each image will
be sent.
351
Transferring Images to a Computer/FTP Server
In a Folder
Selecting [Folder images not transfer’d] selects all unsent
images in the folder.
Selecting [Folder images failed transf.] selects all images in the
folder for which transfer failed.
Selecting [Clear folder transf. history] clears the transfer history
of images in the folder. After clearing the transfer history, you can
select [Folder images not transfer’d] and transfer all images in
the folder again.
On a Card
For a description of [Card images not transferred], [Card
images failed transfer], and [Clear card’s transf. history], see
“o In a Folder”.
oo[Direct transfer] is not displayed unless the main EOS Utility screen is
displayed on the computer.
ooSome menu items are not available during image transfer.
ooYou can also transfer movies.
ooShooting is also possible during image transfer.
ooFor details on [Transfer with caption] under [x1: Image transfer],
refer to the instruction manual of Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E7 (Ver.
2) (sold separately).
352
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images
recorded on the card according to your printing instructions such as the
image selection, quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in
one batch or create a print order for a photofinisher.
You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, file
number imprinting, etc. The print settings will be applied to all the
images specified for printing. (They cannot be set individually for each
image.)
Setting the Printing Options
1 Select [31: Print order].
2 Select [Set up].
the options as desired.
3 Set
zz Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File
No.].
Print type
K Standard
Prints one image on one sheet.
L Index
Multiple thumbnail images are printed on
one sheet.
K
L
Date
File number
Both
On
Off
On
Off
Prints both the standard and index prints.
[On] imprints the recorded date of the captured
image.
[On] imprints the file number.
353
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
the setting.
4 Exit
zz Press the <M> button.
zz Next, select [Sel.Image] or [Multiple]
to specify the images to be printed.
ooRAW images or movies cannot be specified for printing.
ooIf you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both]
setting (p.353), the index print may not be printed with certain printers.
In such a case, resize the image (p.345), then print the index print.
ooEven if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may
not be imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer.
ooWith [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On]
at the same time.
ooWhen printing with DPOF, use the card for which print order
specifications are set. You cannot print in the specified print order if you
extract just the images from the card for printing.
ooCertain DPOF-compliant printers and photofinishers may not be able
to print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction
manual before printing, or check with your photofinisher about
compatibility when ordering prints.
ooDo not use this camera to configure print settings for images with
DPOF settings set up on another camera. All the print orders may be
overwritten inadvertently. Also, the print order may not be possible,
depending on the image type.
You can send images from the camera via Wi-Fi to a PictBridge-compatible
(Wireless LAN) printer and print the images (direct printing) (p.469).
354
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Specifying Images for Printing
zzSelecting Images
Select and specify the images one by
one.
Press the <M> button to save the
print order to the card.
(1)
(2)
Standard / Both
Press <0> to print a copy of the
displayed image. By pressing the <W>
<X> keys, you can set the number of
copies to be printed up to 99.
(1)
(2)
(3) (4)
Quantity
Total images selected
Index
Press <0> to add a checkmark
to the box [X]. The image will be
included in the index print.
(3)
(4)
Checkmark
Index icon
zzSelecting Multiple Images
Select Range
Under [Multiple], select [Select
range]. Selecting the first and last
images of the range marks all the
images in the range with a checkmark
[X], and one copy of each image will
be printed.
355
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
All Images in a Folder
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for
one copy of all the images in the folder will be specified.
If you select [Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print
order for all the images in the folder will be canceled.
All Images on a Card
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the
card will be specified for printing.
If you select [Clear all on card], the print order will be cleared for
all the images on the card.
If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search
conditions] (p.313) and you select [Multiple], the display will change
to [Mark all found images] and [Clear all found images].
All Found Images
If you select [Mark all found images], one copy of all the images
filtered by the search conditions will be specified for printing.
If you select [Clear all found images], all the print order of the
filtered images will be cleared.
ooRAW images or movies cannot be specified for printing. Note that RAW
images or movies will not be specified for printing even if you specify all
images with [Multiple].
ooWhen using a PictBridge-compatible printer, do not specify more than
400 images for one print order. If you specify more than this, the images
may not all be printed.
356
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When
you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to import images to a computer,
the specified images for a photobook will be copied to a dedicated
folder. This function is useful for ordering photobooks online.
Specifying One Image at a Time
1 Select [31: Photobook Set-up].
2 Select [Select images].
the image to be specified.
3 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the image to be specified, then press
<0>.
zz To select other images to be specified
for a photobook, repeat step 3.
357
Specifying Images for a Photobook
Specifying the Image Range for a Photobook
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify
the range (start point to end point) of images to be specified for a
photobook at once.
[Multiple].
1 Select
zz Under [31: Photobook Set-up],
select [Multiple].
2 Select [Select range].
the range of images.
3 Specify
zz Select the first image (start point),
then press <0>.
zz Next, select the last image (end
point), then press <0>.
ggA checkmark [X] will be appended
to all the images within the range
between first and last images.
358
Specifying Images for a Photobook
Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once for a
photobook.
Under [x1: Photobook Set-up],
you can set [Multiple] to [All images
in folder] or [All images on card] to
specify all the images in the folder or on
the card for a photobook.
To cancel the selection, select [Clear all
in folder] or [Clear all on card].
If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search
conditions] (p.313) and you select [Multiple], the display will change
to [All found images] and [Clear all found images].
If you select [All found images], all the
images filtered by the search conditions
will be specified for the photobook.
If you select [Clear all found images],
all the photobook order of the filtered
images will be cleared.
ooRAW images or movies cannot be specified for the photobook. Note that
RAW images or movies will not be specified for the photobook even if
you specify all images with [Multiple].
ooDo not use this camera to configure photobook settings for images with
photobook settings set up on another camera. All the photobook settings
may be overwritten inadvertently.
359
360
5
Set-up
This chapter describes menu settings on the set-up ([5]) tab.
zz A M icon to the right of a page title indicates that the
function is available only in [t], [d], [s], [f], [a], or
[BULB] mode.
361
Tab Menus: Set-up
zzSet-up 1
p.365
p.367
p.370
p.372
p.373
zzSet-up 2
p.376
p.377
p.378
p.379
p.380
p.383
zzSet-up 3
p.384
p.385
p.386
p.387
p.391
p.395
p.396
362
Tab Menus: Set-up
zzSet-up 4
p.397
p.402
p.402
p.403
p.406
zzSet-up 5
p.407
p.411
zzSet-up 6
p.416
p.417
p.419
p.420
p.422
p.422
p.422 (not shown in
movie mode)
363
Tab Menus: Set-up
When you are shooting movies, the following screen is
displayed for [54].
p.397
p.402
p.403
p.404
p.406
In [A] and [y] modes, the following screen is displayed for
[56].
p.416
p.422
364
Creating and Selecting a Folder
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images
are to be saved.
Creating a Folder
1 Select [51: Select folder].
2 Select [Create folder].
3 Select [OK].
365
Creating and Selecting a Folder
Selecting a Folder
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
zz Select a folder on the folder selection
screen.
zz Captured images are stored in your
selected folder.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Number of images in folder
Lowest file number
Folder name
Highest file number
Folders
A folder can contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001–9999). When a
folder becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one
is created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.369) is executed, a new
folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can
be created.
Creating Folders with a Computer
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. The folder name must follow the format “100ABC_D”.
The first three digits are always the folder number from 100 to 999. The last
five characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case letters
from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be used.
Also note that two folder names cannot share the same three-digit folder
number (for example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”) even if the remaining
five characters in each name are different.
366
File Numbering Methods
The captured images saved in a folder are
assigned a file number from 0001 to 9999. (Example) BE3B0001.JPG
You can change how the image files are
File number
numbered.
1 Select [51: File numbering].
the item.
2 Set
zz Select [Numbering].
zz Select [Continuous] or [Auto reset].
zz If you want to reset the file numbering,
select [Manual reset] (p.369).
zz Select [OK] to create a new folder,
and the file number will start with
0001.
If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible
even if the card still has storage capacity. The screen will display a
message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.
367
File Numbering Methods
Continuous
When you wish to continue the file numbering sequence even
after the card is replaced or a new folder is created.
Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file
numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is useful when you
want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on
multiple cards or in multiple folders into one folder on a computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may
continue from the file numbering of the existing images on the card
or in the folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is
recommended that you use a newly-formatted card each time.
File numbering after replacing the card
Card 1
File numbering after creating a folder
Card 2
Card 1
100
0051
0052
(1)
(1)
368
Next sequential file number
101
0051
0052
File Numbering Methods
Auto Reset
When you wish to restart the file numbering from 0001 each time
the card is replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering
restarts from 0001 for the new images saved. This is useful if you want
to organize images by cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may
continue from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or
in the folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting
from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.
File numbering after replacing the card
Card 1
File numbering after creating a folder
Card 2
Card 1
100
0051
0001
101
0051
0001
(1)
(1)
File numbering is reset
Manual Reset
When you wish to reset the file numbering to 0001 or to start from
file number 0001 in a new folder.
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created
automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder
starts from 0001.
This is useful, for example, if you want to use different folders for the
images taken yesterday and the ones taken today.
369
Renaming Files
File names consist of four alphanumeric
characters followed by a four-digit image (Example) BE3B0001.JPG
number (p.367) and the file extension.
You can change the first four characters.
Registering/Changing File Names
1 Select [51: File name].
[Change User setting*].
2 Select
zz [User setting1]
You can register four characters of
your choice.
zz [User setting2]
You can register three characters of
your choice. The fourth character,
for the image quality (p.371), is
assigned automatically.
the letters and numbers of
3 Enter
your preferred file name.
zz Use [ ] or the <L> button to delete
any unneeded characters.
370
Renaming Files
zz Use the <V> cross keys or <5>
dial to select a character, then press
<0> to enter it.
], you can change
zz By selecting [
the input mode.
the setting.
4 Exit
zz Press the <M> button, then press
5
[OK].
Select a registered file name.
zz Select [File name].
zz Select a registered file name.
An underscore cannot be used as the first character.
ooWhen you select “*** + image size” as registered to User setting2 and
take pictures, a character representing the current image quality is
automatically added as fourth character in the file name.
“***M” = 74/84
“***L” = 73/83/1
“***T” = b
“***S” = 7a/8a
“***C” = F
This fourth character enables you to determine the image size (quality)
if you import the images to a computer or other device. Using the file
extension, you can also distinguish RAW and JPEG images.
ooThe extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG images, “.CR3” for RAW images,
and “.MP4” for movies.
371
Setting the Auto Rotation of Vertical Images
You can change the auto rotation setting that
straightens images shot in vertical orientation when
they are displayed.
1 Select [51: Auto rotate].
2 Select an item.
zzOnzD
Automatically rotates images for display on both the camera and
computers.
zzOnD
Automatically rotates images only for display on computers.
zzOff
Images captured with auto rotation set to [Off] will not rotate during
playback even if you later set auto rotation to [On].
ooIf a picture is taken while the camera is pointing up or down, automatic
rotation to the proper orientation for viewing may not be performed
correctly.
ooIf images are not rotated automatically on a computer, try using EOS
software.
372
Formatting the Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another
camera or computer, format the card with this camera.
When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be
erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is
nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data
to a computer, etc. before formatting the card.
1 Select [51: Format card].
the card.
2 Format
zz Select [OK].
zz For low-level formatting, press the
<L> button to add a checkmark <X>
to [Low level format], then select
[OK].
ooThe card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller
than the capacity indicated on the card.
ooThis device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
373
Formatting the Card
Format the card in the following cases:
zz The card is new.
zz The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
zz The card is full of images or data.
zz A card-related error is displayed (p.607).
Low-Level Formatting
zz Perform low-level formatting if the card’s writing or reading speed
seems slow or if you want to totally erase the data on the card.
zz Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors on the
card, the formatting will take longer than normal formatting.
zz During low-level formatting, you can cancel formatting by selecting
[Cancel]. Even in this case, normal formatting will already be
complete and you can use the card as usual.
Card’s File Formats
zz SD/SDHC cards will be formatted in FAT32. SDXC cards will be
formatted in exFAT.
zz When shooting a movie with a card formatted in exFAT, the movie
will be recorded in a single file (instead of being split into multiple
files) even if it exceeds 4 GB. (The movie file will exceed 4 GB.)
374
Formatting the Card
ooIt may not be possible to use SDXC cards formatted with this camera
in other cameras. Also note that exFAT-formatted cards may not be
recognized by some computer operating systems or card readers.
ooFormatting or erasing data on a card does not completely erase the data.
Be aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When disposing
of cards, take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
375
Setting Eco Mode
Enables you to conserve battery power in shooting mode. When
the camera is not in use, the screen darkens to reduce battery
consumption.
1 Select [52: Eco mode].
[On].
2 Select
zz The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds. Approx. ten seconds after
darkening, the screen turns off.
zz To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off, press
the shutter button halfway.
376
Setting Power-Saving Features
You can adjust the timing of when the screen, camera, and viewfinder
turn off automatically (Display off, Auto power off, and Viewfinder off).
1 Select [52: Power saving].
an item.
2 Select
zz Even when [Auto power off] is set to
[Disable], the screen will turn off after
the time set in [Display off].
[Display off] and [Auto power off] settings do not apply when Eco mode
is set to [On].
377
Adjusting the Screen Brightness
Screen and viewfinder brightness can be adjusted separately.
1 Select [52: Disp. brightness].
the adjustment.
2 Make
zz Referring to the gray chart, press
the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust the
brightness, then press <0>.
zz When adjusting viewfinder brightness,
look through the viewfinder as you set
it.
To check the image’s exposure, referring to the histogram (p.307) is
recommended.
378
Adjusting the Screen Color Tone
Screen and viewfinder color tone can be adjusted separately.
1 Select [52: Disp. color tone].
the adjustment.
2 Make
zz Press the <W> <X> keys or turn the
<5> dial to select an item, then
press <0>.
zz When adjusting viewfinder color tone,
look through the viewfinder as you set
it.
379
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone
have been reset, follow the steps below to set the time zone first.
By setting the time zone first, you can simply adjust this setting as
needed in the future and the date/time will be updated to match it.
Since the captured images will be appended with the shooting
date and time information, be sure to set your date/time.
1 Select [52: Date/Time/Zone].
the time zone.
2 Set
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
[Time zone].
zz Press <0>.
zz Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the time zone, then press <0>.
zz If your time zone is not listed,
press the <M> button, then set
the difference from UTC in [Time
difference].
380
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
a [Time difference] item (+/-/hour/
minute), then press <0>.
zz Press the <W> <X> keys to set it,
then press <0>.
zz After entering the time zone or time
difference, press the <Y> <Z> keys
to select [OK], then press <0>.
the date and time.
3 Set
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
an item, then press <0>.
zz Press the <W> <X> keys to set it,
then press <0>.
the daylight saving time.
4 Set
zz Set it as necessary.
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
[Y], then press <0>.
zz Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[Z], then press <0>.
zz When the daylight saving time is set
to [Z], the time set in step 3 will
advance by 1 hr. If [Y] is set, the
daylight saving time will be canceled
and the time will go back by 1 hour.
the setting.
5 Exit
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
[OK].
381
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone
ooThe date, time, and time zone settings may be reset when the camera is
stored without the battery, when its battery becomes exhausted, or when
it is exposed to below freezing temperatures for a prolonged period. If
this happens, set them once again.
ooAfter changing [Zone/Time difference], check that the correct date/time
are set.
Auto power off time may be extended while the [52: Date/Time/Zone]
screen is displayed.
382
Setting the Interface Language
1 Select [52: LanguageK].
2 Set the desired language.
383
Setting the Video System
Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting
determines the frame rates available when you shoot movies.
1 Select [53: Video system].
an item.
2 Select
zz NTSC
For areas where the TV system is
NTSC (North America, Japan, South
Korea, Mexico, etc.).
zz PAL
For areas where the TV system is PAL
(Europe, Russia, China, Australia,
etc.).
384
Setting the Touch Control Response
1 Select [53: Touch control].
an item.
2 Select
zz [Standard] is the normal setting.
zz [Sensitive] provides a more reactive
touch-screen panel response than
[Standard].
zz To disable touch operations, select
[Disable].
Cautions for Touch Control Operations
ooSince the screen is not pressure sensitive, do not use any sharp objects,
such as your fingernail or a ballpoint pen, for touch operations.
ooDo not use wet fingers for touch operations.
ooIf the screen has any moisture or if your fingers are wet, the touchscreen panel may not respond or malfunction may occur. In such a case,
turn off the power and wipe off the moisture with a cloth.
ooAttaching any commercially available protective sheet or sticker on the
screen may degrade the touch operation response.
ooIf you quickly perform touch operation when [Sensitive] is set, the touch
operation response may be poor.
385
Disabling Beeps for Camera Operations
You can disable beeping when subjects are in focus or for other
operations.
1 Select [53: Beep].
an item.
2 Select
zz Touch
The beeper will be silent only for
touch operations.
zz Disable
Disables beeping when subjects are
in focus, when you shoot with the
self-timer, and when you use touch
operations.
386
Checking the Battery Information
You can check the conditions of the battery you are using. By
registering multiple batteries to the camera, you can check their
approximate remaining capacity and usage history.
Select [53: Battery info.].
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3) (5)
(4)
(5)
Battery position
Battery model or household power
source being used.
The battery level indicator (p.49) is
displayed together with the remaining
battery level shown in 1% increments.
The number of shots taken with the
current battery. The number is reset
when the battery is recharged.
Battery’s recharge performance level
is displayed in three levels.
(Green) :
Battery’s recharge performance is
good.
(Green) :
Battery’s recharge performance is
slightly degraded.
(Red) :
Purchasing a new battery is
recommended.
Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is recommended. If
you use batteries that are not genuine Canon products, the camera’s full
performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.
ooThe shutter count is the number of still photos taken. (Movie shooting is
not counted.)
ooThe battery information will also be displayed when using Battery Grip
BG-E22 (sold separately).
ooIf a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the
instructions in the message.
387
Checking the Battery Information
Registering Batteries to the Camera
You can register up to six LP-E6N/LP-E6 batteries to the camera. To
register multiple batteries to the camera, follow the procedure below for
each battery.
the <B> button.
1 Press
zz With the battery info. screen
displayed, press the <B> button.
ggIf the battery is not registered, it will
be grayed out.
2 Select [Register].
[OK].
3 Select
ggThe battery is now displayed in white.
The battery cannot be registered if the household power outlet accessories
(sold separately, p.582) are used.
388
Checking the Battery Information
Labeling Batteries with Serial Numbers
It is convenient to label registered LP-E6N/LP-E6 battery packs with
their serial numbers, using commercially available labels.
a label approx. 25×15 mm, write
1 On
the serial number (1).
(1)
7c40
0300
the label.
2 Apply
zz Set the power switch to <2>.
zz Remove the battery from the camera.
zz Apply the label as shown in the
illustration (on the side with no
electrical contacts).
ooDo not apply the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration
in step 2. Otherwise, the misplaced label may make it difficult to insert
the battery or impossible to turn on the power.
ooWhen you use Battery Grip BG-E22 (sold separately), the label may
peel off as you repeatedly insert and remove the battery into the battery
magazine. If it peels off, apply a new label.
389
Checking the Battery Information
Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery
You can check the remaining capacity of batteries not currently in use,
as well as their last date of use.
(1)
(3)
(2)
Look for the serial number.
zz Refer to the battery’s serial number
label and look for the battery’s serial
number (1) on the battery history
screen.
ggYou can check the respective battery’s
approximate remaining capacity (2)
and the date when it was last used (3).
Deleting the Registered Battery Information
[Delete info.].
1 Select
zz Follow step 2 on page 387 to select [Delete info.].
the battery information to delete.
2 Select
gg[X] will appear.
the <L> button.
3 Press
zz Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog.
390
f Sensor Cleaning
Self-cleaning of the front of the sensor is performed whenever you set
the power switch to <2>.
You can also activate sensor cleaning manually.
Activating Immediate Cleaning
1 Select [53: Sensor cleaning].
[Clean nowf].
2 Select
zz Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog.
391
Sensor Cleaning
Setting Auto Cleaning
1 Select [Auto cleaningf].
an item.
2 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
an item, then press <0>.
ooFor best results, clean with the camera in a stable position on a desk or
other flat surface.
ooEven if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.
Note that [Clean nowf] may not be available immediately after
cleaning.
ooDots of light may appear in captured images or on the shooting screen
if the sensor is affected by cosmic rays or similar factors. By selecting
[Clean nowf], their appearance may be suppressed (p.391).
392
Sensor Cleaning
Manual Sensor CleaningM
Dust that could not be removed by automatic cleaning can be removed
manually with a commercially available blower or similar tool.
The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to
be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
1 Select [Clean manually].
2 Select [OK].
the lens and clean the
3 Remove
sensor.
the cleaning.
4 End
zz Set the power switch to <2>.
If you will clean the sensor manually, make sure to use a fully-charged
battery.
Using the household power outlet accessories (sold separately) is
recommended.
393
Sensor Cleaning
ooWhile cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If
the power is cut off, the shutter will close. These may result in
damaging the image sensor and shutter curtains.
• Setting the power switch to <2>.
• Removing or inserting the battery.
ooThe surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor
with care.
ooUse a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the
sensor.
ooDo not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount.
If the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains
may get damaged.
ooNever use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. Pressurized air
may damage the sensor, and sprayed gas may freeze on the sensor and
scratch it.
ooIf the battery level becomes low while cleaning the sensor, the beeper
will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.
ooIf a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the
sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
394
Setting the HDMI Output Resolution
Set the image output resolution used when the camera is connected to
a television or external recording device with an HDMI cable.
1 Select [53: HDMI resolution].
an item.
2 Select
zz Auto
The images will automatically be
displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected television.
zz 1080p
Output at 1080p resolution. Select if
you prefer to avoid display or delay
issues when the camera switches
resolution.
395
RAW Playback on an HDR TV
You can view RAW images in HDR by connecting the camera to an
HDR TV.
1 Select [53: HDMI HDR output].
2 Select [On].
ooImage operations such as RAW processing are not available during HDR
display.
ooJPEG images are used for HDR display in the case of L (ISO
50-equivalent) images or multiple-exposure RAW images.
ooMake sure the HDR TV is set up for HDR input. For details on how to
switch inputs on the TV, refer to the TV manual.
ooDepending on the TV used, images may not look as expected.
ooSome image effects and information may not be displayed on an HDR
TV.
396
Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting
You can customize the details and screens of information shown on the
camera or in viewfinder when you shoot.
Select [54: Shooting info. disp.].
Customizing Information on the Screen
1 Select [Screen info. settings].
screens.
2 Select
zz Press the <W> <X> keys to select
screens of information to show on the
camera.
zz For screens you prefer not to display,
press <0> to clear the checkmark
[X].
zz To edit the screen, press the <B>
button.
the screen.
3 Edit
zz Press the <W> <X> keys to select
items to show on the screen.
zz For items you prefer not to display,
press <0> to clear the checkmark
[X].
zz Select [OK] to register the setting.
397
Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting
Customizing Information in the Viewfinder
1 Select [VF info/toggle settings].
screens.
2 Select
zz Press the <W> <X> keys to select
screens of information to show in the
viewfinder.
zz For screens you prefer not to display,
press <0> to clear the checkmark
[X].
zz To edit the screen, press the <B>
button.
the screen.
3 Edit
zz Press the <W> <X> keys to select
items to show in the viewfinder.
zz For items you prefer not to display,
press <0> to clear the checkmark
[X].
zz Select [OK] to register the setting.
398
Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting
Vertical Viewfinder Display
You can select how viewfinder information is displayed when you are
shooting still photos vertically.
1 Select [VF vertical display].
an item.
2 Select
zz On
Information is automatically rotated,
making it easier to read.
zz Off
Information is not automatically
rotated.
Grid Display
A grid can be displayed on the screen and viewfinder.
1 Select [Grid display].
2 Select an item.
399
Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting
Setting the Histogram
You can select the content and display size of the histogram.
1 Select [Histogram disp].
an item.
2 Select
zz Select the content ([Brightness] or
[RGB]) and display size ([Large] or
[Small]).
zz Press the <M> button to confirm
the setting.
Setting Focus Distance Display
You can display focus distance when using RF lenses. In focus
distance display, you can select the timing and unit of measurement.
1 Select [Focus distance disp].
2 Select the timing of display.
the unit of measurement.
3 Select
zz Press the <M> button to confirm
the setting.
400
Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting
Clearing Settings
You can restore [Shooting info. disp.] defaults.
1 Select [Reset].
2 Select [OK].
401
Setting a Priority for Shooting Display Performance
You can select the performance parameter to prioritize in shooting
screen display for still photos.
1 Select [54: Disp. performance].
2 Select an item.
Setting the Viewfinder Display Format
You can select the viewfinder display format.
1 Select [54: VF display format].
an item.
2 Select
zz Press the <W> <X> keys for
selection.
zz Press <0> to set it.
402
Setting the Display Mode
You can select the display mode for shooting screens.
1 Select [54: Display settings].
an item.
2 Select
zz Auto
Normally use the screen for display,
but switch to the viewfinder when you
look through it.
zz Manual
You can restrict display to the screen
or viewfinder.
screen or viewfinder display.
3 Select
zz Press <0> to confirm the setting.
403
Customizing Shutter Button Functionality
You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button
halfway or completely during movie shooting.
1 Select [54: V btn function].
an item.
2 Select
zz Half-press
Specify whether pressing the shutter
button halfway starts metering,
metering and Movie Servo AF, or
metering and One-Shot AF.
zz Fully-press
Specify whether pressing the shutter
button completely is disregarded or
starts/stops movie shooting.
With [Fully-press] set to [Start/stop mov rec], you can start/stop
shooting movies not only with the movie shooting button but also by
pressing the shutter button completely or using Remote Switch RS60E3 (sold separately, p.176).
Even if you set [Fully-press] to [No function], the camera will start or stop
shooting time-lapse movies if the shutter button is pressed completely when
the camera is set up for time-lapse movies.
404
1 Help
When [zHelp] is displayed below a menu, you can display a
description about the feature by pressing the <B> button. Press
it again to exit Help display. To scroll the screen when a scrollbar (1)
appears on the right, press the <W> <X> keys or turn the <5> dial.
zzExample: [z5: High ISO speed NR]
B
B
(1)
zzExample: [56: Multi function lock]
B
B
zzExample: [23: Tracking sensitivity]
B
B
405
Help
Help Display Text Size
You can change the text size for the Help display.
1 Select [54: Help text size].
2 Select an item.
zzExample: [z5: High ISO speed NR]
Text size: Small
406
Text size: Standard
Setting Wireless Features
You can connect the camera to a smartphone or computer wirelessly
and send your shots or control the camera remotely.
[55: Wireless
1 Select
communication settings].
the item.
2 Set
zz For details, see Chapter 6, “Wi-Fi
(Wireless Communication) Functions”.
407
Setting Wireless Features
Shooting with a Remote Control
By pairing the camera via Bluetooth with Wireless Remote Control BRE1 (sold separately, supporting Bluetooth low energy technology), you
can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 m/16.4 ft. from the camera.
Pairing
To use BR-E1, you must first pair (connect and register) the camera
and remote control.
[55: Wireless
1 Select
communication settings].
2 Select [Bluetooth function].
3 Select [Bluetooth function].
[Remote].
4 Select
zz If the message “Register a nickname
to identify the camera.” appears,
register a nickname as described on
page 430.
408
Setting Wireless Features
[Pairing].
5 Select
zz Select [Pairing].
zz Press and hold the <W> button
and <T> button on the BR-E1
simultaneously for 3 sec. or more.
ggPairing now begins. When pairing is
complete, BR-E1 is registered on the
camera.
When shooting still
photos
When shooting movies
up the camera for remote
6 Set
shooting.
zz Select [Q] or [k] as the drive
mode (p.144).
zz In [z2: Remote control], select
[Enable].
zz For instructions after the pairing
is complete, refer to the BR-E1’s
Instruction Manual.
Bluetooth connections consume battery power even after the camera’s auto
power off is activated.
ooWhen you do not use the Bluetooth function, setting it to [Disable] in
step 4 is recommended. To use the remote control again, select [Remote]
again.
ooAuto power off time may be extended when the camera is set for remote
shooting.
409
Setting Wireless Features
Canceling the Pairing
Before pairing with a different BR-E1, clear the information about the
connected remote control.
[55: Wireless
1 Select
communication settings].
2 Select [Bluetooth function].
[Check/clear connection
3 Select
info].
4 Press the <B> button.
the connection information.
5 Clear
zz Select [OK].
410
Geotagging Images
You can geotag images with GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold separately) or
a Bluetooth enabled smartphone.
Using GP-E2
GP-E2 to the camera.
1 Attach
zz Attach GP-E2 to the camera’s hot
shoe and turn it on. For details, refer
to the GP-E2 Instruction Manual.
2 Select [55: GPS device settings].
3 Select [GPS receiver].
the picture.
4 Take
zz For details on [Set up], refer to the
GP-E2 Instruction Manual.
Precautions When Using GP-E2
ooBe sure to check the countries and regions where its use is allowed,
and use the function in accordance with the laws and regulations of the
country or region.
ooMake sure the GP-E2 firmware is updated to Ver. 2.0.0 or later. Firmware
updating requires an interface cable. For updating instructions, visit the
Canon website.
ooThe cable cannot be used to connect the camera to the GP-E2.
ooThe digital compass cannot be used with the camera, and the shooting
direction is not recorded.
411
Geotagging Images
Using a Smartphone
The dedicated application Camera Connect (free of charge) must be
installed on the smartphone. For details on installing Camera Connect,
see page 427.
Specifying the smartphone as the GPS device
the smartphone, activate
1 On
location services.
a Bluetooth connection.
2 Establish
zz Connect the camera to a smartphone
via Bluetooth. For details, see page
429.
3 Select [55: GPS device settings].
412
Geotagging Images
[Smartphone].
4 Select
zz Select [Smartphone] in [Select GPS
device].
ggLocation information can now be
acquired from the smartphone.
zz To check acquired geotag information
(latitude, longitude, elevation, and
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)),
select [GPS information display] on
the [GPS device settings] screen.
the picture.
5 Take
zz Images are geotagged with the
information from the smartphone.
413
Geotagging Images
GPS connection display
You can check the status of smartphone location information acquisition
on the screens for still photo or movie shooting (p.619 and p.621,
respectively).
●●Gray: Location services are off
●●Blinking: Location information cannot be acquired
●●On: Location information acquired
For details on how GPS connection status is indicated when the GP-E2
is used, refer to the GP-E2 Instruction Manual.
Geotagging images as you shoot
Images you shoot while the GPS icon is on are geotagged.
Geotagging information
You can check the location information added to your shots on the
shooting information screen (p.304, 307).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
414
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Latitude
Longitude
Elevation
UTC (Coordinated Universal
Time)
Geotagging Images
ooThe smartphone can acquire location information only while it is paired
with the camera via Bluetooth.
ooDirection information is not acquired.
ooAcquired location information may not be accurate, depending on
traveling conditions or smartphone status.
ooIt may take some time to acquire location information from the
smartphone after you turn the camera on.
ooLocation information is no longer acquired after any of the following
operations.
• Setting [Bluetooth function] to an option other than [Smartphone]
• Turning the camera off
• Quitting Camera Connect
• Deactivating location services on the smartphone
ooLocation information is no longer acquired in any of the following
situations.
• The camera power turns off
• The Bluetooth connection is ended
• The smartphone’s remaining battery level is low
ooCoordinated Universal Time, abbreviated as UTC, is essentially the
same as Greenwich Mean Time.
ooFor movies, the GPS information initially acquired is added.
415
R Setting the Multi-Function Lock
Specify camera controls to lock when the Multi-function lock is enabled.
This can help prevent accidentally changing settings.
1 Select [56: Multi function lock].
camera controls to lock.
2 Select
zz Press <0> to add a checkmark
[X].
zz Select [OK].
ggPressing the <R> button locks the
selected [X] camera controls.
ooIn [A] mode, only [Touch control] can be set.
ooIf it is changed from the default setting, an asterisk “*” will be displayed
on the right edge of [56: Multi function lock].
416
w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN
You can register current camera settings, such as shooting, menu, and
Custom Function settings, as Custom shooting modes assigned to
<w> to <y> modes. You can register different functions to use when
shooting still photos or movies.
[56: Custom shooting mode
1 Select
(C1-C3)].
2 Select [Register settings].
the desired items.
3 Register
zz Select the Custom shooting mode
to register, then select [OK] on the
registration screen.
ggThe current camera settings are
registered to Custom shooting mode
C*.
Automatic Update of Registered Settings
If you change a setting while shooting in Custom shooting mode, the
mode can be automatically updated with the new setting (Auto update).
To enable this automatic update, set [Auto update set.] to [Enable] in
step 2.
Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes
If you select [Clear settings] in step 2, the settings of respective
modes can be reverted to the default settings with no Custom shooting
modes registered.
417
Registering Custom Shooting Modes
My Menu settings will not be registered under Custom shooting modes.
You can also change shooting and menu settings in Custom shooting
modes.
418
Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN
The camera’s settings for shooting functions and menu functions can
be reverted to their defaults.
[56: Clear all camera
1 Select
settings].
2 Select [OK].
For how to clear all the Custom Function settings, see page 554.
419
Setting Copyright InformationN
When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image
as Exif information.
1 Select [56: Copyright information].
2 Select an item.
text.
3 Enter
zz Use the <V> cross keys or <5>
dial to select a character, then press
<0> to enter it.
zz By selecting [ ], you can change the
input mode.
zz You can enter up to 63 characters.
zz Select [ ] or press the <L> button
to delete any unneeded characters.
the setting.
4 Exit
zz Press the <M> button, then press
[OK].
420
Setting Copyright Information
Checking the Copyright Information
When you select [Display copyright
info.] in step 2, you can check the
[Author] and [Copyright] information
that you entered.
Deleting the Copyright Information
When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can
delete the [Author] and [Copyright] information.
If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed
entirely when you select [Display copyright info.].
You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility (EOS
software).
421
Checking Other Information
zzDownloading instruction manuals
To download instruction manuals, select [56: Manual/software
URL] and scan the displayed QR code with a smartphone. Note that
scanning QR codes requires an app.
zzDisplaying certification logosM
Select [56: Certification Logo Display] to display some of the
logos of the camera’s certifications. Other certification logos can be
found in this Instruction Manual, on the camera body, and on the
camera’s package.
zzFirmware versionM
Select [56: Firmware] to update the firmware of the camera or
current lens.
422
6
Wi-Fi (Wireless
Communication) Functions
This chapter describes how to send images via Wi-Fi® from
the camera to a variety of compatible devices, and how to use
Web services.
423
What You Can Do via Wi-Fi
(Wireless Communication) Functions
(CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY)
(4) Send images to
a Web service
(3) Print images using a
Wi-Fi printer
(1) Communicate
with a smartphone
(2) Use with EOS
software or other
dedicated software
Important
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage from
erroneous wireless communication settings when using the camera.
In addition, Canon cannot be held liable for any other loss or damage
caused by use of the camera.
When using wireless communication functions, establish appropriate
security at your own risk and discretion. Canon cannot be held liable for
any loss or damage caused by unauthorized access or other security
breaches.
424
What You Can Do via Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions
(1) q Communicate with a smartphone (p.427)
Control the camera remotely and browse images on the camera
over a Wi-Fi connection by using the dedicated Camera Connect
app on smartphones or tablets (collectively referred to as
“smartphones” in this manual).
(2) D Use with EOS software or other dedicated software (p.461)
Connect the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi and operate the
camera remotely using EOS Utility (EOS software). With the
dedicated application Image Transfer Utility 2, images on the
camera can also be sent to a computer automatically.
(3) l Print images using a Wi-Fi printer (p.469)
Connect the camera to a printer supporting PictBridge (Wireless
LAN) via Wi-Fi to print images.
(4) R Send images to a Web service (p.481)
Share images with friends or family on social media or the CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY online photo service for Canon customers after
you complete member registration (free of charge).
425
What You Can Do via Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions
Bluetooth® Features
By pairing the camera with a smartphone compatible with Bluetooth
low energy technology (hereafter, “Bluetooth”), you can:
●●Establish a Wi-Fi connection from either the camera or smartphone,
by itself (p.448, 511)
●●Establish a Wi-Fi connection with the camera even when it is off
(p.437)
●●Geotag images with GPS information acquired by the smartphone
(p.412)
This camera can also be connected to Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
(sold separately) via Bluetooth for remote control shooting (p.174).
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
To establish a Wi-Fi connection with smartphones or computers already
on a Wi-Fi network, see “Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points” (p.496).
Interface Cable Connection Cautions
ooOther devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera by
connecting them with an interface cable while the camera is connected
to devices via Wi-Fi. Terminate the connection before connecting the
interface cable.
ooWhen the camera is connected to a computer or another device with
an interface cable, you cannot select [55: Wireless communication
settings]. Disconnect the interface cable before changing any settings.
Cards
ooThe camera cannot be connected via Wi-Fi if there is no card in the
camera (except for [D]). Also, for [l] and Web services, the camera
cannot be connected via Wi-Fi if there are no images saved on the card.
Using the Camera with a Wi-Fi Connection Established
ooWhen you want to prioritize the Wi-Fi connection, do not operate the
power switch, card slot cover, battery compartment cover or other parts.
Otherwise, the Wi-Fi connection will be terminated.
426
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
This section describes how to directly connect the camera to a
smartphone via Wi-Fi.
zz Connecting to a smartphone via Wi-Fi enables you to perform the
following:
●●View images stored in the camera on a smartphone or save viewed
images to a smartphone.
●●Operate the camera to take a picture or change camera settings
using a smartphone.
●●Send images to a smartphone from the camera.
zz To establish a Wi-Fi connection via an access point, see “Wi-Fi
Connection via Access Points” (p.496).
Selecting the Wi-Fi Connection Method
Connecting to a Bluetooth-compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi
(p.429)
By connecting to a Bluetooth-compatible smartphone via Bluetooth in
advance, you can connect via Wi-Fi simply by performing an operation
on the camera or smartphone.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi from the [Wi-Fi
function] Menu (p.440)
You can use Wi-Fi to connect to a smartphone that is not compatible
with Bluetooth or a smartphone that cannot use its Bluetooth function.
Installing Camera Connect on a Smartphone
To connect the camera to a smartphone, a smartphone on which
Android or iOS is installed is necessary. In addition, the dedicated
application Camera Connect (free of charge) must be installed on the
smartphone.
427
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
zz Use the latest version of the smartphone OS.
zz Camera Connect can be installed from Google Play or App Store.
Google Play or App Store can also be accessed using the QR codes
that appear when the camera is paired or connected via Wi-Fi to a
smartphone.
Android
iOS
ooFor the operating system versions supported by Camera Connect, refer
to the download site of Camera Connect.
ooInterface or functions of the camera and Camera Connect are subject
to change for firmware update of the camera or application update of
Camera Connect, Android, iOS, etc. In such a case, features of the
camera or Camera Connect may differ from sample screens or operation
instructions in this manual.
ooAn application is required to read the QR codes.
428
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Connecting to a Bluetooth-compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (1)
[55: Wireless
1 Select
communication settings].
2 Select [Wi-Fi settings].
3 Select [Wi-Fi].
[Enable].
4 Select
zz After the [Wi-Fi settings] screen
appears, press the <M>
button to return to the [Wireless
communication settings] screen.
429
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
5 Select [Bluetooth function].
6 Select [Bluetooth function].
7 Select [Smartphone].
8 Register [Nickname].
zz When using the displayed nickname,
press the <M> button.
zz You can change the nickname as
needed (p.514).
430
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
9 Select [OK].
10 Select [Pairing].
an item.
11 Select
zz If Camera Connect is already
installed, select [Do not display].
zz If Camera Connect is not installed,
select [Android] or [iOS], scan
the displayed QR code with the
smartphone to access Google Play
or App Store and install Camera
Connect.
ggPairing now begins.
431
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Smartphone (1)
12 Enable the Bluetooth function.
13 Start Camera Connect.
the camera to pair with.
14 Select
ggIf you are using an Android
smartphone, go to step 16.
15 Tap on [Pair] (iOS only).
432
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (2)
16 Select [OK].
<0>.
17 Press
zz Pairing is now complete, and
the camera is connected to the
smartphone via Bluetooth.
ggA Bluetooth icon appears on the main
Camera Connect screen.
ooPairing or Bluetooth connection is not possible if the camera is
connected to a computer or another device with an interface cable.
ooThe camera cannot be connected to two or more devices at the same
time via Bluetooth.
ooBluetooth connection consumes battery power even after the camera’s
auto power off is activated. Therefore, the battery level may be low when
you use the camera.
With a Bluetooth connection established, you can operate the camera to
send images to the smartphone. For details, see page 448.
433
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Smartphone (2)
a Camera Connect function.
18 Select
zz In iOS, select [Join] when a message
is displayed to confirm camera
connection.
zz For the Camera Connect functions,
see page 444.
ggWhen a Wi-Fi connection is
established, the screen for the
selected function will appear.
gg[qWi-Fi on] is displayed on the
camera.
ggThe Bluetooth and Wi-Fi icons are lit
on the main Camera Connect screen.
The Wi-Fi connection to a Bluetooth-compatible smartphone is
now complete.
434
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
zz For how to terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see “Terminating the WiFi Connection” (p.457).
zz Terminating the Wi-Fi connection will switch the camera to the
Bluetooth connection.
zz To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see “Reconnecting via Wi-Fi” (p.509).
[qWi-Fi on] Screen
Disconnect,exit
zz Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
Confirm set.
zz You can check the settings.
Error details
zz When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs, you can check the details of
the error.
435
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
[Bluetooth function] Screen
On the [Bluetooth function] screen, you can change or check the
Bluetooth function settings.
Bluetooth function
zz Select the device to pair with the
camera.
zz If you will not use the Bluetooth
function, select [Disable].
Pairing
zz Pair the camera with the device
selected in [Bluetooth function].
Check/clear connection info
zz You can check the name and
communication status of the paired
device.
zz To remove registration of the paired
device, press the <B> button.
For details, see “Removing a Paired
Device’s Registration” (p.439).
Bluetooth address
zz You can check the camera’s Bluetooth
address.
436
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Stay conn. if off
zz Selecting [Enable] lets you view
images on the camera and control it
in other ways by connecting via Wi-Fi
even if the camera is off. For details,
see “Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection
When the Camera Is Off”.
Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection When the Camera Is Off
Once the devices are paired, you can use a smartphone to connect via
Wi-Fi and transfer images from the camera even when it is off.
Setting [Stay conn. if off]
[Bluetooth function].
1 Select
zz Select [Bluetooth function] on the
[Wireless communication settings]
screen.
[Stay conn. if off] to [Enable].
2 Set
zz On the [Bluetooth function] screen,
set [Stay conn. if off] to [Enable].
Even when the camera is off, it will
remain paired with the smartphone
via Bluetooth.
437
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection When the Camera Is Off
Camera Connect.
1 Start
zz Start Camera Connect on a
smartphone paired with the camera
via Bluetooth.
[Images on camera].
2 Select
zz In the Camera Connect menu, tap on
[Images on camera].
In iOS, select [Join] when a message
is displayed to confirm camera
connection.
Images on the camera are listed when
the Wi-Fi connection is established.
Using Camera Connect
zz You can use Camera Connect to transfer images to the smartphone,
and you can delete or rate images from the camera.
zz To end the Wi-Fi connection, tap on [ ] on the main Camera
Connect screen (p.457).
ooThis feature is not available unless the camera and smartphone are
paired via Bluetooth.
ooThis function can no longer be used if the wireless settings are reset or
the smartphone connection information is erased.
438
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Removing a Paired Device’s Registration
To pair the camera with a different smartphone, clear the paired
device’s registration on the [Bluetooth function] screen (p.436).
Steps on the Camera
[Check/clear connection
1 Select
info].
2 Press the <B> button.
the connection information.
3 Clear
zz Select [OK].
Steps on the Smartphone
the camera registration.
4 Remove
zz In the Bluetooth settings of the
smartphone, select the nickname of
the camera to remove registration for.
439
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi from the
[Wi-Fi function] Menu
Steps on the Camera (1)
Wi-Fi settings to [Enable].
1 Set
zz See steps 1–4 on page 429.
[Wi-Fi function].
2 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the
[Wireless communication settings]
screen.
a nickname.
3 Register
zz If the [Nickname] screen is displayed,
register a nickname (p.430).
4 zzIf the history (p.509) is displayed,
Select [q] (Connect to smartphone).
switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>
keys.
[Register a device for
5 Select
connection].
440
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
an item.
6 Select
zz If Camera Connect is already
installed, select [Do not display].
zz If Camera Connect is not installed,
select [Android] or [iOS] on the
screen on the left, scan the displayed
QR code with the smartphone, then
access Google Play or App Store and
install Camera Connect.
(1)
(2)
the SSID (network name)
7 Check
and password.
zz Check the SSID (1) and password (2)
displayed on the camera screen. “_
Canon0A” is displayed at the end of
the SSID.
zz In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set
[Password] to [None], the password
will not be displayed or required. For
details, see page 533.
By selecting [Switch network] in step 7, you can establish a Wi-Fi
connection via an access point (p.496).
441
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Smartphone
Smartphone’s screen
(sample)
the smartphone to
8 Operate
establish a Wi-Fi connection.
zz Activate the smartphone’s WiFi function, then select the SSID
(network name) checked in step 7.
zz For the password, enter the password
checked in step 7.
Camera Connect.
9 Start
zz When the [Waiting to connect]
screen is displayed on the camera,
start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
the camera to connect to via
10 Select
Wi-Fi.
zz Select and tap on the camera to
connect to via Wi-Fi from [Cameras]
on Camera Connect.
Steps on the Camera (2)
a Wi-Fi connection.
11 Establish
zz Select [OK].
zz To specify viewable images, press the
<B> button. See step 5 on page
459 to set them.
442
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
ggThe main window of Camera Connect
will be displayed on the smartphone.
The Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone
is now complete.
zz Operate the camera using Camera
Connect. See page 444.
zz For how to terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see “Terminating the WiFi Connection” (p.457).
zz To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see “Reconnecting via Wi-Fi” (p.509).
[qWi-Fi on] Screen
Disconnect,exit
zz Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
Confirm set.
zz You can check the settings.
Error details
zz When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs, you can check the details of
the error.
With a Wi-Fi connection established, you can send images to a smartphone
from the camera menu ([Send images to smartphone]) or from the Quick
Control screen during playback. For details, see page 448.
443
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Operating the Camera Using a Smartphone
The main functions of Camera Connect are described below.
Images on camera
zz Images stored in the camera can be
viewed.
zz Images stored in the camera can be
saved on a smartphone.
zz Operations such as deletion can be
performed on images stored in the
camera.
Remote live view shooting
zz The camera’s Live View image can be viewed on a smartphone.
zz You can shoot with remote operation.
Auto transfer
zz Enables camera and app setting adjustment to send shots to a
smartphone automatically as they are captured (p.446).
Location information
zz Not supported on this camera.
Camera settings
zz Camera settings can be changed.
444
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
ooIf the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote
shooting, the following will occur.
• Any movie recording in progress in movie shooting mode will continue.
• Any movie recording in progress in still photo shooting mode will end.
ooYou cannot use the camera to shoot after using Camera Connect to
switch from still photo shooting mode to movie shooting mode.
ooWith a Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone established, certain functions
are unavailable.
ooIn remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower.
ooDepending on the communication status, image display or shutter
release timing may be delayed.
ooWhen saving images to a smartphone, you cannot take a picture even if
you press the camera’s shutter button. Also, the camera screen may turn
off.
ooThe Wi-Fi connection will be terminated if you set the camera’s power
switch to <2>, or open the card slot cover or battery compartment
cover.
ooRAW images cannot be saved to a smartphone. When a RAW image is
selected, it will be saved as a JPEG image.
ooWith a Wi-Fi connection established, the camera’s auto power off does
not function.
With a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone’s power
saving function is recommended.
445
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Sending Images to a Smartphone Automatically as You Shoot
Your shots can be sent automatically. Before following these steps,
make sure the camera and smartphone are connected via Wi-Fi.
[55: Wireless
1 Select
communication settings].
2 Select [Wi-Fi settings].
[Send to smartphone after
3 Select
shot].
4 Set [Auto send] to [Enable].
446
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
[Size to send].
5 Set
zz Select the image size, then press
<0>.
6 Take the picture.
447
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Sending Images to a Smartphone from the Camera
You can use the camera to send images to a smartphone paired via
Bluetooth (Android devices only) or connected via Wi-Fi.
(1) Selecting [Send images to smartphone] to Send Images
[55: Wireless
1 Select
communication settings].
[Send images to
2 Select
smartphone].
ggIf you perform this step while
connected via Bluetooth, a message
is displayed, and the connection
switches to a Wi-Fi connection.
sending options and send
3 Select
the images.
448
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
(2) Sending Images from the Quick Control Screen During Playback
1 Play back the image.
2 Press the <Q> button.
[q].
3 Select
ggIf you perform this step while
connected via Bluetooth, a message
is displayed, and the connection
switches to a Wi-Fi connection.
sending options and send
4 Select
the images.
449
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
(3) Selecting Sending Options and Sending the Images
Sending Images Individually
an image to send.
1 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn
the <5> dial to select an image to
send, then press <0>.
zz You can press the <1> button and
turn the <6> dial counterclockwise
to select the image using the index
display.
[Send img shown].
2 Select
zz In [Size to send], you can select the
image sending size.
450
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Sending Multiple Selected Images
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Send selected].
images to send.
3 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn
the <5> dial to select an image to
send, then press <0>.
zz You can press the <1> button and
turn the <6> dial counterclockwise
to switch to the three-image display
to select the images. To return to the
single image display, also press the
<1> button and operate the <6>
dial.
zz After selecting the images to send,
press the <M> button.
451
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
image selection.
4 Exit
zz Select [OK].
[Size to send].
5 Select
zz Set it as necessary.
zz On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
6 Select [Send].
Sending a Specified Range of Images
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Send range].
452
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
the range of images.
3 Specify
zz Select the first image (start point),
then press <0>.
zz Select the last image (end point), then
press <0>.
zz To cancel the selection, repeat this
step.
zz You can press the <1> button and
turn the <6> dial to change the
number of images shown in the index
display.
the range.
4 Confirm
zz Press the <M> button.
[Size to send].
5 Select
zz Set it as necessary.
zz On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
6 Select [Send].
453
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Sending All Images on the Card
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Send all card].
[Size to send].
3 Select
zz On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
4 Select [Send].
454
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Sending Images that Match the Search Conditions
Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [Set image
search conditions] at once.
For details on [Set image search conditions], see “Filtering Images
for Playback” (p.313).
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Send all found].
[Size to send].
3 Select
zz On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
4 Select [Send].
455
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Ending Image Transfer
Sending Images from the Camera When Paired via Bluetooth
(Android)
zz Press the <M> button on the
image transfer screen.
zz Select [OK] on the screen at left to
end image transfer and the Wi-Fi
connection.
Sending Images from the Camera over a Wi-Fi Connection
zz Press the <M> button on the
image transfer screen.
zz To terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see
“Terminating the Wi-Fi Connection”
(p.457).
456
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
ooDuring the image transfer operation, a picture cannot be taken even if
the camera’s shutter button is pressed.
ooThe camera cannot be connected to multiple smartphones via Wi-Fi
when it is connected to another device via Wi-Fi.
ooYou can cancel the image transfer by selecting [Cancel] during the
transfer.
ooYou can select up to 999 files at a time.
ooWith a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone’s power
saving function is recommended.
ooWhen you reduce the image size, all images to be sent at the same time
are resized. Note that movies or b size still photos are not reduced.
ooWhen you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully
charged.
ooWith a Wi-Fi connection established, the camera’s auto power off does
not function.
Terminating the Wi-Fi Connection
To terminate the Wi-Fi connection, perform either of the following
operations.
On the Camera Connect screen, tap
on [ ].
On the [qWi-Fi on] screen, select
[Disconnect,exit].
zz If the [qWi-Fi on] screen is not
displayed, select [Wi-Fi function] on
the [55: Wireless communication
settings] screen.
zz Select [Disconnect,exit], then select
[OK] on the confirmation dialog.
457
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Specifying Viewable Images
You can specify images viewable on a smartphone by operating the
camera. Images can be specified after the Wi-Fi connection is
terminated.
[Wi-Fi function].
1 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the
[Wireless communication settings]
screen.
[q].
2 Select
zz If the history (p.509) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>
keys.
3 Select [Edit device information].
a smartphone.
4 Select
zz Select the name of the smartphone on
which you want to make the images
viewable.
458
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
5 Select [Viewable imgs].
an item.
6 Select
zz Select [OK] to access the setting
screen.
[All images]
All images stored on the card become viewable.
[Images from past days]
Specify viewable images on the
shooting-date basis. Images shot up to
nine days ago can be specified.
zz Select an item.
zz When [Images shot in past days]
is selected, images shot up to the
specified number of days before the
current date become viewable. Press
the <W> <X> keys to specify the
number of days, then press <0> to
confirm the selection.
zz Once you select [OK], the viewable
images are set.
If [Viewable imgs] is set to any setting other than [All images], remote
shooting is not possible.
459
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
[Select by rating]
Specify viewable images depending on
whether a rating is appended (or not
appended) or by the type of rating.
zz Once you select the type of rating, the
viewable images are set.
[File number range] (Select range)
Select the first and last images from
images arranged by the file number to
specify the viewable images.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(4)
460
Press <0> to display the image
selection screen.
Select an image using the <Y> <Z>
keys or <5> dial.
You can press the <1> button and
turn the <6> dial counterclockwise
to select the image using the index
display.
Select the first image (1), then press
<0>.
Press the <Z> key to select the last
image (2), then press <0>.
Select [OK].
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
This section describes how to connect the camera to a computer via
Wi-Fi and perform camera operations using EOS software or other
dedicated software. Install the latest version of EOS software or
other dedicated software on the computer before setting up a Wi-Fi
connection.
For computer operating instructions, refer to the computer user manual.
Operating the Camera Using EOS Utility
Using EOS Utility (EOS software), you can perform a variety of camera
operations.
Steps on the Camera (1)
Wi-Fi settings to [Enable].
1 Set
zz See steps 1–4 on page 429.
[Wi-Fi function].
2 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the
[Wireless communication settings]
screen.
a nickname.
3 Register
zz If the [Nickname] screen is displayed,
register a nickname (p.430).
[D] (Remote control (EOS
4 Select
Utility)).
zz If the history (p.509) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>
keys.
461
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
[Register a device for
5 Select
connection].
(1)
the SSID (network name)
6 Check
and password.
zz Check the SSID (1) and password (2)
displayed on the camera screen.
zz In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set
[Password] to [None], the password
will not be displayed or required. For
details, see page 533.
(2)
Steps on the Computer (1)
Computer’s screen (sample)
the SSID, then enter the
7 Select
password.
zz On the computer’s network setting
screen, select the SSID checked in
step 6. “_Canon0A” is displayed at
the end of the SSID.
zz For the password, enter the password
checked in step 6.
462
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (2)
[OK].
8 Select
ggThe following message is displayed.
“******” represents the last six digits of
the MAC address of the camera to be
connected.
Steps on the Computer (2)
9 Start EOS Utility.
EOS Utility, click [Pairing over
10 InWi-Fi/LAN].
zz If a firewall-related message is
displayed, select [Yes].
[Connect].
11 Click
zz Select the camera to connect to, then
click [Connect].
463
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (2)
a Wi-Fi connection.
12 Establish
zz Select [OK].
[DWi-Fi on] Screen
Disconnect,exit
zz Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
Confirm set.
zz You can check the settings.
Error details
zz When a Wi-Fi connection error
occurs, you can check the details of
the error.
The Wi-Fi connection to a computer is now complete.
zz Operate the camera using EOS Utility on the computer.
zz To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see “Reconnecting via Wi-Fi” (p.509).
464
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
ooIf the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote
shooting, the following will occur.
• Any movie recording in progress in movie shooting mode will continue.
• Any movie recording in progress in still photo shooting mode will end.
ooOperations using the camera are not possible after you use EOS Utility
to switch from still photo shooting mode to movie shooting mode.
ooWith a Wi-Fi connection to EOS Utility established, certain functions are
unavailable.
ooIn remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower.
ooDepending on the communication status, image display or shutter
release timing may be delayed.
ooIn Remote Live View shooting, the rate of image transmission is slower
compared to a connection via an interface cable. Therefore, moving
subjects cannot be displayed smoothly.
ooThe Wi-Fi connection will be terminated if you set the camera’s power
switch to <2>, or open the card slot cover or battery compartment
cover.
465
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Sending Images to a Computer Automatically
With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send
images on the camera to a computer automatically.
Steps on the Computer (1)
1
Connect the computer and access point
and start Image Transfer Utility 2.
zz In Image Transfer Utility 2, access the
pairing settings screen.
zz The screen to set up pairing is shown
when you follow the instructions
displayed the first time Image Transfer
Utility 2 starts up.
Steps on the Camera
[Auto send images to
2 Select
computer].
zz Select [Wi-Fi settings] on the
[Wireless communication settings]
screen.
zz On the [Wi-Fi settings] screen, select
[Auto send images to computer].
send], select [Enable].
3 InzzIf[Auto
the [Nickname] screen is displayed,
register a nickname (p.430).
466
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
4 Select [OK].
to an access point via Wi5 Connect
Fi.
zz Establish a Wi-Fi connection between
the camera and the access point
connected to the computer. For
connection instructions, see “WiFi Connection via Access Points”
(p.496).
the computer to pair the
6 Select
camera with.
Steps on the Computer (2)
the camera and computer.
7 Pair
zz Select the camera, then click
[Pairing].
467
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Sending Images on the Camera to a Computer Automatically
the [Wi-Fi settings] screen,
1 On
select [Auto send images to
computer].
2 Select [Image sending options].
what to send.
3 Select
zz If you select [Selected imgs] in
[Range to send], specify the images
to send on the [Select images to
send] screen.
the computer and access
4 Connect
point via Wi-Fi and start Image
Transfer Utility 2.
zz Images are sent automatically to the
computer when you turn the camera
on within range of the access point.
ooAuto power off is disabled.
ooAny images captured after automatic transfer are sent automatically
when the camera is restarted.
ooIf automatic transfer does not begin automatically, try restarting the
camera.
Any images captured during automatic transfer are also sent automatically.
468
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
This section describes how to print images by directly connecting the
camera to a printer via Wi-Fi. For printer operating instructions, refer to
the printer user manual.
Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection
Wi-Fi settings to [Enable].
1 Set
zz See steps 1–4 on page 429.
[Wi-Fi function].
2 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the
[Wireless communication settings]
screen.
a nickname.
3 Register
zz If the [Nickname] screen is displayed,
register a nickname (p.430).
4 zzIf the history (p.509) is displayed,
Select [l] (Print from Wi-Fi printer).
switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>
keys.
[Register a device for
5 Select
connection].
469
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
(1)
(2)
the SSID (network name)
6 Check
and password.
zz Check the SSID (1) and password (2)
displayed on the camera screen.
zz In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set
[Password] to [None], the password
will not be displayed or required. For
details, see page 533.
up the printer.
7 Set
zz On the Wi-Fi settings menu of the
printer to be used, select the SSID
you have checked.
“_Canon0A” is displayed at the end
of the SSID.
zz For the password, enter the password
checked in step 6.
the printer.
8 Select
zz In the list of detected printers, select
the printer to connect to via Wi-Fi.
zz When 16 or more printers are
detected or the search takes over
3 minutes, you can select [Search
again].
9 Print images (p.472).
470
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi connection is possible with Wi-Fi printers supporting PictBridge
(Wireless LAN).
To establish a Wi-Fi connection via an access point, see “Wi-Fi Connection
via Access Points” (p.496).
471
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Printing Images
Printing Images Individually
the image to be printed.
1 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the
<5> dial to select an image to print,
then press <0>.
zz You can press the <u> button and
turn the <6> dial counterclockwise
to select the image using the index
display.
2 Select [Print image].
the image.
3 Print
zz For the print setting procedures, see
page 475.
zz Select [Print], then [OK] to start
printing.
472
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Printing by Specifying the Options
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Print order].
the printing options.
3 Set
zz For the setting procedures, refer to
“Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)”
(p.353).
zz If the print order is complete before
establishing a Wi-Fi connection, go to
step 4.
[Print].
4 Select
zz [Print] can be selected only when an
image is selected and the printer is
ready to print.
5 Set the [Paper settings] (p.475).
473
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
the image.
6 Print
zz When [OK] is selected, printing starts.
ooWith a Wi-Fi connection to a printer established, a picture cannot be
taken even if the camera’s shutter button is pressed.
ooMovies cannot be printed.
ooBefore printing, be sure to set the paper size.
ooCertain printers may not be able to imprint the file number.
ooIf [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.
ooDepending on the printer, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a
bright background or on the border.
ooRAW images cannot be printed by selecting [Print order]. When
printing, select [Print image] and print.
ooWhen you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully
charged.
ooDepending on the image’s file size and image quality, it may take some
time to start printing after you select [Print].
ooTo stop printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select [OK].
ooWhen printing with [Print order], if you stopped printing and want to
resume printing of the remaining images, select [Resume]. Note that
printing will not resume if any of the following occurs.
• You change the print order or delete any of the print ordered images
before resuming printing.
• When index is set, you change the paper setting before resuming
printing.
• The card’s remaining capacity is low when you pause printing.
ooIf a problem occurs during printing, see page 480.
474
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Print Settings
The screen display and setting options vary depending on the
printer. Also, certain settings may not be available. For details, refer to
the printer’s instruction manual.
Print setting screen
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(7)
Sets the date or file number imprinting to on or off (p.477).
Sets the printing effects (p.477).
Sets the quantity to be printed (p.478).
Sets the print area (p.479).
Sets the paper size, type, and layout (p.476).
Returns to the image selection screen.
Starts the printing.
The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.
* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file
number imprinting or the cropping may not be selectable.
Paper Settings
zz Select [Paper settings].
475
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
[Q] Setting the Paper Size
zz Select the size of the paper in the
printer.
[Y] Setting the Paper Type
zz Select the type of the paper in the
printer.
[U] Setting the Page Layout
zz Select the page layout.
Borderless
Bordered
xx-up
Default
Prints with no borders. If your printer cannot print borderless
prints, the print will have borders.
Prints with white borders along the edges.
Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 20 or 35 images on one sheet.
The page layout varies depending on the printer model or its
settings.
If the image’s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper’s aspect ratio,
the image may be cropped significantly when you print it as a borderless
print. If the image is cropped, the print may look grainier due to the fewer
number of pixels.
476
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Setting the Date/File Number Imprinting
zz Select [I].
zz Select what to print.
Setting the Printing Effects (Image Optimization)
Contents displayed on the screen vary depending on the printer.
zz Select [E].
zz Select printing effects.
Option
[E] Default
[E] On
Printing Effect
Printing effects differ depending on the printer. For details,
refer to the printer’s instruction manual.
Prints in the printer’s standard colors. The image’s Exif
information is used to make automatic corrections.
[E] Off
No automatic correction is applied.
[E] Red-Eye1
Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye.
The red eye is reduced for printing.
If you imprint shooting information on an image shot at an expanded ISO
speed (H), the correct ISO speed may not be imprinted.
477
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Setting the Number of Copies
zz Select [R].
zz Select the number of copies to print.
The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the printer’s
own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer to the
printer’s instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings are.
478
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Cropping the Image
Set cropping immediately before
printing. Changing other print settings
after you crop images may require you
to crop the images again.
1 On the print setting screen, select [Cropping].
the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.
2 Set
zz The image area within the cropping frame will be printed. The
shape of the frame (aspect ratio) can be changed with [Paper
settings].
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
Turn the <6> dial to change the cropping frame size.
Moving the Cropping Frame
Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys to move the frame over
the image vertically or horizontally.
Switching the Orientation of the Cropping Frame
Pressing the <B> button will toggle the cropping frame between
the vertical and horizontal orientations.
3
Press <0> to exit the cropping.
zz You can check the cropped image area on the upper left of the
print setting screen.
479
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
ooDepending on the printer, the cropped image area may not be printed as
you specified.
ooThe smaller you make the cropping frame, the grainier the picture will
look in the print.
Handling Printer Errors
If printing does not resume after you resolve a printer error (no ink, no
paper, etc.) and select [Continue], operate the buttons on the printer. For
details on resuming printing, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.
Error Messages
If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the
camera screen. After fixing the problem, resume printing. For details on
how to fix a printing problem, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.
Paper Error
Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer.
Ink Error
Check the printer’s ink level and the waste ink tank.
Hardware Error
Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.
File Error
The selected image cannot be printed. Images taken with a different
camera or images edited with a computer may not be printable.
480
Sending Images to a Web Service
This section describes how to use Web services to send images.
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add your Web services to the
camera.
zz A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
zz Visit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on versions
of browsers (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer) and settings
required for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY access.
zz For information on countries and regions where CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website
(http://www.canon.com/cig/).
zz For CANON iMAGE GATEWAY instructions and setting details, refer
to the help information for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
zz If you also intend to use Web services other than CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY, you must have an account with the services you intend
to use. For further details, check the websites for each Web service
you will register.
zz Fees to connect to your provider and communication fees to access
your provider’s access point are charged separately.
481
Sending Images to a Web Service
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.
You will need to enter an email address used on your computer or
smartphone.
Steps on the Camera (1)
Wi-Fi settings to [Enable].
1 Set
zz See steps 1–4 on page 429.
[Wi-Fi function].
2 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the
[Wireless communication settings]
screen.
a nickname.
3 Register
zz If the [Nickname] screen is displayed,
register a nickname (p.430).
4 Select [R].
5 Select [I Agree].
482
Sending Images to a Web Service
a Wi-Fi connection.
6 Establish
zz Go to step 7 on page 498 (PBC
mode), step 7 on page 502 (PIN
mode), or step 7 on page 505
(manually).
your email address.
7 Enter
zz Enter your email address, then select
[OK].
a four-digit number.
8 Enter
zz Enter a four-digit number of your
choice, then select [OK].
[OK].
9 Select
ggThe [R] icon changes to [
].
483
Sending Images to a Web Service
Steps on the Computer or Smartphone
up camera web link.
10 Set
zz Access the page in the notification
message.
zz Follow the instructions to complete
the settings on the camera web link
settings page.
Steps on the Camera (2)
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY as a
11 Add
destination.
zz Select [ ].
ggCANON iMAGE GATEWAY is now
added.
484
Sending Images to a Web Service
Registering Other Web Services
Steps on the Computer or Smartphone
the Web service you
1 Configure
want to use.
zz Visit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
website and access the camera web
link settings page.
zz Follow the on-screen instructions to
complete settings for Web services
you want to use.
Steps on the Camera
the Web service you
2 Add
configured as a destination.
zz On the [Wi-Fi function] screen,
select [ ].
485
Sending Images to a Web Service
Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection
[Wi-Fi function].
1 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the
[Wireless communication settings]
screen.
a Web service.
2 Select
zz If the history (p.509) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>
keys.
zz A screen to select a destination may
be displayed, depending on the type
and settings of the Web service
(p.508).
486
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Images to a Web Service
You can share images with your family and friends by sending images
from the camera to a Web service registered on the camera or by
sending Web links of the online albums.
Sending Images Individually
an image to send.
1 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn
the <5> dial to select an image to
send, then press <0>.
zz You can press the <1> button and
turn the <6> dial counterclockwise
to select the image using the index
display.
[Send img shown].
2 Select
zz In [Size to send], you can select the
image sending size.
zz On the screen after images are
sent, select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi
connection.
zz When the [Terms of use] screen
is displayed, thoroughly read the
message, then select [I Agree].
zz To scroll the screen, use the <W>
<X> keys.
487
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Multiple Selected Images
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Send selected].
the images to send.
3 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn
the <5> dial to select an image to
send, then press <0>.
zz You can press the <1> button and
turn the <6> dial counterclockwise
to switch to the three-image display
to select the images. To return to the
single image display, also press the
<1> button and operate the <6>
dial.
zz After selecting the images to send,
press the <M> button.
488
Sending Images to a Web Service
[Size to send].
4 Select
zz When YouTube is selected as the
destination, [Size to send] is not
displayed.
zz On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
[Send].
5 Select
zz On the screen after images are
sent, select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi
connection.
zz When the [Terms of use] screen
is displayed, thoroughly read the
message, then select [I Agree].
zz To scroll the screen, use the <W>
<X> keys.
489
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending a Specified Range of Images
Specify the range of images to send all the images in the range at
once.
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Send range].
the range of images.
3 Specify
zz Select the first image (start point).
zz Select the last image (end point).
ggImages will be selected and [X] will
appear.
zz To cancel the selection, repeat this
step.
zz You can press the <1> button and
turn the <6> dial to change the
number of images shown in the index
display.
the range.
4 Confirm
zz Press the <M> button.
490
Sending Images to a Web Service
[Size to send].
5 Select
zz On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
[Send].
6 Select
zz On the screen after images are
sent, select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi
connection.
zz When the [Terms of use] screen
is displayed, thoroughly read the
message, then select [I Agree].
zz To scroll the screen, use the <W>
<X> keys.
Sending All Images on the Card
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Send all card].
491
Sending Images to a Web Service
[Size to send].
3 Select
zz Set it as necessary.
zz On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
[Send].
4 Select
zz On the screen after images are
sent, select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi
connection.
zz When the [Terms of use] screen
is displayed, thoroughly read the
message, then select [I Agree].
zz To scroll the screen, use the <W>
<X> keys.
492
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Images that Match the Search Conditions
Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [Set image
search conditions] at once.
For [Set image search conditions], refer to “Filtering Images for
Playback” (p.313).
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Send all found].
[Size to send].
3 Select
zz Set it as necessary.
zz On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
493
Sending Images to a Web Service
[Send].
4 Select
zz On the screen after images are
sent, select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi
connection.
zz When the [Terms of use] screen
is displayed, thoroughly read the
message, then select [I Agree].
zz To scroll the screen, use the <W>
<X> keys.
494
Sending Images to a Web Service
ooWith a Wi-Fi connection to a Web service established, a picture cannot
be taken even if the camera’s shutter button is pressed.
ooWhen sending an image to a Web service other than CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY, a send error message may not be displayed even if the
image has not been sent to the Web service successfully. Since such
send errors can be checked on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY site,
check the error content, then try sending the image again.
ooDepending on the Web service, the type or number of images that can
be sent and the length of movies will be limited.
ooCertain images may not be able to be sent with [Send range], [Send all
card], or [Send all found].
ooWhen you reduce the image size, all images to be sent at the same time
are resized. Note that movies or b size still photos are not reduced.
oo[Reduced] is enabled only for still photos shot with cameras of the
same model as this camera. Still photos shot with other models are sent
without resizing.
ooWhen accessing CANON iMAGE GATEWAY from a computer or other
device, you can check the send history for the Web services that the
images were sent to.
ooTo terminate the Wi-Fi connection without sending an image, press the
<M> button on the screen for step 1.
ooWhen you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully
charged.
495
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
This section describes how to join a Wi-Fi network via an access point.
Checking the Type of Access Point
Determine whether the access point for the Wi-Fi connection is
compatible with WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), as described in the
access point instruction manual or other documentation.
zzWhen WPS is supported
The following two Wi-Fi connection methods are available.
Connection can be established easier with WPS (PBC mode).
WPS (PBC mode):
Follow the steps beginning on page 497.
WPS (PIN mode):
Follow the steps beginning on page 501.
zzWhen WPS is not supported
Follow the steps beginning on page 504. In this case, access point
encryption must be set to one of the following.
[Authentication]:
Open system, Shared key, or WPA/WPA2-PSK
[Encryption settings]:
WEP, TKIP, or AES
ooIf stealth functions of the access point are active, Wi-Fi connection
may be disabled. Deactivate stealth functions.
ooWhen connecting to a network that has a network administrator, ask the
administrator about the detailed setting procedures.
If the network you use filters by MAC address, register the MAC address of
the camera at the access point. The MAC address can be checked on the
[View info] screen (p.516).
496
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection with WPS (PBC Mode)
First, check the position of the WPS button and how long to press it.
It may take approx. one minute to establish a Wi-Fi connection.
If multiple access points are active nearby and you cannot establish a
Wi-Fi connection, try to establish the connection in [WPS (PIN mode)].
Wi-Fi settings to [Enable].
1 Set
zz See steps 1–4 on page 429.
[Wi-Fi function].
2 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the
[Wireless communication settings]
screen.
a nickname.
3 Register
zz If the [Nickname] screen is displayed,
register a nickname (p.430).
4 zzIf the history (p.509) is displayed,
Select an item.
switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>
keys.
zz Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to select an item.
497
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
[Register a device for
5 Select
connection].
zz When [q] (Connect to smartphone)
is selected, the screen on the left
is displayed. If Camera Connect
is already installed, select [Do not
display].
[Switch network].
6 Select
zz Displayed when [q], [D], or [l] is
selected.
7 Select [Connect with WPS].
For [Camera access point mode] displayed on the screen in step 7, see
page 508.
498
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
[WPS (PBC mode)].
8 Select
zz Select [OK].
to the access point via Wi9 Connect
Fi.
zz Press the access point’s WPS button.
zz Select [OK].
[Auto setting].
10 Select
zz Select [OK] to access the setting
screen for the Wi-Fi function.
zz If [Auto setting] results in an error
or if you want to specify the settings
manually, see page 535.
the settings for the Wi-Fi
11 Specify
function.
The IP address can only be set automatically in environments using DHCP
servers, or access points or routers with DHCP server functionality, and IP
addresses, etc. are set to be assigned automatically.
499
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
[qConnect to smartphone]
Go to step 9 on page 442.
[DRemote control (EOS Utility)]
Go to step 8 on page 463.
[lPrint from Wi-Fi printer]
Go to step 8 on page 470.
Registering CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY
Go to step 7 on page 483.
500
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection with WPS (PIN Mode)
First, check how to enter a PIN code on the access point.
It may take approx. one minute to establish a Wi-Fi connection.
Wi-Fi settings to [Enable].
1 Set
zz See steps 1–4 on page 429.
[Wi-Fi function].
2 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the
[Wireless communication settings]
screen.
a nickname.
3 Register
zz If the [Nickname] screen is displayed,
register a nickname (p.430).
4 zzIf the history (p.509) is displayed,
Select an item.
switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>
keys.
zz Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to select an item.
[Register a device for
5 Select
connection].
501
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
zz When [q] (Connect to smartphone)
is selected, the screen on the left
is displayed. If Camera Connect
is already installed, select [Do not
display].
[Switch network].
6 Select
zz Displayed when [q], [D], or [l] is
selected.
7 Select [Connect with WPS].
[WPS (PIN mode)].
8 Select
zz Select [OK].
502
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
the PIN code at the access
9 Specify
point.
zz At the access point, specify the PIN
code displayed on the camera screen.
zz Once you have entered the PIN code,
select [OK].
to the access point via Wi10 Connect
Fi.
zz Select [OK].
[Auto setting].
11 Select
zz Select [OK] to access the setting
screen for the Wi-Fi function.
zz If [Auto setting] results in an error
or if you want to specify the settings
manually, see page 535.
the settings for the Wi-Fi
12 Specify
function (p.500).
For [Camera access point mode] displayed in step 7, see page 508.
The IP address can only be set automatically in environments using DHCP
servers, or access points or routers with DHCP server functionality, and IP
addresses, etc. are set to be assigned automatically.
503
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection Manually
Establish a Wi-Fi connection by selecting the SSID (or ESS-ID) of the
access point for a Wi-Fi connection from a list of active access points
nearby.
Selecting the Access Point
Wi-Fi settings to [Enable].
1 Set
zz See steps 1–4 on page 429.
[Wi-Fi function].
2 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the
[Wireless communication settings]
screen.
a nickname.
3 Register
zz If the [Nickname] screen is displayed,
register a nickname (p.430).
an item.
4 Select
zz If the history (p.509) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>
keys.
zz Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to select an item.
[Register a device for
5 Select
connection].
504
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
[Switch network].
6 Select
zz Displayed when [q], [D], or [l] is
selected.
(1)
(2) (3)
the access point.
7 Select
zz Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the access point to connect to via WiFi from the list of access points.
(1) SSID
(2) An icon is displayed if the access point is encrypted
(3) Channel used
Refreshing and Manual Settings
zz Scroll down the screen in step 7 to display [Manual settings].
zz To search for access points again, select [Refresh].
zz To specify the settings for the access point manually, select [Manual
settings]. Enter the SSID using the virtual keyboard and then specify
the settings following the instructions displayed.
505
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
Entering the Access Point Password
zz Enter the password specified for the access point. For details on the
specified password, refer to the access point’s instruction manual.
zz The screens displayed in steps 8 to 9 below vary depending on the
authentication and encryption specified for the access point.
zz Go to step 10 when the [IP address set.] screen is displayed instead
of the screens for steps 8 to 9.
a key index.
8 Select
zz The [Key index] screen is displayed
only if WEP encryption is used by the
access point.
zz Select the key index number specified
for the access point.
zz Select [OK].
the password.
9 Enter
zz Enter the password using the virtual
keyboard (p.534).
506
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
Setting the IP Address
[Auto setting].
10 Select
zz Select [OK] to access the setting
screen for the Wi-Fi function.
zz If [Auto setting] results in an error
or if you want to specify the settings
manually, see page 535.
the settings for the Wi-Fi
11 Specify
function (p.500).
The IP address can only be set automatically in environments using DHCP
servers, or access points or routers with DHCP server functionality, and IP
addresses, etc. are set to be assigned automatically.
507
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
Send To Screen
A screen to select a destination may be displayed depending on the
Web service.
To register destinations or to specify the settings, you must use a
computer. For more information, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction
Manual.
zz When [m] (Email) or other service
is selected on the [Upload to Web
service] screen, the [Send to] screen
may be displayed.
zz Select the destination from the list of
registered destinations.
zz The procedures for setting up a
connection and sending images are
the same as those for other Web
services.
Camera Access Point Mode
Camera access point mode is a
connection mode for connecting the
camera directly to each device via Wi-Fi.
Displayed when [q], [D], or [l] is
selected in [Wi-Fi function].
508
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi
Follow these steps to reconnect to devices or Web services with
registered connection settings.
[Wi-Fi function].
1 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the
[Wireless communication settings]
screen.
an item.
2 Select
zz Select the item to connect to via Wi-Fi
from the displayed history. If the item
is not displayed, press the <Y> <Z>
keys to switch the screen.
zz If [Connection history] is set
to [Hide], the history will not be
displayed (p.533).
the connected device.
3 Operate
[q] Smartphone
zz Activate the smartphone’s Wi-Fi function, then start Camera
Connect.
zz If the smartphone’s connection destination has been changed,
restore the setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the
same access point as the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a smartphone via Wi-Fi,
“_Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
509
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi
[D] Computer
zz On the computer, start the EOS software.
zz If the computer’s connection destination has been changed,
restore the setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the
same access point as the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi,
“_ Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
[l] Printer
zz If the printer’s connection destination has been changed, restore
the setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same
access point as the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi,
“_ Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
For the connection history, up to three items appear in the order of
registration. When a connection setting is added, the oldest item will be
deleted from the history.
510
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi
Connecting to a Bluetooth-connected Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Camera Connect.
1 Start
zz Tap on the Camera Connect icon
on the smartphone to start the
application.
a Camera Connect function.
2 Select
zz Select the Camera Connect function
you want to use.
zz A Wi-Fi connection will be
automatically established.
zz In iOS, select [Join] when a message
is displayed to confirm camera
connection.
When a Wi-Fi connection is
established, the screen for the
selected function will appear.
zz For the Camera Connect functions,
see page 444.
511
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi
Registering Multiple Connection Settings
You can register up to 20 connection settings for the Wi-Fi function.
[Wi-Fi function].
1 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the
[Wireless communication settings]
screen.
an item.
2 Select
zz When the screen on the left appears,
press the <Y> <Z> keys to switch
the screen.
zz Select the item to newly connect to
via Wi-Fi from the screen on the left.
zz For details on [q] (Connect to
smartphone), see “Connecting to a
Smartphone via Wi-Fi from the [Wi-Fi
function] Menu” (p.427).
zz For [D] (Remote control (EOS
Utility)), see “Connecting to a
Computer via Wi-Fi” (p.461).
zz For details on [l] (Print from Wi-Fi
printer), see “Connecting to a Printer
via Wi-Fi” (p.469).
zz When sending images to a Web
service, see “Sending Images to a
Web Service” (p.481).
To delete connection settings, see page 513.
512
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings
Change or delete connection settings saved on the camera. To change
or delete the connection settings, terminate the Wi-Fi connection first.
[Wi-Fi function].
1 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the
[Wireless communication settings]
screen.
an item.
2 Select
zz When the screen on the left appears,
press the <Y> <Z> keys to switch
the screen.
zz From the screen on the left, select the
item for which to change or delete the
connection settings.
3 Select [Edit device information].
a device.
4 Select
zz Select the device for which to change
or delete the connection settings.
513
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings
or change the connection
5 Check
settings.
zz Select an item, then change or
delete the connection settings on the
displayed screen.
zzChange device nickname
You can change the nickname using the virtual keyboard (p.534).
zzViewable imgs (p.458)
Displayed when [q] (Connect to smartphone) is selected. Settings
will appear at the bottom of the screen.
zzErase connection information
You can delete connection settings saved on the camera.
For Web services, visit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website to
delete the connection settings.
514
Clearing Wireless Communication Settings to Default
All wireless communication settings can be deleted. By deleting the
wireless communication settings, you can prevent their information
from being exposed when you lend or give your camera to other
people.
1 Select [Clear settings].
[OK].
2 Select
ggWireless communication settings are
cleared to default, and the [Wireless
communication settings] screen will
reappear.
Performing [56: Clear all camera settings] does not delete the wireless
communication setting information.
515
View Info Screen
On the [View info] screen, you can check error details and the
camera’s MAC address.
[Wi-Fi function].
1 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the
[Wireless communication settings]
screen.
an item, then press the
2 Select
<B> button.
ggThe [View info] screen will appear.
zz When an error has occurred, press <0> to display the error
content.
516
Responding to Error Messages
When an error occurs, display the details of the error by following one
of the procedures below. Then, eliminate the cause of the error by
referring to the examples shown in this chapter.
zz On the [View info] screen, press <0> (p.516).
zz Select [Error details] on the [Wi-Fi on] screen.
Click the error code number’s page in the following chart to jump to the
corresponding page.
11 (p.518)
21 (p.519)
61 (p.522)
67 (p.524)
91 (p.525)
125 (p.526)
126 (p.526)
141 (p.526)
151 (p.527)
12 (p.518)
22 (p.520)
63 (p.523)
68 (p.525)
121 (p.525)
23 (p.521)
64 (p.523)
69 (p.525)
65 (p.524)
66 (p.524)
127 (p.526)
142 (p.526)
152 (p.527)
When an error occurs, [Err**] is displayed on the upper right of the [Wi-Fi
function] screen. It disappears when the camera’s power is set to <2>.
517
Responding to Error Messages
11: Connection target not found
zz In the case of [q], is Camera Connect running?
ggEstablish a connection using Camera Connect (p.442).
zz In the case of [l], is the power of the printer on?
ggTurn on the printer.
zz In the case of [D], is the EOS software running?
ggStart the EOS software and reestablish the connection (p.463).
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same
password for authentication?
ggThis error occurs if the passwords do not match when the
authentication method for encryption is set to [Open system].
The setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case
characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication
is set on the camera (p.506).
12: Connection target not found
zz Is the power of the target device and access point on?
ggTurn on the target device and access point, then wait a while. If a
connection still cannot be established, perform the procedures to
establish the connection again.
518
Responding to Error Messages
21: No address assigned by DHCP server
What to check on the camera
zz On the camera, IP address is set to [Auto setting]. Is this the
correct setting?
ggIf no DHCP server is used, specify the settings after setting the IP
address to [Manual setting] on the camera (p.535).
What to check on the DHCP server
zz Is the power of the DHCP server on?
ggTurn on the DHCP server.
zz Are there enough addresses for assignment by the DHCP
server?
ggIncrease the number of addresses assigned by the DHCP server.
ggRemove devices assigned addresses by the DHCP server from
the network to reduce the number of addresses in use.
zz Is the DHCP server working correctly?
ggCheck the DHCP server settings to make sure it is working
correctly as a DHCP server.
ggIf applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DHCP
server is available.
519
Responding to Error Messages
22: No response from DNS server
What to check on the camera
zz On the camera, does the DNS server’s IP address setting
match the server’s actual address?
ggSet the IP address to [Manual setting]. Then, on the camera, set
the IP address that matches the address of the DNS server used
(p.531, 535).
What to check on the DNS server
zz Is the power of the DNS server on?
ggTurn on the DNS server.
zz Are the DNS server settings for IP addresses and the
corresponding names correct?
ggOn the DNS server, make sure IP addresses and the
corresponding names are entered correctly.
zz Is the DNS server working correctly?
ggCheck the DNS server settings to make sure it is working correctly
as a DNS server.
ggIf applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DNS
server is available.
What to check on the network as a whole
zz Does the network that you are trying to connect to via Wi-Fi
include a router or similar device that serves as a gateway?
ggIf applicable, ask your network administrator for the network
gateway address and enter it on the camera (p.531, 535).
ggMake sure that the gateway address setting is correctly entered
on all network devices including the camera.
520
Responding to Error Messages
23: Device with same IP address exists on selected network
What to check on the camera
zz Do the camera and another device connected via Wi-Fi to the
same network have the same IP address?
ggChange the camera’s IP address to avoid using the same address
as another device on the network. Otherwise, change the IP
address of the device that has a duplicate address.
ggIf the camera’s IP address is set to [Manual setting] in network
environments using a DHCP server, change the setting to [Auto
setting] (p.507).
Responding to Error Messages 21–23
Also check the following points when responding to errors numbered
21–23.
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password
for authentication?
ggThis error occurs if the passwords do not match when the authentication
method for encryption is set to [Open system]. The setting is casesensitive, so check upper- and lower-case characters. Make sure that
the correct password for authentication is set on the camera (p.506).
521
Responding to Error Messages
61: Selected SSID wireless LAN network not found
zz Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the
camera and the antenna of the access point?
ggMove the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible
from the point of view of the camera (p.528).
What to check on the camera
zz Does the SSID set on the camera match that of the access
point?
ggCheck the SSID at the access point, then set the same SSID on
the camera (p.505).
What to check at the access point
zz Is the access point turned on?
ggTurn on the power of the access point.
zz If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of
the camera in use registered at the access point?
ggRegister the MAC address of the camera used to the access
point. The MAC address can be checked on the [View info]
screen (p.516).
522
Responding to Error Messages
63: Wireless LAN authentication failed
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same
authentication method?
ggThe camera supports the following authentication methods: [Open
system], [Shared key], and [WPA/WPA2-PSK] (p.496).
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same
password for authentication?
ggThe setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case
characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication
is set on the camera (p.506).
zz If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of
the camera in use registered at the access point?
ggRegister the MAC address of the camera used to the access
point. The MAC address can be checked on the [View info]
screen (p.516).
64: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same
encryption method?
ggThe camera supports the following encryption methods: WEP,
TKIP, and AES (p.496).
zz If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of
the camera in use registered at the access point?
ggRegister the MAC address of the camera used to the access
point. The MAC address can be checked on the [View info]
screen (p.516).
523
Responding to Error Messages
65: Wireless LAN connection lost
zz Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the
camera and the antenna of the access point?
ggMove the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible
from the point of view of the camera (p.528).
zz The Wi-Fi connection was lost for some reason, and the
connection cannot be restored.
ggThe following are possible reasons: excessive access to the
access point from another device, a microwave oven or similar
appliance in use nearby (interfering with IEEE 802.11b/g/n (2.4
GHz band)), or influence of rain or high humidity (p.528).
66: Incorrect wireless LAN password
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same
password for authentication?
ggThe setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case
characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication
is set on the camera (p.506).
67: Incorrect wireless LAN encryption method
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same
encryption method?
ggThe camera supports the following encryption methods: WEP,
TKIP, and AES (p.496).
zz If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of
the camera in use registered at the access point?
ggRegister the MAC address of the camera used to the access
point. The MAC address can be checked on the [View info]
screen (p.516).
524
Responding to Error Messages
68: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal. Retry from the
beginning.
zz Did you hold down the access point’s WPS (Wi-Fi Protected
Setup) button for the specified period of time?
ggHold down the WPS button for the period of time specified in the
access point’s instruction manual.
zz Are you trying to establish a connection near the access
point?
ggTry establishing the connection when both devices are within
reach of each other.
69: Multiple wireless LAN terminals have been found. Cannot
connect. Retry from the beginning.
zz Connection is in progress by other access points in
Pushbutton Connection mode (PBC mode) of WPS (Wi-Fi
Protected Setup).
ggWait a while before trying to establish the connection, or try to
establish a connection in PIN code connection mode (PIN mode)
(p.501).
91: Other error
zz A problem other than error code number 11 to 69 occurred.
ggTurn the camera’s power switch off and on.
121: Not enough free space on server
zz The target Web server does not have enough free space.
ggDelete unnecessary images on the Web server, check the free
space on the Web server, then try sending the data again.
525
Responding to Error Messages
125: Check the network settings
zz Is the network connected?
ggCheck the connection status of the network.
126: Could not connect to server
zz CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is under maintenance or load is
concentrated temporarily.
ggTry connecting to the Web service again later.
127: An error has occurred
zz A problem other than error code number 121 to 126 occurred
while the camera is connected to the Web service.
ggTry again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the Web service.
141: Printer is busy. Try connecting again.
zz Is the printer performing a printing process?
ggTry again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the printer after the
printing process is finished.
zz Is another camera connected to the printer via Wi-Fi?
ggTry again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the printer after the
Wi-Fi connection to the other camera has been terminated.
142: Could not acquire printer information. Reconnect to try
again.
zz Is the power of the printer on?
ggTry again to establish the Wi-Fi connection after turning on the
printer.
526
Responding to Error Messages
151:Transmission canceled
zz Automatic image transfer to the computer was somehow
interrupted.
ggTo resume automatic image transfer, set the camera’s power
switch to <2>, and then set it to <1>.
152:Card’s write protect switch is set to lock
zz Is the card’s write-protect switch set to the locked position?
ggSlide the card’s write-protect switch to the writing position.
527
Wireless Communication Function Notes
If the transmission rate drops, the connection is lost, or other problems
occur when using the wireless communication functions, try the
following corrective actions.
Distance Between the Camera and the Smartphone
If the camera is too far from the smartphone, a Wi-Fi connection may
not be established even when Bluetooth connection is possible. In such
a case, bring the camera and the smartphone closer together, then
establish a Wi-Fi connection.
Installation Location of Access Point Antenna
zz When using indoors, install the device in the room where you are
using the camera.
zz Install the device where people or objects do not come between
the device and the camera.
Nearby Electronic Devices
If the Wi-Fi transmission rate drops because of the influence of the
following electronic devices, stop using them or move further away
from the devices to transmit communication.
zz The camera communicates over Wi-Fi via IEEE 802.11b/g/n using radio
waves in the 2.4 GHz band. For this reason, the Wi-Fi transmission
rate will drop if there are Bluetooth devices, microwave ovens, cordless
telephones, microphones, smartphones, other cameras, or similar
devices operating on the same frequency band nearby.
528
Wireless Communication Function Notes
Cautions for Using Multiple Cameras
zz When connecting multiple cameras to one access point via Wi-Fi,
make sure the cameras’ IP addresses are different.
zz When multiple cameras are connected to one access point via WiFi, the transmission rate drops.
zz When there are multiple IEEE 802.11b/g/n (2.4 GHz band) access
points, leave a gap of five channels between each Wi-Fi channel
to reduce radio wave interference. For example, use channels 1, 6,
and 11, channels 2 and 7, or channels 3 and 8.
Using the Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
zz When [Bluetooth function] is set to [Remote] to use the
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1, the camera cannot be
connected to a smartphone via Bluetooth.
529
Security
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems
may occur.
zzTransmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor the Wi-Fi
transmissions and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
zzUnauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized
access such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity
to gain access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks
(where someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a
springboard to cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems).
It is recommended to make use of the systems and functions to
thoroughly secure your network, preventing these types of problems
from occurring.
530
Checking Network Settings
zzWindows
Open the Windows [Command Prompt], then type ipconfig/all and
press the <Enter> key.
In addition to the IP address assigned to the computer, the subnet
mask, gateway, and DNS server information are also displayed.
zzMac OS
In Mac OS X, open the [Terminal] application, enter ifconfig -a,
and press the <Return> key. The IP address assigned to the
computer is indicated in the [en0] item next to [inet], in the format
“***.***.***.***”.
* For information about the [Terminal] application, refer to the Mac OS X
help.
To avoid using the same IP address for the computer and other devices
on the network, change the rightmost number when setting up the IP
address assigned to the camera in the processes described on page
535.
Example: 192.168.1.10
531
[Wireless communication settings] Screen
On the [Wireless communication settings] screen, you can change
the wireless communication function settings.
Select [55: Wireless communication settings].
Wi-Fi settings
zz See the next page.
Wi-Fi function
The following Wi-Fi functions are
available:
zz Communicate with smartphone
zz Remote control (EOS Utility)
zz Print from Wi-Fi printer
zz Send images to Web service
Bluetooth function (p.436)
Displays the [Bluetooth function]
screen on which you can set or check
the Bluetooth functions.
Send images to smartphone (p.448)
While the camera is connected to a
smartphone, use this function to send
images stored in the camera to the
smartphone.
Nickname
You can change the nickname using the
virtual keyboard (p.534).
Clear settings (p.515)
Clear all wireless communication
settings.
532
[Wi-Fi settings] Screen
Wi-Fi
zz You can set whether to [Enable] or
[Disable] the wireless communication
function.
zz When the use of electronic devices
and wireless devices is prohibited,
such as on board airplanes or in
hospitals, set it to [Disable].
Password
Set to [None] to allow a Wi-Fi connection
to be established without a password
(except when connecting to an access
point via Wi-Fi).
Connection history
You can set whether to [Show] or
[Hide] the history of the Wi-Fi connected
devices.
Auto send images to computer
With the dedicated software Image
Transfer Utility 2, you can send
images on the camera to a computer
automatically (p.466).
Send to smartphone after shot
Your shots can be sent to a smartphone
automatically (p.446).
MAC address
You can check the MAC address of the
camera.
533
Virtual Keyboard Operation
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
Input area, for entering text
Cursor keys, for moving in the
input area
Current no. of characters/no.
available
Keyboard
(7) (8)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(9)
Switch input modes
Space
Delete a character in the input
area
Change the type of keyboard
Finish the text entry
zz Press the <W> <X> <Y> <Z> keys to move within 2 and 4–8.
zz Press <0> to confirm input or when switching input modes.
534
Setting the IP Address Manually
Set up the IP address settings manually. The items displayed vary
depending on the Wi-Fi function.
[Manual setting].
1 Select
zz Select [OK].
an item.
2 Select
zz Select an item to access the screen
for numerical input.
zz To use a gateway, select [Enable],
then select [Address].
the desired values.
3 Enter
zz Turn the <6> dial to move the input
position in the upper area and turn
the <5> dial to select the number.
Press <0> to enter the selected
number.
zz To set the entered values and return
to the screen for step 2, press the
<M> button.
535
Setting the IP Address Manually
[OK].
4 Select
zz When you have completed setting the
necessary items, select [OK].
zz If you are not sure what to enter, see
“Checking Network Settings” (p.531),
or ask the network administrator or
another person knowledgeable about
the network.
536
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Status Display
Wireless communication status can be checked on the camera screen
and LCD panel.
(2)
(1)
(3)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2)
(1)
Wi-Fi function
Bluetooth function
Wireless signal strength
Communication status
Not
connected
Wi-Fi function
Wi-Fi: Disable
Off
Wi-Fi: Enable
Connecting
Wireless
signal
strength
LCD Panel
Wi-Fi function
Not displayed
(Blinking)
Connected
Sending data
Connection error
(fg)
(Blinking)
537
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Status Display
Bluetooth Function Indicator
Bluetooth
function
Other than
[Disable]
[Disable]
538
Connection
status
Bluetooth
connected
Bluetooth not
connected
Bluetooth not
connected
Screen
LCD Panel
Not displayed
Not displayed
7
Custom Functions /
My Menu
You can fine-tune camera functions and change the
functionality of buttons and dials to suit your shooting
preferences with Custom Functions and control customization.
You can also add menu items and Custom Functions that you
adjust frequently to My Menu tabs.
539
Tab Menus: Customization
zzC.Fn1
p.542
p.542
p.543
p.543
p.544
p.545
p.546
zzC.Fn2
p.547
p.547
p.548
zzC.Fn3
p.548
p.548
p.549
p.549
540
Tab Menus: Customization
zzC.Fn4
p.555
p.555
p.561
p.555
zzC.Fn5
p.550
p.551
p.551
p.552
p.553
zzC.Fn6
p.554
541
Custom Function SettingsN
You can customize camera features on the [8] tab to suit your
shooting preferences. Any settings you change from default values are
displayed in blue.
C.Fn1
Exposure level increments
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure
compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc.
[1/3] 1/3-stop
[1/2] 1/2-stop
When [1/2-stop] is set, the display will be as shown below.
ISO speed setting increments
You can change the manual ISO speed setting increments to a whole-stop.
[1/3] 1/3-stop
[1/1] 1-stop
ooEven if [1-stop] is set, ISO speed will be automatically set in 1/3-stop
increments when ISO Auto is set.
ooEven when [1-stop] is set, you can set ISO 40000 (for still photo
shooting).
542
Custom Function Settings
Bracketing auto cancel
Specify whether AEB and white balance bracketing settings are canceled
when you set the power switch to <2> or switch to movie recording.
[ON] Enable
[OFF] Disable
Bracketing sequence
The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can
be changed.
[0–+] 0 → – → +
[–0+] – → 0 → +
[+0–] + → 0 → –
0
–
: Standard exposure 0
: Decreased exposure –
White Balance Bracketing
B/A Direction
M/G Direction
: Standard white balance 0 : Standard white balance
: Blue bias
– : Magenta bias
+
: Increased exposure +
: Amber bias
AEB
+
: Green bias
543
Custom Function Settings
Number of bracketed shots
The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can be
changed from the default of 3 shots, to 2, 5, or 7 shots.
When [81: Bracketing sequence] is set to [0, -, +], the bracketed shots
will be taken as shown in the table below.
[3] 3 shots
[2] 2 shots
[5] 5 shots
[7] 7 shots
(1-stop/step increments)
1st Shot
2nd Shot 3rd Shot
4th Shot
5th Shot
3:3 shots Standard (0)
-1
2:2 shots Standard (0)
±1
5:5 shots Standard (0)
-2
-1
+1
+2
7:7 shots Standard (0)
-3
-2
-1
+1
6th Shot
7th Shot
+2
+3
+1
If [2 shots] is set, you can select the + or - side when setting the AEB
range. With WB bracketing, the 2nd shot will be adjusted toward either the
B/A or M/G direction.
544
Custom Function Settings
Safety shift
If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be
obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will automatically
change the manually selected setting to obtain the standard exposure.
When set to [Shutter speed/Aperture], applies to [s] and [f] mode.
When set to [ISO speed], applies to [d], [s], and [f] mode.
[OFF] Disable
[Tv/Av] Shutter speed/Aperture
[ISO] ISO speed
ooUnder [z3: zISO speed settings], even if [ISO speed range] or
[Min. shutter spd.] is changed from the default setting, safety shift will
override it if the standard exposure cannot be obtained.
ooThe minimum and maximum limits for the safety shift with the ISO speed
are determined by [Auto range] (p.86). However, if the manually set
ISO speed exceeds the [Auto range], the safety shift will take effect up
or down to the manually set ISO speed.
ooSafety shift will take effect as necessary even when flash is used.
545
Custom Function Settings
Same exposure for new aperture
Maximum aperture may decrease (the lowest f/number may increase) in
[a] mode (manual exposure shooting) with ISO speed set manually (except
when set to ISO Auto) if you 1. Change lenses, 2. Attach an extender, or 3.
Use a zoom lens with a variable maximum aperture. This function prevents
the corresponding underexposure by adjusting ISO speed or shutter speed
(Tv) automatically to maintain the same exposure as before 1, 2, or 3.
[OFF] Disable
[ISO] ISO speed
[ISO/Tv] ISO speed/Shutter speed
[Tv] Shutter speed
ooDoes not respond to changes in effective aperture from changes in
magnification when macro lenses are used.
ooCannot provide the same exposure as before 1, 2, or 3 if [ISO speed]
is set and the exposure cannot be maintained at speeds in [ISO speed
range].
ooCannot provide the same exposure as before 1, 2, or 3 if [Shutter
speed] is set and the exposure cannot be maintained at speeds in [82:
Set shutter speed range].
ooStandard exposure is updated to the exposure at the moment the
camera turns off if the camera turns off (as by setting the power switch to
<2>) while maintaining exposure after you have performed 1, 2, or 3.
ooAlso responds to changes in the highest f/number (minimum aperture).
ooThe original exposure setting is restored if you perform 1, 2, or 3 with [ISO
speed] or [Shutter speed] set and do not adjust ISO speed, shutter
speed, or aperture before returning the camera to the original state,
before 1, 2, or 3.
ooShutter speed may change to maintain exposure if the ISO speed
increases to an expanded ISO speed when [ISO speed] is set.
546
Custom Function Settings
C.Fn2
Set shutter speed range
You can set the shutter speed range. In [t], [s] and [a] mode, you can
set the shutter speed manually within your specified range. In [d] and [f]
mode, or in [t] mode with shutter speed set to [AUTO], the shutter speed
is set automatically within your specified range (except for movie shooting).
Select [OK] to register the setting.
[Lowest speed]
Can be set in a range of 30 sec.–1/4000 sec.
[Highest speed]
Can be set in a range of 1/8000 sec.–15 sec.
Set aperture range
You can set the aperture range. In [t], [f], [a], and [BULB] mode,
you can set the aperture manually within your specified range. In [d] and
[s] mode, or in [t] mode with aperture set to [AUTO], the aperture is
set automatically within your specified range. Select [OK] to register the
setting.
[Max. aperture (Min. f/)]
Can be set in a range of f/1.0–f/64.
[Min. aperture (Max. f/)]
Can be set in a range of f/91–f/1.4.
The available aperture range varies depending on the lens’s minimum and
maximum aperture.
547
Custom Function Settings
AE lock metering mode after focus
For each metering mode, you can set
whether to lock the exposure (AE lock)
after achieving focus with One-Shot AF
by pressing the shutter button halfway.
The exposure will be locked while you
keep pressing the shutter button halfway.
Checkmark [X] the metering modes for
when AE lock is to be applied. Select a
metering mode [q/w/r/e], then
press <0> to append a checkmark
[X]. Select [OK] to register the setting.
C.Fn3
Dial direction during Tv/Av
Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture can be
reversed.
In the [a] shooting mode, the turning direction of the <6> and <5>
dials will be reversed. In other shooting modes, the turning direction of only
the <6> dial will be reversed. The <5> dial’s turning direction in the [a]
mode and the turning direction to set the exposure compensation in the [d],
[s], and [f] modes will be the same.
[ ] Normal
[
] Reverse direction
Control ring rotation
RF lens and mount adapter control ring turning direction when setting the
shutter speed and aperture can be reversed.
[ ] Normal
[
] Reverse direction
548
Custom Function Settings
Focus ring rotation
RF lens focusing ring turning direction can be reversed.
[ ] Normal
[
] Reverse direction
RF lens MF focus ring sensitivity
RF lens focusing ring sensitivity can be set.
[
] Varies with rotation speed
[
] Linked to rotation degree
C.Fn4
For details on the [84] tab, see “Customizing Operations” (p.555).
549
Custom Function Settings
C.Fn5
Add cropping information
Adding cropping information displays vertical lines for your specified aspect
ratio, so that you can compose shots as if shooting with a medium- or largeformat camera (6×6 cm, 4×5 inch, and so on).
When you shoot, instead of cropping images recorded to the card, the
camera adds aspect ratio information to images for cropping in Digital Photo
Professional (EOS software).
You can import images to a computer and, in Digital Photo Professional,
easily crop images to the aspect ratio set at the time of shooting.
[OFF] Off
[6:7] Aspect ratio 6:7
[6:6] Aspect ratio 6:6
[5:6] Aspect ratio 10:12
[3:4] Aspect ratio 3:4
[5:7] Aspect ratio 5:7
[4:5] Aspect ratio 4:5
ooCropping information is only added when [z1: zCropping/aspect
ratio] is set to [Full-frame].
ooJPEGs are not saved at the cropped size if you process RAW images
with cropping information on the camera (p.346). In this case, RAW
processing produces JPEGs with cropping information.
550
Custom Function Settings
Default Erase option
You can set the default option in the erase menu (p.335) accessed by
pressing the <L> button during image playback or review after shooting.
You can simply press <0> to erase the image immediately.
[ ] [Cancel] selected
[ ] [Erase]/[Erase1+JPEG] selected
[
] [Erase1] selected
[
] [EraseJPEG] selected
Be careful not to erase images accidentally when an option other than
[Cancel] is set.
Release shutter without lens
You can specify whether shooting still photos or movies is possible without
a lens attached.
[OFF] Disable
[ON] Enable
551
Custom Function Settings
Retract lens on power off
This is to set the lens retraction mechanism for when a gear-driven
STM lens (such as EF40mm f/2.8 STM) is attached to the camera. You
can set whether to retract the extended lens automatically when the
camera’s power switch is set to <2>.
[ON] Enable
[OFF] Disable
ooWith auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting.
ooBefore detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.
When [Enable] is set, this function takes effect regardless of the lens’s
focus mode switch setting (AF or MF).
552
Custom Function Settings
Add IPTC information
Registering IPTC (International Press Telecommunications Council)
information to the camera from EOS Utility (EOS software) enables you
to record (add) this information to JPEG/RAW still photos at the time of
shooting. This is helpful in file management and other tasks using the
IPTC information.
For instructions on registering IPTC information to the camera and
details on the information you can register, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual.
[OFF] Disable
[ON] Enable
IPTC information is not added when you shoot movies.
ooDuring playback, you can check whether IPTC information was added.
ooYou can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to check IPTC
information in images.
ooIPTC information registered to the camera is not erased if you select
[86: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] (p.554), but the setting changes
to [Disable].
553
Custom Function Settings
C.Fn6
Clear all Custom Functions (C.Fn)
Selecting [86: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] clears all Custom
Function settings.
Customized operations for [84] are not cleared if you perform [86: Clear
all Custom Func. (C.Fn)]. Note that although information added using
[85: Add IPTC information] is retained, the setting changes to [Disable].
554
Customizing OperationsN
You can assign frequently used functions to camera buttons or dials
according to your preferences for easy operations.
an item on the [84] tab.
1 Select
zz [Customize buttons]:
Assign functions to buttons, such as
<V> or <p>.
zz [Customize dials]:
Assign functions to the <6> <5>
dials or control ring (<T>).
zz [Customize M-Fn bar] (p.561):
Assign functions to the <m> bar.
a camera control.
2 Select
zz With [Customize buttons], a button
can be assigned to activate one
function when you are shooting still
photos and a different function for
movies.
a function to assign.
3 Specify
zz Press <0> to return to the screen
in step 2.
zz Press the <M> button to exit.
Customized operations are not cleared if you select [86: Clear all
Custom Func. (C.Fn)]. To clear the settings, select [84: Clear
customized settings].
555
Customizing Operations
Functions Available for Buttons
Function
L
Metering and AF start
k
k
k
k
AF stop
k
k
k
AE lock, AF stop
k
k
k
AF point selection
k
k
k
Direct AF point selection
AF
Set AF point to center
k
k
k
Direct AF method selection*1
k
k
k
One-Shot AFzServo AF*1
k
k
k
Touch & drag AF
k
k
k
Eye Detection AF*1
k
k
k
k
k
k
AE lock
k
k
k
AE lock (hold)
k
k
k
k
k
k
Flash function settings*1
k
k
k
FE lock*1
k
k
k
Movies
k
k
k
k
k
Focus guide
Metering start
Exposure
AE lock (while button pressed)
k
AE lock/FE lock*1
Exposure compensation
)
(hold button, turn
Set ISO speed (hold button, turn
Movies
556
k
k
Pause Movie Servo AF*2
)
Customizing Operations
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
557
Customizing Operations
Function
Dial function settings
L
k
Press buttons directly
Short press: LCD information switching
Long press: LCD illumination
k
LCD panel illumination
k
k
k
LCD panel information switching
k
k
k
Shooting mode settings
k
k
k
k
Menu
Depth-of-field preview*1
k
k
k
Reset selected item in Fv mode*1
k
k
k
Reset Tv/Av/O/ISO in Fv mode*1
k
k
k
Quick Control screen
k
k
k
Magnify/Reduce
k
k
k
Menu display
k
k
k
Image quality*1
k
k
k
One-touch image quality setting*1
k
k
k
One-touch image quality (hold)*1
k
k
k
Picture Style
k
k
k
Protect
k
k
k
Rating
k
k
k
Select folder
k
k
k
Maximize screen brightness (temporary)
k
k
k
Display off
k
k
k
Switch between viewfinder/screen
k
k
k
Eco mode
k
k
k
Wi-Fi function
k
k
k
No function (disabled)
k
k
k
*1: Cannot be assigned as a function available when shooting movies.
*2: Cannot be assigned as a function available when shooting still photos.
558
k
k
Switch to Custom shooting mode
9
k
Short press: LCD illumination
Long press: LCD information switching
Customizing Operations
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
<
> stands for “AF stop button” provided on super telephoto lenses
equipped with Image Stabilizer.
559
Customizing Operations
Functions Available for Dials
Function
6
5
Shutter speed setting in M mode
k
k
Aperture setting in M mode
k
Set ISO speed (5during metering)
k
k
Change aperture (hold metering button)
k
Change shutter speed (hold metering button)
k
Set ISO speed (hold metering button)
k
Exposure compensation (hold metering button)
k
Change aperture value
k
Change shutter speed
k
Set ISO speed
k
Exposure compensation
No function (disabled)
<T>: Control ring on RF lenses and mount adapters
560
T
k
k
k
k
Customizing Operations
Customizing the M-Fn (Multi-Function) Bar
1 Select [84: Customize M-Fn bar].
[z] (for use when shooting)
2 Select
or [x] (for use during playback).
zz You can assign different functions to
each.
a function to assign.
3 Select
zz Selecting [z] (for shooting) or [x]
(for playback) displays a screen of
available functions. From the list,
select functions to assign.
zz Depending on your selected function,
different functions can be assigned to
swiping <m> or tapping each end.
561
Customizing Operations
functions to swiping <m>
4 Assign
or tapping each end.
] (swipe), [
] (tap
zz Selecting [
left end), or [
] (tap right end)
displays a screen to assign functions.
zz Select options to assign to each
operation.
zzzM-Fn bar safety lock
To prevent unintended <m> operations during shooting, safety
lock is set by default. Note that operations are always possible
during playback.
●●To activate <m> during shooting, press the left end of <m>
] is displayed in white.
until [
●●To deactivate <m>, press the left end of <m> until [
] is
displayed in white.
●●<m> is deactivated automatically if not used within about 10
seconds.
Disabling Safety Lock
Disable safety lock if you prefer to keep
<m> activated during shooting.
zz To change the setting, select [Disable
(always available)] and press <0>
to select the radio button.
562
Customizing Operations
zzFull Cover Setting
When [Full cover setting] is enabled, you can access the M-Fn bar
customization screen by fully covering <m>.
●●To configure this setting, press the <B> button on the screen in
step 2.
ooIf you prefer not to use <m> at all, select [Not assigned] in step 3.
ooYour current action is indicated on the screen when you use <m>.
ooTo assign your preferred function to bar operations, select [User
customization] when assigning functions. When selecting [User
customization], you can also select the function to use as the basis of
user customization by pressing the <B> button on the screen in step
4.
563
Customizing Operations
Functions Available for the M-Fn Bar
Function
z
x
ISO speed
ISO speed
White balance
White balance selection
Color temperature setting
Check focus/
display info
Magnify/reduce by swiping
Movie
recording
Sound-recording level
Volume
Aperture setting
Flexiblepriority AE
Select by swiping [t]
AF
Set autofocus method
User
Manual Selection
customization
Function
Swipe to browse images
shortcut
Image
Swipe to browse images
browsing
Change value/selected item
Auto ISO speed
Custom ISO speed (***)
Change value/selected item
Auto: Ambience 89 White
Custom white balance: (***)
White balance shift/bracketing
Change value/selected item
Magnify / reduce
Focus guide
MF peaking
Electronic level
Histogram
Change value/selected item
MF peaking
Focus guide
Pause Movie Servo AF
Electronic level
Histogram
Change value/selected item
Reset all items [t]
Reset selected item [t]
Select *** [t]
Change value/selected item
Eye Detection AF
AF frame size
Touch & drag AF settings
Focus guide
Manual Selection
Rating
Protect
Previous image
Next image
* [Not assigned] is also available as a function. For [
[ No function (disabled)] is also available.
564
], [
], and [
],
Tab Menus: My Menu
p.566
p.569
p.569
p.570
565
Registering My MenuN
Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom
Functions whose settings you change frequently.
Creating and Adding My Menu Tab
1 Select [Add My Menu tab].
[OK].
2 Select
zz You can create up to five My Menu
tabs by repeating steps 1 and 2.
Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab(s)
1 Select [MY MENU*: Configure].
566
Registering My Menu
2 Select [Select items to register].
the desired items.
3 Register
zz Select the item to be set, then press
<0>.
zz Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog.
zz You can register up to six items.
zz To return to the screen in step 2,
press the <M> button.
My Menu Tab Settings
You can sort and delete items under
the menu tab, and rename or delete the
menu tab.
zzSort registered items
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select
[Sort registered items] and select the item whose order you want
to change. Then press <0>. With [z] displayed, press the <W>
<X> keys to change the order, then press <0>.
zzDelete selected items / Delete all items on tab
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete selected items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items on tab] deletes all
the registered items under the tab.
567
Registering My Menu
zzDelete tab
You can delete the current My Menu tab. Select [Delete tab] to
delete the [MY MENU*] tab.
zzRename tab
You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*].
1 Select [Rename tab].
text.
2 Enter
zz Press the <L> button to delete any
unnecessary characters.
zz Use the <V> cross keys or <5>
dial to select a character, then press
<0>.
zz By selecting [ ], you can change the
input mode.
zz You can enter up to 16 characters.
input.
3 Confirm
zz Press the <M> button, then press
[OK].
568
Registering My Menu
Deleting all My Menu tabs / Deleting all items
You can delete all the created My Menu
tabs or My Menu items registered under
them.
zzDelete all My Menu tabs
You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select
[Delete all My Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY
MENU5] will be deleted and the [9] tab will revert to its default.
zzDelete all items
You can delete all the items registered under the [MY MENU1] to
[MY MENU5] tabs. The tab(s) will remain. When [Delete all items]
is selected, all the items registered under all the created tabs will be
deleted.
If you perform [Delete tab] or [Delete all My Menu tabs], tab names
renamed with [Rename tab] will also be deleted.
569
Registering My Menu
Menu Display Settings
You can select [Menu display] to set the
menu screen that is to appear first when
you press the <M> button.
zzNormal display
Displays the last displayed menu screen.
zzDisplay from My Menu tab
Displays with the [9] tab selected.
zzDisplay only My Menu tab
Only the [9] tab is displayed. (The [z], [2], [3], [5], and [8]
tabs will not be displayed.)
570
8
Reference
This chapter provides reference information on camera
features.
571
Software Overview
You can download the latest version of EOS software or other
dedicated software from the Canon website.
Downloading and Installing the Software
When using EOS software or other dedicated software, use the latest
version available. To download it, you will need to enter the serial
number on the bottom of the camera.
ooDo not connect the camera to a computer before you install the
software. The software will not be installed correctly.
ooYou cannot install the EOS software to a computer without an
Internet connection.
ooEven if a previous version of the software is installed on your computer,
follow the procedure below to install the latest version. (The previous
version will be overwritten.)
the software.
1 Download
zz Connect to the Internet from a computer and access the
following Canon website.
ggwww.canon.com/icpd
zz Select your country or region of residence and download the
software.
zz Decompress it on the computer.
For Windows :
Click the displayed installer file to start the installer.
For Macintosh :
A dmg file will be created and displayed. Follow the steps
below to startup the installer.
572
Software Overview
(1) Double-click the dmg file.
ggA drive icon and installer file will appear on the desktop.
If the installer file does not appear, double-click the drive icon
to display it.
(2) Double-click the installer file.
ggThe installer starts.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.
Downloading the Software Instruction Manuals
Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the
Canon website to your computer.
zzSoftware Instruction Manual Download Site
ggwww.canon.com/icpd
ooTo view the Instruction Manuals (PDF files), an Adobe PDF viewing
software such as Adobe Acrobat Reader DC (most recent version
recommended) is required.
ooAdobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded for free from the Internet.
ooDouble-click the downloaded Instruction Manual (PDF file) to open it.
ooTo learn how to use PDF viewing software, refer to the software’s Help
section.
573
Importing Images to a Computer
You can use EOS software to import images from the camera to a
computer. There are two ways to do this.
Importing by Connecting the Camera to the Computer
1 Install the software (p.572).
the camera to the
2 Connect
computer.
zz Use the interface cable included with
the camera.
zz When connecting the cable to the
camera, use the cable protector
(p.37) and insert the plug in the
digital terminal.
zz Insert the other end of the cable
into the computer’s USB terminal
(Type-C).
EOS Utility to import the
3 Use
images.
zz Refer to the EOS Utility Instruction
Manual.
With Wi-Fi connection established, the camera cannot communicate with
the computer even if they are connected with an interface cable.
574
Importing Images to a Computer
Importing Images with a Card Reader
You can use a card reader to import images to a computer.
1 Install the software (p.572).
2 Insert the card into the card reader.
Digital Photo Professional to
3 Use
import the images.
zz Refer to the Digital Photo Professional
Instruction Manual.
When importing images from the camera to a computer with a card reader
without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to the
computer.
575
Charging a Battery in the Camera
Using USB Power Adapter PD-E1 (sold separately), you can charge
Battery Pack LP-E6N without removing it from the camera. Note that
Battery Pack LP-E6 cannot be charged this way. Also, charging
will stop if you operate the camera.
the USB power adapter.
1 Connect
zz With the camera’s power switch to
<2>, insert the USB power adapter
plug fully into the digital terminal.
the power cord.
2 Connect
zz Connect the power cord to the USB
power adapter and plug the other end
into a power outlet.
ggCharging begins, and the access
lamp (1) is lit in green. The LCD panel
indicates that charging is in progress.
zz When charging is finished, the access
lamp turns off and [FULL] is indicated
on the LCD panel. Unplug the power
cord and disconnect the USB power
adapter from the camera.
(1)
ooTo protect batteries and keep them in optimal condition, do not charge
continuously for more than 24 hours.
ooIn case of charging problems, the access lamp blinks in green, [Err] is
displayed on the LCD panel, and a protective circuit stops charging. In
this case, unplug the power cord, reattach the battery, and wait a few
minutes before plugging it in again. If the problem persists, contact your
dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
576
Charging a Battery in the Camera
ooIf the access lamp does not light up, try unplugging the USB power
adapter and plugging it in again.
ooThe charging time required and the amount charged vary depending on
ambient temperature and remaining capacity.
ooIf the battery’s remaining capacity (p.387) is approx. 90% or higher, the
battery will not be recharged.
ooFor safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5‒10°C / 41‒50°F)
will take longer.
ooBatteries are not charged when the camera is connected via Wi-Fi or
when the card slot cover is open.
577
Using a Battery Grip
Featuring buttons and dials for vertical shooting, Battery Grip BG-E22
(sold separately) is an EOS R accessory that can power the camera
with two batteries and charge LP-E6N via a USB power adapter (sold
separately).
the contact covers.
1 Remove
zz Remove the contact covers on the
(1)
bottom of the camera (1) and on the
battery grip (2), (3).
(2)
(3)
zz Attach the battery grip contact cover
(2) to (3) to store it.
zz Attach the camera contact cover (1)
to the battery grip as shown at left.
578
Using a Battery Grip
the battery compartment
2 Remove
cover.
zz Turn the camera off and remove the
cover.
zz With the cover off, remove the battery
(p.43).
zz Attach the cover to the battery grip.
zz To remove the cover, slide the lever
to release it, following the attachment
procedure in reverse.
and lock the battery grip.
3 Attach
zz Insert the battery grip contacts into
the camera and turn the attach/detach
dial to lock the battery grip in place.
579
Using a Battery Grip
4 Remove the battery magazine.
ooWhen reattaching the battery compartment cover to the camera, attach it
opened to at least 90°.
ooDo not touch the camera or battery grip contacts.
580
Using a Battery Grip
Attaching Batteries
the batteries.
1 Attach
zz Insert the batteries as shown.
zz When only one battery is used, it can
be inserted in either position.
zz To secure the batteries, push in the
direction of the arrows until they click
into place.
zz To remove the batteries, press the
battery magazine lever in the direction
of the arrow.
the battery magazine.
2 Attach
zz Insert the battery magazine all the
way in to secure it.
581
Using a Battery Grip
ooWhen attaching batteries, make sure the electrical contacts are clean.
Wipe off any dirt on the contacts with a soft cloth.
ooAttach batteries after attaching the battery grip to the camera. If the
battery grip is attached to the camera with batteries already attached, it
may prevent correct display of battery check results.
ooBefore removing the battery grip, turn the camera off and remove the
batteries.
ooReattach the protective covers for the camera and battery grip contacts
after removing the battery grip. If the battery grip will not be used for
some time, remove the batteries.
ooIf a battery communication error message is displayed when a battery
grip is attached, follow the instructions in the message. If the camera
loses power, reinstall the battery magazine and restart the camera.
Using a Household Power Outlet
OPEN
the DC coupler.
1 Attach
zz Attach DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold
separately) the same way as the
batteries.
zz Pass the DC coupler cord through the
battery magazine cord groove.
zz Insert the battery magazine all the
way in to secure it.
582
Using a Battery Grip
the battery magazine.
2 Attach
zz Guide the end of the cord out of the
cord hole.
the DC coupler to the AC
3 Connect
adapter.
zz Securely connect the DC coupler’s
plug to the connector of AC Adapter
AC-E6 (sold separately).
the power cord.
4 Connect
zz Connect the power cord to the AC
adapter and insert the power plug into
a power outlet.
ooWhile the camera is on, do not connect or disconnect the power cord or
connector, and do not remove the battery magazine.
ooAvoid getting the DC coupler cord caught between the battery grip and
battery magazine.
583
Using a Battery Grip
Button and Dial Operations
zz To use the buttons and dials, turn the
vertical-grip operation switch (4) to
ON.
zz The buttons and dials are used the
same way as corresponding buttons
and dials on the camera.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(8)
(6)
(7)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
584
Shutter button
<B> Multi-function button
<6> Main dial
Vertical-grip operation switch
<p> AF start button
(6)
(7)
(8)
<A> AE lock/FE lock button
<S/u> AF point/Index/Magnify/
Reduce button
<5> Quick control dial
Using a Battery Grip
Using a Flash with a PC Sync Cord
zz The PC terminal enables you to use
flash units with a PC sync cord.
zz The PC sync cord can be used
regardless of polarity.
zz When configuring settings, use
approx. 1/60–1/30 sec. as a guideline
for sync speed. Confirm in advance
that the flash unit is synced correctly.
Do not connect flash units with an output voltage of 250 V or more to the
PC terminal.
You can use one flash unit attached to the camera’s hot shoe and another
connected to the PC terminal at the same time.
585
Using a Battery Grip
Charging Batteries in the Battery Grip
Using USB Power Adapter PD-E1, you can charge LP-E6N batteries
without removing them from the battery grip.
ooYou can also charge a single LP-E6N battery at one time. Or, you can
charge the battery grip by itself.
ooLP-E6 cannot be charged this way. If LP-E6N and LP-E6 batteries are
both attached, neither will be charged.
ooCharging stops if you operate the camera.
the USB power adapter.
1 Connect
zz With the camera’s power switch to
<2>, insert the USB power adapter
plug fully into the battery grip terminal.
the batteries.
2 Charge
zz Connect the power cord to the USB
power adapter and plug the other end
into a power outlet.
CHARGE
586
ggCharging begins, and the charge
lamp lights up.
zz When charging is finished, the charge
lamp turns off. Unplug the power
cord and disconnect the USB power
adapter from the battery grip.
Using a Battery Grip
ooTo protect batteries and keep them in optimal condition, do not charge
continuously for more than 24 hours.
ooIn case of charging problems, the charge lamp blinks and a protective
circuit stops charging. In this case, unplug the power cord, reattach the
battery, and wait a few minutes before plugging it in again. If the problem
persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
ooIf the charge lamp does not light up, try unplugging the USB power
adapter and plugging it in again.
ooThe charging time required and the amount charged vary depending on
ambient temperature and remaining capacity.
ooIf the battery’s remaining capacity (p.387) is approx. 90% or higher, the
battery will not be recharged.
ooFor safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5‒10°C / 41‒50°F)
will take longer.
ooBatteries are charged one after another when two are loaded.
587
Troubleshooting Guide
If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Power-Related Problems
Batteries cannot be charged with the charger.
●●If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.387) is 94% or higher, the
battery will not be recharged.
●●Do not use any battery other than genuine Canon Battery Pack LPE6N/LP-E6.
The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.
●●If (1) the battery charger or battery has a problem or (2)
communication with the battery failed (with a non-Canon battery
pack), the protection circuit will stop charging, and the charge
lamp will blink in orange at a constant high speed. In the case
of (1), unplug the charger’s power plug from the power outlet.
Detach and reattach the battery to the charger. Wait a few minutes,
then reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If the problem
persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
The charger’s lamp does not blink.
●●If the internal temperature of the battery attached to the charger
is high, the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons
(lamp off). During charging, if the battery’s temperature becomes
high for any reason, charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks).
When the battery temperature goes down, charging will resume
automatically.
588
Troubleshooting Guide
Batteries cannot be charged with the USB power adapter
(sold separately).
●●Batteries are not charged while the camera’s power switch is set to
<1>.
●●Note that Battery Pack LP-E6 cannot be charged this way.
●●If the battery’s remaining capacity is approx. 90% or higher, the
battery will not be recharged.
●●Operating the camera will stop charging in progress.
●●When using a battery grip, insert the USB power adapter plug fully
into the battery grip terminal to charge the batteries.
The access lamp blinks during charging with the USB power
adapter.
●●In case of charging problems, the access lamp blinks in green and
a protective circuit stops charging. In this case, unplug the power
cord, reattach the battery, and wait a few minutes before plugging
it in again. If the problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest
Canon Service Center.
The access lamp is not lit during charging with the USB power
adapter.
●●Try unplugging the USB power adapter and plugging it in again.
The camera is not activated even when
the power switch is set to <1>.
●●Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.43).
●●Make sure the battery is installed properly in the camera (p.43).
●●Recharge the battery (p.40).
●●Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.44).
589
Troubleshooting Guide
The access lamp still lights or blinks even
when the power switch is <2>.
●●If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the
card, the access lamp will remain on or continue to blink for a few
seconds. When the image recording is complete, the power will
turn off automatically.
[Does this battery/do these batteries display
the Canon logo?] is displayed.
●●Do not use any battery other than genuine Canon Battery Pack LPE6N/LP-E6.
●●Remove and install the battery again (p.43).
●●If the electrical contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
●●Use a fully-charged battery (p.40).
●●The battery performance may have degraded. See [53: Battery
info.] to check the battery’s recharge performance level (p.387). If
the battery performance is poor, replace the battery with a new one.
●●The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the
following operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
• Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth (wireless communication) function.
The camera turns off by itself.
●●Auto power off is in effect. To deactivate auto power off, set [Auto
power off] under [52: Power saving] to [Disable] (p.377).
●●Even if [Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the screen and
viewfinder will still turn off after the camera is left idle for the time
set in [Display off] and [Viewfinder off], but the camera will
remain on.
●●Set [52: Eco mode] to [Off].
590
Troubleshooting Guide
Shooting-Related Problems
The lens cannot be attached.
●●To attach EF or EF-S lenses, you will need a mount adapter. The
camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.
No images can be shot or recorded.
●●Make sure the card is properly inserted (p.44).
●●Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the Write/Erase setting
(p.44).
●●If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to
make space (p.44, 335).
●●Shooting is not possible if the AF point turns orange when you
attempt to focus. Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus
automatically, or focus manually (p.56, 281).
The card cannot be used.
●●If a card error message is displayed, see page 46 or 607.
An error message is displayed when the card is
inserted in another camera.
●●Since SDXC cards are formatted in exFAT, if you format a card with
this camera and then insert it into another camera, an error may be
displayed and it may not be possible to use the card.
591
Troubleshooting Guide
The image is out of focus or blurred.
●●Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <AF> (p.50, 53).
●●Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake (p.56).
●●With a lens equipped with an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to
<1>.
●●In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster
shutter speed (p.134), set a higher ISO speed (p.83), use flash
(p.177), or use a tripod.
●●See “Minimizing Blurred Photos” on page 124.
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
●●Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Shooting with the focus
locked is not possible with Servo AF (p.126, 262).
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
●●The continuous shooting speed for high-speed continuous shooting
may be lower, depending on conditions such as these: battery
level, temperature, flicker reduction, Dual Pixel RAW shooting,
Silent LV shooting, shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions,
brightness, AF operation, type of lens, use of flash, and shooting
settings (p.144).
592
Troubleshooting Guide
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
●●If you shoot a subject that has fine detail such as a field of grass,
the file size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be
lower than the number listed on page 609.
Even after I change the card, the maximum burst displayed for
continuous shooting does not change.
●●The maximum burst displayed does not change when you switch
cards, even if you switch to a high-speed card. The maximum burst
shown in the table on page 609 is based on Canon’s testing card.
(The faster the card’s writing speed, the higher the actual maximum
burst will be.) For this reason, the maximum burst displayed may
differ from the actual maximum burst.
High-speed display is not available during high-speed
continuous shooting.
●●Refer to the high-speed display requirements on page 149.
Some image quality options are not available with cropped
shooting.
●●74/84/7a/8a image quality options are not available when
[1.6x (crop)] is set, or with EF-S lenses.
The aspect ratio cannot be set.
●●With EF-S lenses, [1.6x (crop)] is set automatically, and no other
aspect ratios are available.
●●Aspect ratios cannot be set when [85: Add cropping
information] is set to an option other than [Off].
593
Troubleshooting Guide
ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion cannot be selected.
●●Check the [ISO speed range] setting under [z3: zISO speed
settings].
●●When [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or
[Enhanced], the available ISO speed range is ISO 200–40000
for still photo shooting. Even if you set [ISO speed range] under
[zISO speed settings] to expand the setting range, you cannot
select L (equivalent to ISO 50), H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200),
or H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400). When [z3: Highlight tone
priority] is set to [Disable] (p.109), you can set ISO 100/125/160,
L, or H1/H2.
Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation,
the image comes out bright.
●●Set [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable] (p.104). When
[Low], [Standard], or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased
exposure compensation or flash exposure compensation, the
image may come out bright.
I cannot set the exposure compensation when both manual
exposure and ISO Auto are set.
●●See page 139 to set the exposure compensation.
Not all the lens aberration correction options are displayed.
●●Enabling [Digital Lens Optimizer] corrects both chromatic
aberration and diffraction, although these options are not displayed.
●●During movie shooting, [Digital Lens Optimizer] or [Diffraction
correction] will not be displayed.
594
Troubleshooting Guide
Using flash in [f] or [d] mode lowers the shutter speed.
●●Under [z2: External Speedlite control], set [Slow synchro] to
[1/200-1/60sec. auto] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] (p.181).
The flash does not fire.
●●Make sure the flash is securely attached to the camera.
The flash always fires at full output.
●●Flash units other than EL/EX series Speedlites used in autoflash
mode always fire at full output (p.178).
●●When the flash Custom Function setting for [Flash metering
mode] is set to [TTL] (autoflash), the flash will always fire at full
output (p.187).
Flash exposure compensation cannot be set.
●●If flash exposure compensation is already set with the Speedlite,
flash exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera. When
the external Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is canceled (set
to 0), flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera.
595
Troubleshooting Guide
High-speed sync is not available in [f] or [d] mode.
●●Under [z2: External Speedlite control], set [Slow synchro] to
[1/200-30sec. auto] or [1/200-1/60sec. auto] (p.181).
Remote control shooting is not possible.
●●When taking still photos, set the drive mode to <Q> or <k>
(p.147). When shooting movies, set [z2: Remote control] to
[Enable] (p.245).
●●Check the position of the remote control’s release timing switch.
●●If you are using Wireless Remote Control BR-E1, see pages 174
and 408.
●●To use a remote control for time-lapse movie shooting, see page
235.
A white s or red E icon is displayed during shooting.
●●It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. Image
quality of still photos may be worse when a white <s> icon is
displayed. If a red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that shooting
will soon stop automatically (p.253).
During movie shooting, the red E icon is displayed.
●●It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the
red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the movie shooting will
soon stop automatically (p.253).
596
Troubleshooting Guide
Movie shooting stops by itself.
●●If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop
automatically. For cards that can record movies, see page 611. To
find out the card’s writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s
website, etc.
●●Recording stops automatically once your movie reaches 29 min. 59
sec. (or 7 min. 29 sec. for a High Frame Rate movie).
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.
●●In shooting modes other than [M], the ISO speed is set
automatically. In [M] mode, you can manually set the ISO speed
(p.615).
ISO 100 cannot be set or ISO speed expansion cannot
be selected during movie shooting.
●●When [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the
available ISO speed range starts at ISO 200. Expanded ISO speed
cannot be selected even if you set an expanded range for [ISO
speed range] or [Range for H] under [z3: kISO speed
settings]. When [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable]
(p.109), you can set ISO 100/125/160 or an expanded ISO speed.
●●Check the [ISO speed range] and [Range for H] setting under
[z3: kISO speed settings].
597
Troubleshooting Guide
The exposure changes during movie shooting.
●●If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting,
the changes in the exposure may be recorded.
●●Shooting a few test movies is recommended if you intend to
perform zooming during movie shooting. Zooming as you shoot
movies may cause exposure changes or lens sounds to be
recorded, an uneven audio level, or loss of focus.
The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie
shooting.
●●Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources
during movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness)
or color tone may be recorded. In [M] mode, a slow shutter speed
may reduce the problem. The problem may be more noticeable in
time-lapse movie shooting.
The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.
●●If you move the camera to the left or right (panning) or shoot a
moving subject, the image may look distorted. The problem may be
more noticeable in time-lapse movie shooting.
I cannot take still photos during movie shooting.
●●Still photos cannot be taken during movie shooting. Before taking
still photos, stop shooting the movie, then select a shooting mode
for still photos.
10-bit HDMI output is not available with Canon Log.
●●No HDMI output is produced by the camera when set to [On (10bit)]
if the external recording device does not support 10-bit recording in
4K.
598
Troubleshooting Guide
Problems with Wireless Features
Wi-Fi function cannot be set.
●●If the camera is connected to a computer or another device with
an interface cable, Wi-Fi functions cannot be set. Disconnect the
interface cable before setting any functions (p.426).
A device connected with an interface cable cannot be used.
●●Other devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera
by connecting them with an interface cable while the camera is
connected to devices via Wi-Fi. Terminate the Wi-Fi connection
before connecting the interface cable.
Operations such as shooting and playback are not possible.
●●With a Wi-Fi connection established, operations such as shooting
and playback may not be possible.
Terminate the Wi-Fi connection, then perform the operation.
Cannot reconnect to a smartphone.
●●Even with a combination of the same camera and smartphone,
if you have changed the settings or selected a different setting,
reconnection may not be established even after selecting the same
SSID. In such a case, delete the camera connection settings from
the Wi-Fi settings on the smartphone and set up a connection
again.
●●If Camera Connect is left running while setting up a connection
again, the connection may not be established. In such a case,
restart Camera Connect.
599
Troubleshooting Guide
Cannot pair with a smartphone.
●●A previously paired smartphone cannot be paired with the camera
again if the camera’s registration is retained on the smartphone.
In such a case, remove the camera’s registration retained in the
Bluetooth settings on the smartphone and try pairing again (p.439).
Operation Problems
I cannot change the setting with <6>, <5>, <d>, <m>, or
<T>.
●●Press the <R> button to unlock the controls (p.60).
●●Check the [56: Multi function lock] setting (p.416).
Touch operation is not possible.
●●Make sure [53: Touch control] is set to [Standard] or [Sensitive]
(p.385).
A camera button or dial does not work as expected.
●●For movie shooting, check the [54: V btn function] setting
(p.404).
●●Check [8C.Fn4] tab settings (p.555).
600
Troubleshooting Guide
Display Problems
The menu screen shows fewer tabs and items.
●●In [A] mode, some tabs and items are not displayed. Tabs and
items on the menu screen also vary for still photos and movies.
The display starts with [9] My Menu or the [9] tab alone is
displayed.
●●[9Set up: Menu display] is set to [Display from My Menu tab]
or [Display only My Menu tab]. Set [Normal display] (p.570).
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).
●●Set [z4: Color space] to [sRGB]. If [Adobe RGB] is set, the first
character will be an underscore (p.117).
The fourth character in the file name changes.
●●[51: File name] is set to [*** + image size]. Select the camera’s
unique file name (preset code) or the file name registered under
User setting 1 (p.370).
The file numbering does not start from 0001.
●●If the card already contains recorded images, the image number
may not start from 0001 (p.367).
601
Troubleshooting Guide
The shooting date and time displayed are incorrect.
●●Make sure the correct date and time are set (p.380).
●●Check the time zone and daylight saving time (p.380).
The date and time are not in the image.
●●The shooting date and time do not appear in the image. The date
and time are recorded in the image data as shooting information.
When printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture,
using the date and time recorded in the shooting information
(p.353).
[###] is displayed.
●●If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number
the camera can display, [###] will be displayed.
The screen does not display a clear image.
●●If the screen is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
●●The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or
may look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room
temperature.
602
Troubleshooting Guide
Playback Problems
Part of the image blinks in black.
●●[33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] (p.309).
A red box is displayed on the image.
●●[33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (p.309).
During image playback, the AF points are not displayed.
●●The AF points are not displayed when the following types of images
are played back:
• Images taken with Multi Shot Noise Reduction applied.
• Cropped images.
• Images captured with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable] in HDR
shooting.
The image cannot be erased.
●●If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (p.318).
Still photos and movies cannot be played back.
●●The camera may not be able to play back images taken with
another camera.
●●Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the
camera.
Only few images can be played back.
●●The images have been filtered for playback with [32: Set image
search conditions] (p.313). Clear the image search conditions.
603
Troubleshooting Guide
Operation sound and mechanical sound can be heard during
movie playback.
●●If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the
operation sound will also be recorded. Using the Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) is recommended (p.202).
The movie appears to freeze momentarily.
●●If there is a drastic change in the exposure level during
autoexposure movie shooting, the recording will stop momentarily
until the brightness stabilizes. In such a case, shoot in the [M]
mode (p.213).
No picture appears on the television.
●●Make sure [53: Video system] is set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL]
correctly for the video system of your television (p.384).
●●Make sure the HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in (p.333).
There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.
●●If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be
created automatically (p.200). However, if you use an SDXC card
formatted with the camera, you can record a movie in a single file
even if it exceeds 4 GB.
604
Troubleshooting Guide
My card reader does not recognize the card.
●●Depending on the card reader used and the computer’s operating
system, SDXC cards may not be correctly recognized. In such
a case, connect your camera to the computer with the interface
cable, then import the images to the computer using EOS Utility
(EOS software).
The image cannot be resized.
●●With this camera, you cannot resize JPEG b and RAW images
(p.345).
The image cannot be cropped.
●●With this camera, you cannot crop RAW images (p.346).
Dots of light appear on the image.
●●White, red, or blue dots of light may appear in captured images or
on the shooting screen if the sensor is affected by cosmic rays or
similar factors. Their appearance may be reduced by performing
[Clean nowf] under [53: Sensor cleaning] (p.391).
605
Troubleshooting Guide
Sensor Cleaning Problems
The shutter makes a sound during sensor cleaning.
●●Under [53: Sensor cleaning], when you select [Clean nowf],
the shutter will make a mechanical sound during the cleaning, but
no picture will be recorded to the card (p.391).
Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.
●●If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> and <2> within a
short time period, the <f> icon may not be displayed (p.48).
Computer Connection Problems
I cannot import images to a computer.
●●Install EOS Utility (EOS software) in the computer (p.572).
●●If the camera is already connected via Wi-Fi, it cannot communicate
with any computer connected with an interface cable.
Communication between the connected camera and computer
does not work.
●●When using EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z2: Time-lapse
movie] to [Disable] (p.224).
606
Error Codes
(1)
If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the onscreen instructions. If the problem persists,
write down the error code (Errxx) and
contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
(1)
(2)
Error number
Cause and countermeasures
(2)
607
Performance Data
Still Photo Shooting
zzNumber of Possible Shots
Temperature
Possible shots
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Approx. 370 shots
Low Temperature
(0°C / 32°F)
Approx. 350 shots
• Based on using the screen and a fully charged battery pack (LP-E6N), with [54:
Disp. performance] set to [Smooth], and following CIPA (Camera & Imaging
Products Association) testing standards.
• With Battery Grip BG-E22 (sold separately) loaded with two LP-E6N battery
packs, the number of possible shots will be approximately doubled.
• With [54: Disp. performance] set to [Power saving], approx. 450 shots are
possible at room temperature and approx. 430 at low temperatures.
zzISO Auto Range
Shooting Mode
A
t/d/s/f/a
BULB
ISO Speed
No Flash
ISO 100–12800
ISO 100–40000*
ISO 400*
With Flash
ISO 100–1600
ISO 100–1600*
ISO 400*
* The actual ISO speed range depends on the [Minimum] and [Maximum] set
with [Auto range].
608
Performance Data
zzGuide to Image Quality Settings
Image
Quality
JPEG
73
83
74
84
7a
8a
b
RAW
1
1:U
F
F:U
RAW+JPEG
1
73
F
73
Pixels
Recorded
(Approx.)
Maximum Burst
High
Standard
Speed
File Size
(MB)
Possible
Shots
3.8M
8.4
4.4
4.7
2.6
3.1
1.8
1.6
3570
6770
6460
11510
9700
16040
18830
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
110
110
110
30M
30M
30M
30M
31.3
55.2
17.3
27.8
970
520
1770
1000
34
17
61
150
47
Full
78
Full
30M
30M
30M
30M
31.3
8.4
17.3
8.4
760
34
39
1180
55
56
30M
13M
7.5M
• The number of possible shots is based on Canon’s testing standards and an
32 GB card.
• The maximum burst during continuous shooting is based on Canon’s standard
testing SD card (Standard: 32 GB, High-speed: UHS-II 32 GB) and testing
standards (<o> High-speed continuous shooting, still photo cropping/aspect
ratio: Full-frame, ISO 100, without Dual Pixel RAW, Standard Picture Style).
• The file size, number of possible shots, and maximum burst will vary
depending on the subject, card brand, still photo cropping/aspect ratio,
ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom Functions, and other settings.
• Automatically set to <i> Low-speed continuous shooting when shooting with
Dual Pixel RAW.
• “Full” indicates that shooting is possible until the card becomes full with the
listed conditions.
Even if you use a high-speed SD card, maximum burst indicator will not
change. The maximum burst in the table will apply instead.
609
Performance Data
zzPixel Count When Still Photo Cropping/Aspect Ratio is Set
(Approx. pixels)
Image
Quality
3/1/F
Full-frame (3:2)
1.6x (crop)
a
6720x4480 (30.1 megapixels)
4464x2976 (13.3 megapixels)
4176x2784 (11.6 megapixels)
–
a
3360x2240 (7.5 megapixels)
–
b
2400x1600 (3.8 megapixels)
2400x1600 (3.8 megapixels)
Image
Quality
3/1/F
a
a
b
1:1 (aspect ratio)
4:3 (aspect ratio)
16:9 (aspect ratio)
4480x4480
(20.1 megapixels)
2976x2976
(8.9 megapixels)
2240x2240
(5.0 megapixels)
1600x1600
(2.6 megapixels)
5952x4480
(26.7 megapixels)*
3968x2976
(11.8 megapixels)
2976x2240
(6.7 megapixels)*
2112x1600
(3.4 megapixels)*
6720x3776
(25.4 megapixels)*
4464x2512
(11.2 megapixels)*
3360x1888
(6.3 megapixels)*
2400x1344
(3.2 megapixels)*
ooThe actual aspect ratio of images in the sizes marked with an asterisk “*”
will differ from the aspect ratio indicated.
ooFor details on JPEG file sizes, see the values for full-frame recording
on page 609. Under equivalent shooting conditions, file sizes will be
smaller than when [z1: zCropping/aspect ratio] is set to [Fullframe].
610
Performance Data
Movie Shooting
zzCards that Can Record Movies
Movie Recording Quality
H
65B4
87
L
5
65B4
65B4
HDR movie
65
87
w
65
HDR movie
23
W
X
W
X
W
X
SD Card
UHS-II, Video Speed Class 60 or higher
UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher
UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher
SD Speed Class 10 or higher
UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher
SD Speed Class 4 or higher
V
W
X
X
SD Speed Class 4 or higher
SD Speed Class 10 or higher
SD Speed Class 4 or higher
W
UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher
SD Speed Class 4 or higher
• When movie cropping and Movie digital IS are disabled.
• This table indicates the card’s writing and reading speeds required for recording
movies (card performance requirements). However, card performance
requirements for 4K/Full HD time-lapse movies apply to reading speed.
611
Performance Data
zzTotal Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute (Approx.)
Movie Recording
Quality
H
65
B4
87
L
5
W
X
W
X
65
W
B4
65
X
B4
HDR movie
11 min.
46 min.
3 hr. 06 min.
654 MB/min.
35 min.
2 hr. 20 min.
9 hr. 23 min.
216 MB/min.
V 1 hr. 26 min.
13 min.
W
87
40 min.
X
65
X
1 hr. 20 min.
HDR movie
6 min.
23
W
65
w
Total Possible Recording Time on
Card
File size
8 GB
32 GB
128 GB
2 min.
8 min.
35 min.
3444 MB/min.
8 min.
35 min.
2 hr. 21 min. 860 MB/min.
5 min.
23 min.
1 hr. 34 min. 1298 MB/min.
17 min.
1 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 43 min. 431 MB/min.
5 hr. 47 min. 23 hr. 11 min. 87 MB/min.
52 min.
3 hr. 29 min. 583 MB/min.
2 hr. 42 min. 10 hr. 49 min. 187 MB/min.
5 hr. 21 min. 21 hr. 26 min.
26 min.
94 MB/min.
1 hr. 46 min. 1144 MB/min.
• When movie cropping and Movie digital IS are disabled.
An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie
shooting to stop before the total recording time shown in the table (p.253).
zzTotal Possible Time for Movie Shooting
Temperature
Possible recording time
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
2 hr. 20 min.
(Approx.)
Low Temperature
(0°C / 32°F)
2 hr. 10 min.
• With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N.
• With [Movie rec. size] under [z1: Movie rec quality] set to H L and [21:
Movie Servo AF] set to [Enable].
612
Performance Data
zzTotal Possible Time for Time-lapse Movie Shooting (Approx.)
Time-lapse Movie Shooting
Interval
2 sec.
10 sec.
Screen Auto Off
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Room
Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
4 hr. 30 min.
7 hr. 10 min.
4 hr. 20 min.
7 hr. 30 min.
Low Temperature
(0°C / 32°F)
4 hr.
6 hr. 30 min.
3 hr. 50 min.
6 hr. 50 min.
• With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N.
• The possible movie shooting time varies depending on the shooting conditions.
613
Performance Data
ISO Speed in Movie Shooting
In [y] Mode
zz For HD/Full HD and High Frame Rate movies, ISO speed is
automatically set in a range of ISO 100–25600.
zz For 4K movies, ISO speed is automatically set in a range of ISO
100–12800.
In [k], [t], and [v] Modes
zz For HD/Full HD and High Frame Rate movies, ISO speed is
automatically set in a range of ISO 100–25600.
zz For 4K movies, ISO speed is automatically set in a range of ISO
100–12800.
zz Under [z3: kISO speed settings], if you set [ISO Auto] or
[HISO Auto] to [Max.:H2(102400)] (p.246), the maximum limit
of the automatic ISO speed setting range will be expanded to H2
(equivalent to ISO 102400). You can lower the maximum value to
narrow the automatic ISO speed setting range.
zz With [z3: Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable] (p.109), the
automatic ISO speed setting range is ISO 200–25600 for HD/Full HD
and High Frame Rate movies and ISO 200–12800 for 4K movies.
614
Performance Data
In [M] Mode
zz For HD/Full HD and High Frame Rate movies with ISO speed set to
[AUTO], it is automatically set in a range of ISO 100–25600.
zz For 4K movies with ISO speed set to [AUTO], ISO speed is
automatically set in a range of ISO 100–12800.
zz When setting ISO Auto, setting [ISO Auto] or [HISO Auto] under
[z3: kISO speed settings] to [Max.:H2(102400)] (p.246)
expands the maximum speed in the automatic ISO speed setting
range to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400). You can lower the maximum
value to narrow the automatic ISO speed setting range.
zz You can set the ISO speed manually in a range of ISO 100–25600
for HD/Full HD and High Frame Rate movies and ISO 100–12800 for
4K movies. Note that under [z3: kISO speed settings], setting
[Maximum] for [ISO speed range] or [Hrange] to [H2 (102400)]
(p.246) expands the maximum speed in the manual ISO speed
setting range to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400). Note that you can
also set the [Maximum] and [Minimum] to a range narrower than
the default range.
zz If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.109), the
automatic and manual ISO speed setting range’s minimum limit will
be ISO 200. Even when ISO speed expansion is set, the maximum
limit will not be expanded.
615
Performance Data
Image Playback
zzResize Options by Original Image Quality
Available Resize Settings
Original Image
Quality
4
a
b
3*
k
k
k
k
k
4
k
a
* Only b is available for images shot with [z1: zCropping/aspect ratio] set
to [1.6x (crop)].
zzSize for Resized Images
(Approx. pixels)
Image
Quality
Full-frame (3:2)
1.6x (crop)
4
a
b
4464x2976 (13.3 megapixels)
3360x2240 (7.5 megapixels)
2400x1600 (3.8 megapixels)
–
–
2400x1600 (3.8 megapixels)
Image
Quality
4
a
b
1:1 (aspect ratio)
4:3 (aspect ratio)
16:9 (aspect ratio)
2976x2976
(8.9 megapixels)
2240x2240
(5.0 megapixels)
1600x1600
(2.6 megapixels)
3968x2976
(11.8 megapixels)
2976x2240
(6.7 megapixels)*
2112x1600
(3.4 megapixels)*
4464x2512
(11.2 megapixels)*
3360x1888
(6.3 megapixels)*
2400x1344
(3.2 megapixels)*
ooThe actual aspect ratio of images in the sizes marked with an asterisk “*”
will differ from the aspect ratio indicated.
ooThe image may be cropped slightly depending on the resizing conditions.
616
Information Display
LCD Panel
Still photo/movie standby screen 1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
Multi-function lock
Shooting mode
Battery level
Flash exposure compensation
Exposure compensation
Bluetooth function
Wi-Fi function
Shutter speed
Aperture
Movie Av 1/8-stop increments
Exposure level indicator/Exposure
compensation amount/AEB range
(12) ISO speed
(13) Highlight tone priority/ISO speed
expansion
Still photo standby screen 2
(1)
(3)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(4)
(9)
(5)
(10)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Drive mode
AF method
AF operation
Still photo image quality
Movie shooting mode
White balance
Metering mode
Picture Style
Possible shots
Movie recording quality
617
Information Display
Movie standby screen 2
(1)
(4)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(3)
(7)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
AF method
Movie digital IS
Image size
White balance
Canon Log
Movie recording time available
Frame rate
(1)
(2)
Elapsed recording time
Recording in progress/External
recording in progress (HDMI,
10-bit)
Movie recording in progress
(2)
(1)
618
Information Display
Still Photo Shooting Screen
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will
change.
zz Viewfinder display positions vary for some items.
zz The display will show only the settings currently applied.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
Movie recording time available
Maximum burst
Possible shots/Sec. until selftimer shoots
(4) HDR/Multiple exposures/Dual
Pixel RAW/Multi Shot Noise
Reduction
(5) Shooting mode/Scene icon
(6) AF method
(7) AF operation
(8) Drive mode
(9) Metering mode
(10) Anti-flicker shooting
(11) AF point (1-point AF)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(23)
(12) Battery level
(13) Number of remaining multiple
exposures
(14) Temperature warning
(15) Electronic level
(16) Histogram
(17) Quick Control button
(18) Image quality
(19) White balance/White balance
correction
(20) Picture Style
(21) Auto Lighting Optimizer
(22) Still photo cropping/aspect ratio
(23) GPS acquisition status
619
Information Display
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(30)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(31)
(41)
(29)
(24) Flash ready/Flash off/FE lock/
High-speed sync
(25) Silent shutter
(26) Touch shutter
(27) AE lock
(28) Shutter speed/Multi-function lock
warning
(29) Flash exposure compensation
(30) Aperture
(31) Exposure level indicator
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
Focus distance display
Bluetooth function
Exposure simulation
Magnify button
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
Wi-Fi signal strength
Exposure compensation
Wi-Fi function
AEB/FEB
ooYou can set what is displayed for when you press the <B> button
(p.397).
ooThe electronic level is not displayed when the AF method is set to
[u+Tracking] or the camera is connected via HDMI to a television.
ooOther icons may be displayed temporarily after setting adjustments.
620
Information Display
Movie Shooting Screen
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will
change.
zz Viewfinder display positions vary for some items.
zz The display will show only the settings currently applied.
(1)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Temperature warning
Battery level
Movie recording time available/
Elapsed recording time
(4) Movie shooting mode/Time-lapse
movie/Scene icon
(5) AF method
(6) Movie recording size/Frame rate
(7) Compression rate
(8) Sound-recording level (manual)
(9) Headphone volume
(10) Movie digital IS
(11) Movie servo AF
(21)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
Electronic level
AF point (1-point AF)
Time code
Histogram (in M mode)
Recording in progress/
External recording in progress
(HDMI, 10-bit)
White balance/White balance
correction
Picture Style
Auto Lighting Optimizer
HDR movie
Magnify button
621
Information Display
(22)
(29)
(23)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(22) Sound-recording level indicator
(manual)
(23) Canon Log
(24) AE lock
(25) Shutter speed
(26) View Assist
(27) Wi-Fi function
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
Aperture
Exposure level indicator
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
Exposure compensation
Focus distance display
Bluetooth function
ooYou can set what is displayed for when you press the <B> button
(p.397).
ooThe electronic level is not displayed when the AF method is set to
[u+Tracking] or the camera is connected via HDMI to a television.
ooThe electronic level, grid lines, or histogram cannot be displayed during
movie shooting. (The display will disappear when you start shooting a
movie.)
ooWhen movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will
change to the elapsed time.
Other icons may be displayed temporarily after setting adjustments.
622
Information Display
Scene Icons
In [A] or [y] shooting mode, the camera detects the type of scene,
and all settings are configured accordingly. The detected scene type is
indicated on the upper left of the screen.
Subject
Portrait*1
Movement*2
Background
Non-Portrait
Nature and
Movement*2 Close*3
Outdoor
Scene
Bright
Background
Color
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky
Included
Light blue
Backlit
*4
Sunset
*4
Orange
Spotlight
Dark
With
Tripod*2
Dark blue
5 6
**
*
4
5 6
**
*
4
*1: During time-lapse movie shooting, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a
person is detected.
*2: Not displayed for movie recording.
*3: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an extension tube
or close-up lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not
match the actual scene.
623
Information Display
*4: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed.
*5: Displayed when all the following conditions apply:
The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on a
tripod.
*6: Displayed with any of the lenses below:
•
•
•
•
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
• Image Stabilizer lenses released in and after 2012.
*5+*6: If the conditions in both *5 and *6 are met, the shutter speed will slow down.
624
Information Display
Playback Screen
zzBasic information display for still photos
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(13)
(14)
(15)
Wi-Fi function
Wi-Fi signal strength
Battery level
Playback No./Total images/
Number of found images
Shutter speed
Aperture
Exposure compensation amount
Bluetooth function
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
Already sent to a computer/
smartphone
Rating
Image protection
Folder number-File number
Image quality/Edited image/
Cropping
Highlight tone priority
ISO speed
ooIf the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information
may not be displayed.
ooIt may not be possible to play back images taken with this camera on
other cameras.
625
Information Display
zzDetailed information display for still photos
(8)
(1)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(16)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Aperture
Shutter speed
Shooting mode/Multiple
exposure/Time-lapse movie
White balance
Auto Lighting Optimizer
White balance correction
Picture Style/Settings
Exposure compensation amount
Shooting date and time
(17)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
Histogram (Brightness/RGB)
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
Scroll bar
Flash exposure compensation/
Bounce/HDR shooting/Multi Shot
Noise Reduction
(15) Metering mode
(16) File size
(17) Image quality/Edited image/Cropping
* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image file size will be displayed.
* Lines indicating the image area will be displayed for images taken with the
aspect ratio set (p.80) and with RAW or RAW+JPEG set for image quality.
* During flash photography without flash exposure compensation, <0> will be displayed.
* < > will be displayed for images shot with bounce flash photography.
* An icon for the effect (p.162) and the dynamic range adjustment amount will
be displayed for images shot with HDR shooting.
* <P> will be displayed for images shot with multiple-exposure shooting.
* <M> will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.
* <G> will be displayed for still photos taken as test shots for time-lapse movies.
* <u> will be displayed for images created and saved after performing RAW
image processing, resizing, or cropping.
* <N> will be displayed for images cropped and then saved.
626
Information Display
zzDetailed information display for movies
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(7)
(8)
Movie playback
Picture Style: Settings
Canon Log: Characteristics
Movie recording size
Frame Rate
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Compression rate
HDR movie/Movie digital IS
Recording time
Movie recording format
During movie playback, “*, *” will be displayed for [Fineness] and
[Threshold] of [Picture Style]’s [Sharpness].
627
Trademarks
ooAdobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
ooMicrosoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
ooMacintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
ooSDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
ooHDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
ooThe Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo and the Wi-Fi Protected Setup mark are
trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
ooWPS used on camera settings screens and in this manual stands for Wi-Fi
Protected Setup.
ooThe Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
ooAll other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and
may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4
compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial
purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide
MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for
MPEG-4 standard.”
628
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES
IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO (i) ENCODE
VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (''AVC VIDEO'') AND/
OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS
GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
* Notice displayed in English as required.
Third party software
This product includes third party software.
● AES-128 Library
Copyright (c) 1998-2008, Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights reserved.
LICENSE TERMS
The redistribution and use of this software (with or without changes) is allowed
without the payment of fees or royalties provided that:
1. source code distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer;
2. binary distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in their documentation;
3. the name of the copyright holder is not used to endorse products built using
this software without specific written permission.
DISCLAIMER
This software is provided 'as is' with no explicit or implied warranties in respect
of its properties, including, but not limited to, correctness and/or fitness for
purpose.
629
Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended
This product is designed to achieve optimum performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories. Therefore, using this product with genuine
accessories is highly recommended.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as malfunction, fire, etc. caused by the failure of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery). Please note that
repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine accessories will not be
covered by the warranty for repairs, although you may request such repairs
on a chargeable basis.
Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it
with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or
accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.
630
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and
Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be
disposed of with your household waste, according to
the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive
(2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing
those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in
accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal
(Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or
accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified
in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g.,
on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or
to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this
type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human
health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated
with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will
contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact
your local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household
waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee,
or www.canon-europe.com/battery.
631
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.
632
Index
Numeric
[4K] 3840x2160 (Movie)..................... 192
[4K] 3840x2160
(Time-lapse movie)............................. 225
[A+] (Scene Intelligent Auto).............. 123
AF function customization............... 288
AF method....................................... 265
AF operation............................ 262, 274
AF point selection............................ 271
AF point size.................................... 276
AF speed......................................... 292
[C1]/[C2] (Custom shooting).............. 417
Area AF frame......................... 265, 270
[FHD] 1920x1080 (HDR shooting)..... 222
Beeper............................................. 386
[FHD] 1920x1080 (Movie).................. 192
Continuous AF................................. 278
[FHD] 1920x1080
Eye Detection AF............................. 277
(Time-lapse movie)............................. 225
Lens drive when AF impossible....... 297
[HD] 1280x720 (HDR shooting)......... 222
Lens electronic MF.......................... 293
[HD] 1280x720 (Movie)...................... 192
[Q] (Quick Control)............................... 68
4, 9, 36, or 100 images....................... 310
4K frame capture................................ 329
8bit (Canon Log)................................. 238
Limit AF methods............................. 298
Manual focusing.............................. 281
One-Shot AF release priority........... 296
Orientation linked AF point.............. 299
Out of focus....................................... 54
Recomposing.................................. 126
10bit (Canon Log)............................... 238
Touch & drag AF.............................. 279
10- or 2-sec. self-timer....................... 147
AF point auto switching...................... 290
A
AC adapter......................................... 583
Acceleration/deceleration tracking..... 289
Access lamp......................................... 45
Accessories............................................ 3
Adobe RGB.........................................117
AEB (Auto Exposure Bracketing)....... 155
AE lock............................................... 157
AF....................................................... 255
AF assist beam........................ 264, 295
AF point expansion..................... 266, 271
AF start button...................................... 57
ALL-I (For editing/I-only)..................... 195
Ambience priority (AWB)...................... 99
Anti-flicker shooting.............................115
Aperture-priority AE............................ 136
Area AF frame............................ 265, 270
Aspect ratio 9
Still photo cropping/aspect ratio
Attenuator........................................... 203
Auto...................................................... 89
633
Index
Autofocus 9 AF
Auto Lighting Optimizer...................... 104
Holding the camera........................... 55
Camera shake.................................... 125
Auto power off.................................... 377
Canon Log.......................................... 236
Auto reset........................................... 369
Card requirements.......................197, 611
Av (Aperture-priority AE)..................... 136
Cards.........................10, 30, 44, 373, 611
B
Basic information display.................... 625
Card reminder..................................118
Formatting....................................... 373
Low-level formatting........................ 373
Battery 9 Power
Troubleshooting......................... 46, 591
Battery Grip........................................ 578
Write-protect switch........................... 44
Beep (Beeper).................................... 386
Black-and-white images................. 90, 94
Bluetooth function....................... 408, 426
Address........................................... 436
Connecting...................................... 429
Bracketing
AEB (Auto Exposure Bracketing).... 155
Center-weighted average metering.... 152
Certification Logo............................... 422
Charger.......................................... 35, 40
Chromatic aberration
correction.....................................113, 344
Cleaning (image sensor).................... 391
Clipped highlights............................... 309
FEB
Color space.................................117, 343
(Flash Exposure Bracketing)........... 186
Color temperature.............................. 101
White balance bracketing................ 103
Color tone............................................. 93
BULB (Bulb)....................................... 158
Combination IS................................... 221
Bulb exposures................................... 158
Continuous (file numbering)............... 368
Bulb timer........................................ 159
Continuous shooting........................... 144
BUSY.................................................... 77
B/W................................................. 90, 94
C
Cable protector..................................... 37
Camera
Camera vibration blur...................... 125
Default settings................................ 419
634
Contrast........................................ 93, 104
Control ring........................................... 60
Copyright information......................... 420
Cropping (images).............................. 346
Cropping information.......................... 550
Custom Functions.............................. 539
Customizing operations...................... 555
Index
Custom shooting mode...................... 417
Custom white balance........................ 100
D
Dust Delete Data................................ 121
E
Eco mode........................................... 376
D+....................................................... 109
Electronic level................................... 397
Date/time............................................ 380
Erasing images................................... 335
Daylight saving time........................... 381
Err (error codes)................................. 607
DC Coupler......................................... 582
Evaluative metering............................ 152
Default settings................................... 419
exFAT......................................... 200, 374
Camera settings.............................. 419
Expanded ISO speed..... 83, 85, 246, 614
Custom Functions........................... 554
Exposure compensation..................... 155
Customizing operations................... 555
Exposure compensation in M mode with
Custom shooting mode................... 417
Flash function settings..................... 187
My Menu.......................................... 569
Depth-of-field preview........................ 137
Dials
Main Dial........................................... 58
Quick Control Dial............................. 59
Diffraction correction....................113, 344
Digital Lens Optimizer.................112, 343
Digital terminal...................... 32, 348, 574
Dioptric adjustment............................... 54
Display off........................................... 377
Display settings.................................. 403
Distortion correction.................... 111, 343
Double-tap.......................................... 306
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)..... 353
Dragging............................................... 67
Drive mode......................................... 144
Dual Pixel RAW.................................... 78
ISO Auto............................................. 139
Exposure level increments................. 542
Exposure level indicator..... 138, 617, 620
Exposure maintained for
new aperture...................................... 546
Exposure simulation........................... 120
External microphone.......................... 203
External Speedlite 9 Flash
F
Face+Tracking............................ 265, 269
Faithful.................................................. 90
FAT32......................................... 200, 374
FEB (Flash Exposure Bracketing)...... 186
FE lock............................................... 177
File extension..................................... 371
File name............................................ 370
Underscore “_”.................................117
635
Index
File size.............................. 200, 609, 612
For editing (ALL-I).............................. 195
Filter effect (Monochrome)................... 94
Formatting (card initialization)............ 373
Fine Detail............................................ 89
Frame Grab........................................ 329
Fine (Image-recording quality)............. 75
Frame rate.................................. 195, 384
Fineness (Sharpness).......................... 93
Free run.............................................. 205
Firmware............................................. 422
Full Auto mode................................... 123
First-curtain synchronization.............. 185
Full High-Definition (Full HD)
Flash exposure compensation... 177, 186
(movie)........................................ 192, 225
Flash mode......................................... 183
Full High-Definition (Full HD)
Flash (Speedlite)................................ 177
(Time-lapse movie)............................. 224
Custom Functions........................... 187
Fv (Flexible-priority AE)...................... 140
FEB
(Flash Exposure Bracketing)........... 186
G
FE lock............................................ 177
GPS.....................................................411
Flash control (function settings)...... 179
Grid display................................ 305, 399
Flash exposure
compensation.......................... 177, 186
Flash sync speed............................ 178
Manual flash.................................... 183
Safety FE......................................... 182
Shutter synchronization
(1st/2nd curtain).............................. 185
Slow synchro................................... 181
Wireless........................................... 184
Flash sync contacts.............................. 31
Flexible-priority AE............................. 140
Focus guide........................................ 284
Focusing 9 AF
Focus lock.......................................... 126
Focus mode switch......................... 50, 53
Folder creation/selection.................... 365
636
H
H1/H2 (Expanded ISO speed).............. 85
HD (High Frame Rate movie)............. 199
HDMI.......................... 207, 251, 333, 395
Connection indicator........................ 252
Output.............................................. 252
Record command............................ 207
Time code........................................ 207
HDMI HDR.......................................... 396
HDR movie shooting.......................... 222
HDR shooting..................................... 161
Headphones....................................... 203
Help.................................................... 405
Text size.......................................... 406
High-Definition.................................... 192
Index
High dynamic range 9 HDR
Jump display (image browsing)........311
High Frame Rate................................ 199
Magnifying images.......................... 315
High ISO speed noise reduction......... 105
Manual reset.................................... 369
Highlight alert..................................... 309
Highlight tone priority.......................... 109
High-speed continuous shooting........ 144
High-speed display............................. 149
Histogram................................... 307, 400
Hot shoe............................................... 31
Household power............................... 582
Manual rotation................................ 317
Playback.......................................... 301
Protecting........................................ 318
Rating.............................................. 321
Shooting information....... 305, 307, 625
Slide show....................................... 331
Transfer........................................... 348
Viewing on a television............ 324, 333
Importing images to a computer......... 574
I
ICC profile...........................................117
Icons....................................................... 8
Illumination (LCD panel)....................... 60
Image browsing (Jump display)...........311
Image-recording quality................ 75, 609
Image review time...............................118
Images
AF point display............................... 309
Auto reset........................................ 369
Auto rotation.................................... 372
Continuous (file numbering)............ 368
Erasing............................................ 335
File numbering................................. 367
Highlight alert.................................. 309
Histogram........................................ 307
Image quality............................. 75, 609
Image search................................... 313
Importing (to computer)................... 574
Index display................................... 310
Index display...................................... 310
INFO button.......................................... 62
Initial AF Point.................................... 300
Initial magnification ratio/position....... 316
IPB...................................................... 195
IPTC information................................ 553
ISO speed.................................... 83, 246
Auto range (Still photos).................... 86
ISO Auto (movie)............................. 246
ISO Auto range.................. 86, 246, 608
ISO expansion................................... 85
ISO speed range....................... 85, 246
Manual setting range......................... 85
Minimum shutter speed for ISO Auto
(Still photos)...................................... 87
Setting increments........................... 542
Time-lapse ISO Auto....................... 247
J
JPEG............................................ 75, 609
637
Index
Jump display.......................................311
L
Malfunction......................................... 588
Manual exposure................................ 138
Manual focus...................................... 255
Landscape............................................ 89
Manual focusing................................. 281
Language........................................... 383
Manual reset....................................... 369
Large (image-recording quality)........... 75
Maximum burst..................................... 77
Large Zone AF............................ 267, 271
Medium (image-recording quality)........ 75
LCD Panel.......................................... 617
Memory cards 9 Cards
Illumination........................................ 60
Lens................................................ 50, 52
Chromatic aberration
correction..................................113, 344
Diffraction correction................113, 344
Digital Lens Optimizer..............112, 343
Distortion correction................. 111, 343
Focus mode switch...................... 50, 53
Lock release................................ 51, 53
Optical aberration correction....110, 343
Peripheral illumination
Menu.................................................... 63
Dimmed menu items......................... 66
My Menu.......................................... 566
Setting procedure.............................. 64
Metering mode................................... 152
Metering timer.....................................119
MF (Manual focusing)......................... 281
M-Fn bar......................................... 59, 61
M-Fn button.......................................... 57
MF peaking......................................... 283
correction.................................. 111, 343
Microphone......................................... 203
Lens electronic MF............................. 293
M (Manual exposure)........................ 138
Light (IPB).......................................... 195
Mode Button......................................... 57
Location information............................411
Monochrome.................................. 90, 94
LOCK............................................ 60, 416
Movies................................................ 188
Long (bulb) exposures........................ 158
24.00p............................................. 198
Long Exposure Noise Reduction........ 107
AE lock............................................ 212
Low-speed continuous shooting......... 145
M
Magnifying images............. 273, 281, 315
Main dial............................................... 58
638
AF speed during Movie Servo AF.... 292
Aperture-priority AE..........................211
Attenuator........................................ 203
Autoexposure shooting.................... 209
Auto slow shutter............................. 248
Av 1/8-stop increments.................... 249
Index
Canon Log....................................... 236
Rec run............................................ 205
Cards suited for movie shooting.......611
Shutter-priority AE........................... 210
Compression method...................... 195
Shutter speed.................................. 215
Cropped shooting............................ 219
Sound recording/
Drop frame...................................... 208
Sound-recording level..................... 202
Editing............................................. 327
Time code........................................ 205
Editing out first and last scenes....... 327
Time-lapse movie.................... 224, 613
Enjoying movies.............................. 324
Viewing on a television............ 324, 333
External microphone....................... 203
Wind filter........................................ 202
File size................................... 200, 612
MP4.................................................... 196
Frame Grab..................................... 329
Multi function........................................ 57
Frame rate....................................... 195
Multi-function bar.................................. 61
Free run........................................... 205
HDMI output............................ 251, 395
HDR movie shooting....................... 222
Headphones.................................... 203
High Frame Rate............................. 199
Information display.......................... 621
Manual exposure shooting.............. 213
Metering timer................................. 249
Microphone...................................... 203
Movie digital IS................................ 220
Movie Servo AF............... 286, 291, 292
Movie Servo AF tracking
sensitivity......................................... 291
Customization.................................. 561
Multi function lock......................... 60, 416
Multiple exposure............................... 166
Multi Shot Noise Reduction................ 105
My Menu............................................. 566
N
Neutral.................................................. 89
Noise reduction
High ISO speed............................... 105
Long exposures............................... 107
Non-Canon flash units........................ 178
Movie shooting button..................... 209
Normal (Image-recording quality)......... 75
Playback.................................. 324, 325
NTSC.......................................... 195, 384
Playback count................................ 206
Recording count.............................. 206
O
Recording coverage........................ 194
One-Shot AF....................................... 263
Recording quality (size)................... 192
ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF)................. 263
Recording time........................ 201, 612
Orientation linked AF point................. 299
639
Index
P
PAL............................................. 195, 384
Partial metering.................................. 152
Part names........................................... 31
PC terminal......................................... 585
Peripheral illumination
correction..................................... 111, 343
Photobook set-up............................... 357
Program AE........................................ 132
Program shift................................... 133
Protecting images............................... 318
Q
Quick Control........................................ 68
Quick control dial.................................. 59
R
Picture Style............................. 88, 92, 95
Rating................................................. 321
Pixel count.................................... 75, 609
Rating mark........................................ 321
Playback............................................. 301
RAW............................................... 75, 76
Portrait.................................................. 89
RAW+JPEG.................................. 75, 609
Positioning hole.................................... 33
RAW image processing...................... 339
Possible recording time (movie)......... 612
Recharging................................... 40, 576
Possible shots.................................... 608
Rec run............................................... 205
Power................................................... 48
Reduced display................................. 310
Auto power off................................. 377
Release shutter without card...............118
Battery information.......................... 387
Battery level............................... 49, 387
Charging.................................... 40, 576
Household power............................ 582
Possible shots................................. 608
Recharge performance.................... 387
Power saving...................................... 377
P (Program AE).................................. 132
Pressing completely..................... 56, 404
Pressing halfway.......................... 56, 404
Printing
Photobook set-up............................ 357
Print order (DPOF).......................... 353
640
Remote control................................... 174
Remote control terminal............... 32, 176
Remote switch.................................... 176
Repeat (slide show)............................ 331
Resizing.............................................. 345
Rotation (image)......................... 317, 372
S
Safety instructions................................ 25
Safety shift.......................................... 545
Saturation............................................. 93
Scene icons................................ 127, 623
Index
Scene Intelligent Auto......................... 123
Shooting range................................... 400
Screen............................................ 30, 47
Shutter button....................................... 56
Adjusting angle............................ 47, 55
Shutter button functions..................... 404
Brightness....................................... 378
Shutter-priority AE.............................. 134
Color tone........................................ 379
Shutter synchronization...................... 185
Electronic level................................ 397
Silent LV shooting............................... 150
Image Playback............................... 304
Menu display..................................... 63
Quick Control..................................... 68
SD, SDHC, SDXC cards 9 Cards
Search conditions............................... 313
Second-curtain synchronization......... 185
Self-timer............................................ 147
Sensitivity 9 ISO speed
Sensor cleaning.................................. 391
Serial number............................... 33, 389
SERVO............................................... 263
Servo AF
Movie Servo AF............... 286, 291, 292
SERVO............................................ 263
Sharpness............................................ 93
Shooting information display...... 397, 619
Shooting modes........................... 70, 188
[A+] (Scene Intelligent Auto)........... 123
Av (Aperture-priority AE)................. 136
Silent shooting.................................... 151
Single-image display.......................... 304
Single-point AF................................... 265
Single shooting................................... 144
Slide show.......................................... 331
Small (image-recording quality)............ 75
Software............................................. 572
Instruction Manual........................... 573
Sound recording/
Sound-recording level........................ 202
Speaker........................................ 31, 325
Spot metering..................................... 152
sRGB...................................................117
Standard............................................... 89
Standard (IPB).................................... 195
M icon................................................... 8
Still photo cropping/
aspect ratio................................... 80, 610
BULB (Bulb).................................... 158
Strap..................................................... 36
[C1]/[C2] (Custom shooting)........... 417
Strength (Sharpness)........................... 93
Fv (Flexible-priority AE)................... 140
M (Manual exposure)..................... 138
T
P (Program AE)............................... 132
Temperature warning.................. 142, 253
Tv (Shutter-priority AE).................... 134
Threshold (Sharpness)......................... 93
641
Index
Tilt correction...................................... 347
Information display.......................... 398
Time code........................................... 205
Vertical display................................ 399
Time-lapse movie............................... 224
Viewfinder off...................................... 377
Time zone........................................... 380
Viewing on a television............... 324, 333
Tone priority........................................ 109
Volume (movie playback)................... 326
Toning effect (Monochrome)................. 94
Touch beeping.................................... 386
Touch operation.................... 67, 306, 385
Touch Shutter..................................... 130
Tracking sensitivity............................. 288
Transition effect (slide show).............. 331
Tripod socket........................................ 33
W
White balance (WB)............................. 97
Auto................................................... 99
Bracketing....................................... 103
Color temperature setting................ 101
Correction........................................ 102
Custom............................................ 100
Troubleshooting.................................. 588
White priority (AWB)............................. 99
Tv (Shutter-priority AE)....................... 134
Wi-Fi function..................................... 423
U
UHS...................................................... 10
Access points.................................. 496
Encryption.................................... 496
Android............................................ 427
Underscore “_”....................................117
Authentication.................................. 496
USB (digital) terminal........... 32, 348, 574
Camera access point mode............. 508
User Def............................................... 90
Camera Connect..................... 427, 444
UTC (Coordinated Universal Time).... 415
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY............. 481
V
Clearing wireless communication
settings............................................ 515
Vari-angle screen............................ 47, 55
Communicating with
Vertical image auto rotation................ 372
a smartphone.................................. 427
Video system...................................... 384
Viewfinder
Dioptric adjustment............................ 54
Display format................................. 402
Grid display..................................... 399
642
Connection history................... 509, 533
Edit device information............ 458, 513
Erase connection information.......... 514
Interface cable................................. 426
iOS.................................................. 427
IP address....................... 499, 503, 507
Index
Manual setting.............................. 535
SSID................................ 441, 462, 470
MAC address........................... 496, 516
Switch network................ 498, 502, 505
Network........................... 441, 462, 470
Use with EOS software................... 461
Network settings.............................. 531
Auto send..................................... 466
Nickname........................................ 514
EOS Utility.................................... 461
Notes on wireless
Image Transfer Utility 2................ 466
communications.............................. 528
Viewable images............................. 458
Pairing............................................. 431
View info screen.............................. 516
Password................................. 506, 533
Viewing images............................... 444
PictBridge........................................ 471
Virtual keyboard.............................. 534
Printer/Printing................................. 472
Wi-Fi printer..................................... 469
Print image...................................... 472
Wi-Fi settings........................... 429, 533
Print order........................................ 475
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup).......... 496
PBC mode.................................... 497
Print settings
Cropping....................................... 479
PIN mode..................................... 501
Date/file number........................... 477
Wind filter........................................... 202
Image optimization....................... 477
Wireless communication
Number of copies......................... 478
settings....................................... 407, 423
Paper settings.............................. 475
Quick Control................................... 449
Reconnecting.................................. 509
Remote operation............................ 444
Z
Zone AF...................................... 266, 271
Resize image................... 447, 453, 489
Send image shown.................. 450, 487
Send images to smartphone........... 448
Sending all images
on the card.............................. 454, 491
Sending images that match
search conditions.................... 455, 493
Sending images to
a Web service.................................. 481
Send selected.......................... 451, 488
643
CANON INC.
30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
Europe, Africa & Middle East
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
For your local Canon office, please refer to your warranty card or to www.canon-europe.com/Support
The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N.V.
The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of June 2019.
For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,
contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual,
refer to the Canon website.
CEL-SX5DA214
© CANON INC. 2019
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising